Home

MX9 User`s Guide - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility

1. cccccceceeeseeeeeeteeeeees 13 6 Desktop Cradle Connector Jdenttters A 13 7 Connecting a Headset Audio Cable ccceecececeeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeaeeee 13 7 Connecting the Power Cable c cccccccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeesenaeeseeaeeea 13 7 Connecting a Serial Cable cccccccccceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeeceaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeseneeeeseneeees 13 7 Connecting an Ethernet RU 45 Cable ceeccececeeeeeeenee scence eeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeeseaeesseneeee 13 7 Connecting a USB Host and USB Client Cable 13 7 Cradle EE 13 7 Docked LED ici iira a nia EAE died Seis betes der epedendeiee es E EE A A A 13 7 Sp ra Batter LED i rrai see ege deat ege EE 13 8 MX9 System Status LED Status when Docked A 13 8 Docking and Undocking the MA 13 8 Dock the Mag iersinii a na AE AEEA AEE AS AE aE NEES ENEE E EENEG 13 8 Undock IRE MAS eaae eae aa EE 13 8 Inserting Removing a Spare Battery from the Desktop Cradle ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeees 13 8 Inserting a Spare Battery cccccccecceeeteeeeeneeeceneeeceaeeeceeaeeceaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaeesseaeesseaeesssaeeessnees 13 9 Removing a Spare Battery 0 cccccecccececeeeeeneeeeeneeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseaeeesecaeessaeesssaeeesenees 13 9 Desktop Cradle Help 13 9 Using a Powered Vehicle Cradle 13 11 ler teie e e 13 11 Quick Start Vehicle Cradle A 13 11 elle EE 13 12 FRONT UE
2. 2 Insert the AC adapter single pin cable 2 3 Connect the AC Adapter to a power source wall outlet 4 Insert the USB client plug 3 into the target USB Client port The MX9 and the USB client are connected Connecting the Serial and Power Cable AC DC Adapter must be assembled before this procedure begins Do not connect AC power to the AC Adapter until instructed to do so in the following procedure 1 Holding the cable I O connector 1 squeeze the catch release buttons in until the catches are open Connect the cable to the MX9 I O port by matching the shape of the I O connector on the cable with the shape of the I O connector at the base of the MX9 Release the catch release buttons 2 Connect the AC adapter single pin cable end 2 3 Connect the assembled AC DC Adapter to a power source wall outlet 4 Connect the RS232 cable end 3 to the desired serial device Turn the thumbscrews clockwise until the connection is finger tight The MX9 and the serial device are connected Connecting an External Power Supply To apply external power to the MX9 follow the steps below in sequence 1 Plug the 3 prong AC adapter cable end 3 of the external power assembly into an AC power source e g wall outlet 2 Firmly press the female end 4 of the power cable into the male connector 2 on the power adapter When AC power is being supplied to the power adapter the LED on the power adapter illuminates
3. Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type wpa TKIP sl EAP FAST WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 6 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials stored or sign on and the type of PAC provisioning automatic or manual 7 Tap on the Credentials button 10 29 8 To use Stored Credentials tap on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials with automatic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Credentials fre A User Password PAC Filename PAC Password 9 To use Sign On credentials Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network 10 To use Stored Credentials e Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required otherwise enter the User name e Enter the password 11 To use Automatic PAC Provisioning no additional entries are required 12 To use manual PAC Provisioning e Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password e The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable The PAC file must not be read only 13 Tap OK then tap the Commit button 14 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main Tab and
4. 5 75 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a client and a host computer A partnership is defined by two objects a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two hosts When the mobile device is cold booted the random number is deleted and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name Control Panel gt System gt Device Name If the cold booted mobile device tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC a new random number is gener ated for the mobile device and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the mobile device be changed If the mobile device is associated with a second host changing the name will destroy that partnership as well This can cause some confusion when re establishing partnerships with hosts 5 76 Configuring the MX9 with HSM Connect or LXEConnect HSM Connect allows a user to view the MX9 screen remotely from a host PC using an ActiveSync connection e ActiveSync is already installed on the MX9 The MX9 is preconfigured to establish a USB ActiveSync connection to a host PC when the MX9 USB Power cable connects the
5. Blue 7 A Blue n ol Blue E O Blue a N Blue E Blue Kc Re Wu Blue Down Arrow Up Arrow Result Notes Control mode Escape Space Enter Capslock is on or off Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Shifted letter Back one space Tab Backtab Cursor up one line Cursor down one line Cursor right one space Cursor left one space Insert mode Insert mode Delete one character Home End Up 1 screen Down 1 screen F1 mode F2 mode F3 mode F4 mode F5 mode F6 mode F7 mode F8 mode F9 mode F10 mode F11 mode F12 mode F13 mode F14 mode F15 mode F16 mode F17 mode F18 mode F19 mode 11 7 Result Notes ee ar ser a E mee Press these keys in this order To get this function F20 lowercase is the default F24 mode JElclolalofy sal gt S x AIn ct la o JO Jw ja I 7 X a b c d e f g h A C E F G H J K L seo je IS seo o je mre F4 KG BIR IE IE IE IE IR IE IE IF IE L Le B LILE IE IE EIE GE ELE FEE VE op DID ID W W W Toon W W W W cc IN 1O St AIAN al ta LiL JL wolololjolofeflojel _ il lt xJ sJE cloljaloj elo e sJal gt eS x a N ct Jo jo JO wie IO JZ I Jo S Ja 11 8 To get this function M SHFT N SHFT O SHFT P SHFT Q SHFT R SHFT S SHFT
6. Front View Honeywell gt MULTI charger Battery Charging Pocket Battery Charging Pocket LED Battery Pocket Spring Clip Battery Retaining Clip AC Power port atk Go MM Installation Assemble the Power Supply Assemble the AC adapter for the MX9 Battery Charger before connecting it to the charger The AC power supply for the battery charger is shipped with the battery charger Contact Customer Support page 15 1 if there is no AC cable The battery charger power supply is intended for use with the MX9 battery charger only 1 Plug the 3 prong end of the cable into an AC wall outlet 2 Firmly press the female end of the power cable into the male connector on the AC power adapter An LED on the power adapter illuminates when AC power is available 3 AC power is now being applied to the power adapter 12 3 Setup Place the battery charger on a flat horizontal hard surface or fasten securely to a stable surface using the keyhole open ings on the bottom of the battery charger See Mounting Do not insert battery packs until the battery charger has finished powering up 1 Assemble the Power Supply and connect it to an indoor power source e g wall outlet 2 Insert the power connector from the power supply into the power outlet at the back of the battery charger 3 AC power is now being applied to the battery charger and it begins to power up 4 Charge pocket LEDs flash whi
7. Holster with Handle The MX9 is inserted upside down in the holster with the touch screen facing the belt connecting the holster to the body Guide the installed trigger handle into the trigger handle notch Carrycase Remove the hand strap components from the MX9 Open the zippered case until there is enough space to insert the MX9 into the case The touch screen must face forward so It and the keypad are visible through the windows in the carrycase Close the zippers If desired attach the hand strap components to the zippered case Using the Input Panel Virtual Keyboard Input Panel Hl 1121314151617 1819 101 1ale tly julifolpi tii The input panel virtual keyboard is always available when needed e g text entry Place the cursor in the text entry field and using the stylus e Tap the Shift key to type one capital letter e Tap the CAPS key to type all capital letters e Tap the ali key to access symbols Some applications do not automatically display the Input Panel In this case do the following to use the Input Panel La Input Panel icon in the taskbar ET Keyboard icon in the taskbar 1 Tap the Input Panel or Keyboard icon in the taskbar 2 Select Keyboard from the menu 3 Move the cursor into the text entry field when you want to enter data using the Input Panel 4 When finished entering data tap the icon in the Taskbar again Select Hide Input Panel Connecting Bluetooth Devices
8. Press these keys in this order ca ee Power fC S Suspend toggle when Power id Volume Up Volume Down Display Backlight Lighter Display Backlight Darker Scan Right Scan Left Alt mode Ctrl mode Escape Space SPC mmer TI REECH rar Capslock toggle Bue Mapped Diamond 1 Key Mapped Diamond 2 Key Uppercase Alpha toggle SHIFT Back space easel EE RE Se D D GC EE Tab a a es The following keymap is used on an MX9 that is not running a Terminal Emulator Terminal emulators use a separate keymap A modifier key pressed after itself toggles that modifier key off Any key press other than a modifier key following any modifier key unsticks the modifier keys Any key press other than up or down arrow exits volume control mode or backlight control mode Result Notes Windows Start menu Power On Suspend or Resume mode Volume increases Volume decreases Backlight lighter Backlight darker Activate decoder Activate decoder Alt mode Control mode Escape Space Enter Capslock is on or off Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Shifted letter Back one space Tab 11 11 To get this function Backtab Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor Right Cursor Left Insert Delete Home End Page up Page down F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F17 F18
9. To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Enabler icon on the desktop Select File gt Settings Select the Adapters tab Choose settings for the Use Manual Settings parameter Choose settings for Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings and Use Avalanche Network Profile Click the OK button to save the changes Reboot the device NO a PON Preparing a Device for Remote Management Two additional utilities are necessary for remote management Remote Management Utility RMU The Remote Management Utility RMU must be installed on all mobile devices first then you can control mobile device reboot storage RAM adjustment real time updates and Avalanche Enabler properties If in doubt verify RMU CE CAB exists in the System folder If the RMU CE CAB file is present when the Enabler is installed the RMU is also installed Important If the OS package includes double byte Asian fonts the storage RAM property of the RMU must be higher than the default value 40MB If the amount of storage RAM is too low the Enabler returns a Mobile unit out of resources error To determine the minimum value required inspect the RMU StorageSpaceAvailable gt nn parameter in the Criteria field for the OS package Generally this setting should be approximately the amount of storage space available on the Storage Card For example
10. Registry Gel Ki Ea Registry Load User Defaults Save User Defaults Load Factory Defaults Warmboot Restart Load User Defaults Button When tapped a standard load file dialog is opened to allow the user to pick a Registry Save RSG file The applet then copies the specified User registry file to the Active registry The user is asked to verify a reboot and then the applet does a warmboot to activate the new registry Load User Defaults takes 20 seconds from SD card or 10 seconds from internal flash Save User Defaults Button When tapped a standard Save File dialog is opened to allow the user to name the Registry Save RSG file The applet then copies the Active registry to the specified User registry file Save User Defaults takes 30 seconds to save to SD card or 10 seconds to save to internal flash Load Factory Defaults Button The applet copies the Factory Default registry from the OS to the Active registry by deleting the current registry The user is asked to verify a reboot and then the applet does a restart to activate the factory default registry If a user password has been set the applet warns the user that the password will be erased and asks them to enter it before the reboot is allowed Warmboot Button When tapped the OS does a registry flush Active registry saved to Flash registry hive and then a warmboot Restart Button When tapped the OS does a registry
11. 10 Fuse 5 A slow blow fuse Fuses are USER SUPPLIED Note Refer to the Wiring Schematic that follows for wiring colors and connections Caution For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle This fused circuit requires a five Amp maximum time delay slow blow high interrupting A rating fuse If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery positive terminal Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Caution Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective A enclosure Caution For installation by trained service personnel only A 13 15 Warning Risk of ignition or explosion Explosive gas mixture may be vented from battery Work only in well ventilated area Avoid creating arcs and sparks at battery terminals Wiring Schematic Existing Circuitry on Vehicle lift Battery Main Switch Vo Vo 5A slow fuse Close to power source Vehicle Mounted Cradle Red White Blue Red Black Isolated DC DC Use color scheme corresponding to input wire provided Connecting to Vehicle Power The vehicl
12. CapsLock Touch Screen Disable M Enable Keypad Backlight V Enable RFTerm auto launch CapsLock By default CapsLock is disabled after a warmboot To enable CapsLock after a warmboot tap this check box Touch Screen Disable By default the MX9 touch screen is enabled To disable the touch screen after a warmboot tap this check box Enable Keypad Backlight The keypad backlight default setting is to follow the display backlight setting until it is changed by the user Uncheck the check box to disable the keypad backlight Enable RFTerm Auto Launch This option is enabled by default This option when disabled unchecked stops RFTerm from launching at bootup oo is not installed or has not been added to the registry Launch sequence this check box is ignored at Status Popup Tab Options on this tab configure the Status Popup window When the Status popup window is displayed it is placed on top of the window in focus and hides any data beneath it It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key sequence MX9 Options ka low Communication Misc Status Popup 5 Second Timeout Admin User RFTerm SecID s M Admin V User AIC Power M Admin V User CapsLock M Admin V User ActiveSync M Admin V User Network Status M Admin V User WLAN Radio M Admin V User Battery Meter M Admin V User Key Modifier Status V Admin V User Bluetooth Status M
13. Code ICH e c2 Code ICH e c3 Code CO 24 character bar code is Code 128 e c4 Code ICH Custom IDs 3 AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner e c1 min length 34 max length 34 strip leading 2 strip trailing 18 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c2 min length 26 max length 26 strip leading 2 strip trailing 10 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c3 min length 24 max length 24 strip leading 2 strip trailing 8 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c4 min length 20 max length 20 strip leading 0 strip trailing 4 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 00 4 Add the AIM custom symbologies Refer to Symbology Settings page 8 9 for instruction Code ID Custom sl Symbology cl z des Enable Min EI Max EI Stri wee E Code ID Trailing jis Barcode Data IT Suffix 5 Tap the Barcode Data button 6 Tap the Add button 7 Add the data for the match codes R 10 a ra 8 Refer to the previous section Barcode Data Match List page 8 12 for instruction 9 Scan a bar code and examine the result Processing Tab The Processing tab contains a user configurable key delay that applies to scanned bar codes as they are input when Remote Desktop is the application with the input focus Enable buffered key output Enabled Same buffer limit characters 32 Delay between key buffers 75
14. Delete Configure shortcuts to other applications on the MX9 Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel This limits the user s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display SaaS Avalanche Update Settings Ki Pei Shortcuts SaaS Adapters Status SaaS Settings Disable Saas Scan Configure SaaS Manually Configure Saat Customer Use to configure the Enabler to connect with Avalanche on Demand This is a Software as a Service version of Ava lanche Using either of the SaaS configuration options below assumes the user has registered with Wavelink Disable SaaS No SaaS connection is used Scan Configure SaaS Scan bar codes printed from within the Avalanche Console to configure the Enabler for the SaaS connection Manually Configure SaaS Manually enter the SaaS connection information Enter the server address on the Connection tab and the customer ID in the Company text box Adapters Note Review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet Avalanche Update Settings Ki a Shortcuts Adapters status All Vv Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings Current sDccFi061 EN V Primary adapter V Icon on taskbar Use Avalanche Network Profile A Use Manual Settings ir Manage Network Sett
15. Heating elements activate when ambient temperature drops below 0 C 32 F Honeywell recommends using the stylus when performing screen touch functions on the display when the temperature drops below freezing There may be some condensation as the MX9 moves in and out of cold storage areas The condensation on the touch screen and the scan aperture quickly dissipates Although no user interaction is required to enable the heating elements the automatically controlled heating elements can be enabled and disabled using the Heaters tab in the Peripherals panel Vibrate Indicator The MX9 has a vibration motor It is user configurable to vibrate on a good scan bad scan or via an API call The vibrations from this motor are detectable under the handstrap at the rear of non handle units or through the trigger handle when a trigger handle is installed Three vibration duration settings are provided for both good and bad scan The settings can be assigned using the Data Collection Notification control panel The default setting for both good scan and bad scan vibration is Off Scanners and Imagers Note The maximum number of communication ports from which the Data Collection Wedge can simultaneously support input is three Integrated Bar Code Decoders The MX9 may have any of the following bar code reader built in integrated and protected by the hatch e Symbol SE955 short range laser scanner engine bar code decoding only e Symbol S
16. MO Device description WindowsCE Device The device name and description can be changed by the user Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes This information is used to identify the MX9 to other computers and devices Copyrights Tab Portions of this software are based on NCSA Mosaic NCSA Mosaic was developed by the National Center for Supercomputing Applications at the University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Distributed E This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user Terminal Server Client Licenses Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Terminal Server Client Licenses Terminal Server Client Licenses B Stored Licenses H Any licenses stored on the MX9 appear in the drop down list Select a license and tap the Close button The license is avail able for use immediately Volume and Sounds Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Volume amp Sounds Note An application may override the control of the speaker volume Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life Set volume parameters and assign sound WAV files to CE events using these options You can also select deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft the MX9 emits a tone eac
17. The Restart or cold boot function reboots the device and reloads RAM Use the Registry control panel Load Factory Defaults button to erase the registry and set the registry back to factory defaults Note Because of the extreme nature of Restart Honeywell recommends using this command only in an emergency or when instructed to do so as part of a specific MX9 procedure Installing the SIM Card Tools required standard size Phillips screwdriver not supplied Note Installing or removing accessories should be performed on a clean well lit surface When necessary protect the work surface the MX9 and components from electrostatic discharge Note Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 if you need help when installing or removing a SIM card The expansion slots in the MX9 are accessible via the hatch The hatch can be opened using a standard size screwdriver When the hatch is opened the MX9 automatically shuts down It is good practice to save any changes then perform an orderly shutdown to preserve RAM contents before opening the hatch 1 Summit radio card located in the back GK eg GEN half of the MX9 assembly SIM card located in the front half of the MX9 assembly 3 SD card located in the front half of the MX9 assembly On Tan When the hatch is open during this procedure do not remove any cables or allow them to kink When the hatch is being closed carefully move cables
18. 2004 through Tuesday July 01 2014 Serial Number 12345678 SOABCDEF 12345678 S0ABCDEF 12 Tap Yes to import the certificate 13 Once the certificate is installed return to the proper authentication section earlier in this manual Generating a User Certificate The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority 1 To request the user certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv 2 Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device 10 38 Connect to 10 1 2 204 Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name U Le Password C Remember my password 3 This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file Windows CE equipped devices such as the MX9 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate Microsoft Certificate Services Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation li
19. Addenda Read 2 Digit When enabled transmit the 2 digit addenda Default is disabled Read 5 Digit When enable transmit the 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Required When enabled only transmit bar codes with a 2 or 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Insert Separator When enabled insert a space between the code and addenda Default is enabled EAN 13 Advanced Properties EAN13 Advanced Properties Ki ES IT Transmit Check Character Addenda Read 2 Digit Read 5 Digit Required Insert Separator Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is disabled Addenda Read 2 Digit When enabled transmit the 2 digit addenda Default is disabled Read 5 Digit When enable transmit the 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Required When enabled only transmit bar codes with a 2 or 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Insert Separator When enabled insert a space between the code and addenda Default is disabled Note A UPCA decoding algorithm will also decode EAN 13 labels For correct operation either disable the UPCA symbology when using EAN 13 labels or configure the UPCA settings to match the EAN 13 settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Advanced Properties 125 Advanced Properties Ki ES Check Character Required Transmit Check Character Required When enabled the check character is required Default i
20. Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate between symbologies e Se Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is not enabled the code ID is sent as part of the bar code data to an application e When Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is enabled the entire Code ID string is stripped i e treated as a Code ID es UPC EAN Codes only The Code ID for supplemental bar codes is not stripped e When Enable Code ID is set to AIM Symbol or HHP Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list of standard Code IDs e When Enable Code ID is set to Custom Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code IDs e Symbol equipped devices are configured using configuration bar codes When Enable Code ID is set to Custom AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of the Custom Code ID For example if a Custom Code ID AAA is created to be read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 JA1 the Custom Code ID must be entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID JA1AAA e When Enable Code ID is set to None Code IDs are ignored e Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog but will be processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the Code ID e The external scanner operation cannot be controlled by the MX9 scanner driver therefore a good beep may be sounded from the exter
21. Please reenter When RF Term is not installed on the mobile device the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use Issue Can t locate the password that has been set by the administrator Solution Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for administrator password help AppLock Error Messages Any messages whose first word ends in ing is output prior to the action described in the message For example Switching to admin hotkey press is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process For all operations that can result in an error an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs These messages contain the word failure These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather than with an error For processing level messages Enter is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and Exit is logged at the end just before the return of the function specified in the message Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock LOG_EX Error reading hotkey using default A hotkey is required If there is a failure reading the LOG_ERROR hotkey the internal factory default is used App Command Line lt Command line gt LOG_PROCESSING App lt Application name gt LOG_PR
22. T SHFT U SHFT V SHFT WwW SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT Orange Orange Blue Blue Orange Blue Blue Orange Orange Orange Blue Orange SHFT Orange SHFT Orange SHFT Orange SHFT A AR ei Press these keys in this order O O 1 number i 2 number 3 number 4 number Result Notes CO CO N Sj ory gt N N lt X s lt c A o D O 3 O z zZ 0 zero Period Period Dash or minus sign Reverse Solidus or Backslash Solidus or Forward slash Left square bracket Right square bracket Acute accent or single quote or apostrophe Comma Semicolon Equal sign Exclamation mark Exclamation mark At sign At sign Number sign Number sign Dollar sign Dollar sign 11 9 To get this function Press these keys in this order i 6 number z amp 7 number i alpha 9 number S ES ESCHER Enter ENTER Result Notes Percent sign Percent sign Caret or circumflex Caret or circumflex Ampersand Ampersand Asterisk Asterisk Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Double quote Curly left brace Curly right brace Vertical bar or Pipe Tilde Less than mark Greater than mark Colon Plus sign Question mark Underscore or horizontal bar Enter 11 10 38 key Keypad KeyMap SYS e E ESC ALPHA CTRL ALT To get this function Windows key On when Off
23. Usps4cb The Data Collection Wedge does not manage mutually exclusive option selections The user is responsible for under standing the options that can co exist for the data collection device The documentation provided from the manufac turer of the scanner imager being managed describes the interaction between symbologies and their configurations Advanced Button Hand Held Products Imager Only The Advanced button is only available if a Hand Held Products Imager is in use Because the Hand Held Products imager does not support configuration bar codes available in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide the Advanced button function allows configuration parameters to be set for many of the HHP imager supported bar codes If there are advanced configuration options for the selected Hand Held Products Imager symbology an Advanced but ton is displayed in the lower right corner of the panel When the Enable check box is empty the Advanced button is dimmed for a symbology with advanced configuration parameters Not all bar code symbologies have configuration parameters so the Advanced button is not present for all symbologies Sections that follow are the HHP symbologies with advanced configuration parameters that can be changed by the user Codabar Advanced Properties Codabar Advanced Proper Ki ES Check Character Required IT Transmit Start Stop Character Transmit Check Charac
24. VO Hl GE 13 23 Vehicle Cradle Strain Relief Cable Camp 13 23 Vehicle Cradle LED kee d e deet ENEE a a ii aea aaa eee 13 24 Docking the MX9 in a Vehicle Mounted Cradle 13 24 Removing the MX9 from the Mounted Vehicle Cradle cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeneeeteneeeeeneeeee 13 25 Powered Vehicle Cradle Help 13 25 Chapter 14 Technical Specifications Mag Specifications e g Ze ced cece es ee NEE OSNA 14 1 MX9 Dimensions and Weight AA 14 1 MX9 Environmental Specifications ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeecaeeesaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeessaees 14 2 Main Battery Technical Specifications cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeesesaeeensnees 14 2 Wireless Radio EE 14 2 Bluetooth System Compatibility 20 00 00 ccccecceeeceeeeeeee eects eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseaeeescaeeeseaeeeneeeeteeeee 14 3 WWAN Radio icenian eitn DOE EEN EAR EE 14 3 AC DC Wall Adapter for MX9 Desktop Cradle Battery Charge 14 3 GPS Receiver Technical Specifications ccecececeeeeeeeneee cence eteneeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeeenaes 14 3 Desktop and Vehicle Cradle Pinout R8232 Connechor sssssssssesseesreesiserirserirsrirtstrnrinnsrnntennsenn 14 4 Desktop Cradle Technical Specifications cceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeecaaeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeee 14 5 Battery Charger Technical Gpechflcetons ceases eeeaeeseeeeeeaeeseneeesenaeeeseaeeen 14 5 Electrical
25. characters on the screen are displayed as an as they are typed and when they are viewed When Off password characters are not masked Options are On Off A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped If Hide Password is On the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry dialog box The password is case sensitive This value is masked when the Admin is logged out Options are none 10 15 Parameter Auth Timeout Certs Path Ping Payload Ping Timeout ms Ping Delay ms Default g E 32 Bytes 5000 1000 Function Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the association fails No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the user is again prompted to enter the credentials Options are An integer from 3 to 60 A valid directory path of up to 64 characters where WPA Certificate Authority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device when not using the Windows certifcates store The Windows folder must exist before assigning the path in this parameter See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 10 19 for instru
26. key 11 Diamond 1 key 12 Cursor up and down Keys 38 Key Keypad ALPHA S Ss KP e n Diamond 1 key Function keys Tab Space Backspace keys Q Diamond 2 key Orange key Escape ESC key Power key ONOaOKR WD Alpha key 9 Control CTRL key 10 Shift SHIFT key Es 11 Alt key Ee 12 Blue key 13 Cursor up and down keys ESC ALPHA CTRL ALT TAB SPC BKSP A v Top Bar code reader aperture Input Output Connector Tethered boot cover covers I O connector not shown Back Battery Bay 1 Battery Charging Terminals 2 Battery Bay 3 Battery Bay Access Tab 1 Trigger 2 Tether attach point Stylus storage bay in trigger handle base Hand Strap 1 Hand strap connector upper 2 Stylus holder on Hand strap 3 Hand strap connector lower End User License Agreement When a new MX9 starts up a EULA is displayed on the touch screen It remains on the screen until the Accept or Decline button is tapped with a stylus e Tap the Accept button to accept the EULA terms and the MX9 continues the startup process The EULA is not presented to the user again e Tap the Decline button to decline the EULA and the MX9 will reboot It will continue to reboot until the Accept button is tapped with the stylus Note The EULA will be presented after any operating system upgrade or re installation including language specific operati
27. personal computers etc that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive RF Notices This device can contain transmitter Module s FCC ID DDZLXE4830P KDZBT001 E09HHSR3 This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment under 47 CFR 2 1093 paragraph d 2 FCC EU RF Exposure Guidelines Safety Information The device complies with internationally recognized standards covering human exposure to electromagnetic fields from radio devices Reducing RF Exposure Use Properly It is advisable to use the device only in the normal operating position Handheld Devices This device was tested for typical body worn operation Use only Honeywell tested and approved accessories to ensure FCC Compliance The use of third party accessories may not comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements and should be avoided To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements this device must be operated in the hand with a minimum separation distance of 2 5 cm 0 9842 inch or more from a person s body or with the following body worn accessories as shown in the applicable section of the manual see Body Worn Accessories page 2 14 MX9420HOLSTER MX9423HOLSTER MX9410CASE Shoulder strap is not approved with use with WWAN configurations Bluetooth Bluetooth Class II Honeywell Scanning amp Mobility Product Environmental Information Refer to www honeywellaidc com
28. uf Pl Assign settings by tapping radio buttons and selecting keys from the drop down boxes Tap the OK button when fin ished The changes take effect immediately Remap a Single Key 1 2 3 4 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select the value from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Tap OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control Remap a Key to a Unicode Value 1 5 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options 2 Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list 3 4 There are two Unicode text boxes located on the lower part of this tab Enter the Unicode value in the left Select Unicode from the Remapped Key pulldown list textbox and the Unicode character is displayed in the right textbox Tap OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key Sequence 1 Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list ak w PY 6 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pulldown list Select the first key for the multiple key sequence from the pulldown list Press the Add button to add the key to the multiple key sequence shown in the Key Sequence box Repeat this step until all keys desired have been added to the key sequence If necessary use the Clear button to erase all entries in the Key Se
29. 13 12 Back VEW oora besen EES EA 13 12 RAM Bracket Mounting s sensi neia aaia EE a A ES E a E aR 13 13 RAM Bracket Mounting Poimte AAA 13 13 Vehicle Cradle RAM Ball Aesembhy 13 14 RAM Circular Base Footprtrt 13 14 DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Side of Ud 13 15 Connecting Electrical Cables to Power Sources sssesieesseiesrieriiseriisrirssrrrterntssinterenene 13 15 Specifications for Electrical Gupphy 13 15 17 Wiring en LEE 13 16 Connecting to Vehicle Power 13 16 DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Top Of U N 13 18 Connecting Electrical Cables to Power Sources sssseseseseieeriierisrrrtsrirssrrrternnssrnterensne 13 18 Specifications for Electrical Gupphy 13 18 Wiring Gchemate tnn nanennnnnnnn nnet 13 19 Connecting Vehicle Electrical Supply cccceeecceeceneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeseeeeeeecaeeessaeeessneeesenaees 13 19 Vehicle 12V Bare Wire Adapter AAA 13 21 Vehicle Cable Connection Fuse Not Shown sesssesssessrseriiserissrirterrtsrintsrnnssrnnsrrnsrnennt 13 21 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle 0 ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeseeeseeeeseneeesennees 13 21 Connecting Vehicle 12 VDC Gupphy 13 22 Connecting Power Supply to Vehicle Cradle c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseneeeseaeeeeenaeeesaes 13 22 Attaching a Serial or I O Connector ccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeaeeeteaeeseieeeseiaeeeseaeeee 13 22 Serial Interface A 13 22
30. Conirol Panel gt KeyMap Use this control panel option to assign key functions to mappable keys available on your MX9 determine application launch sequences and program command Run sequences Note KeyMap Control Panel options LaunchApp and RunCmd do not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other Control Panel applets For example the AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option Setting Default KeyMap Modifier Mode Edit String String Empty Launch App1 App2 App3 App4 App Opt RunCmd Cmd1 Cmd2 Cmd3 Cmd4 File Parm The KeyPad panels can be used to perform the following functions es Remap a Single Key page 5 32 es Remap a Key to a Unicode Value page 5 32 e Remap a Key Sequence page 5 32 to remap a key to a string of up to 16 keys or Unicode values in any combination e Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values page 5 33 e Remap an Application page 5 33 to remap a key to launch a user selected application e Remap a Command page 5 33 Note KeyPad Control Panel options LaunchApp and RunCmd do not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other Control Panel applets For example the AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option KeyMap Tab Key Keypad Control Ei ok A KeyMap Launch4pp RunCmd Modifier Mode None Blue Orange Shift lt i gt sl Remapped Key Field Exit D Key Sequence a
31. For persist keys specifying EXE or BAT files the executing process is started and then Launch will continue leaving the loading process to run independently For other persist keys including CAB files Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing This is important for example to ensure that a CAB file is installed before the EXE files from the CAB file are run Note that the auto launch process can also launch batch files BAT executable files EXE registry setting files REG or sound files WAV The mechanism is the same as listed above but the appropriate CE application is called depending on file type Note Registry entries may vary depending on software revision level and options LAUNCH EXE and Persistent Storage If any of the following directories are created in the System folder Launch automatically copies all of the files in these directories to the respective folder on the SD CF drive e AppMgr e Desktop e Favorites e Fonts e Help e Programs e Recent Note Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System gt Startup They are not copied to another folder REGEDIT EXE Registry Editor Use caution when editing the Registry and make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made REGLOAD EXE Double tapping a registry settings file e g REG causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry This is simil
32. From the popup menu choose the port you want to connect to Only the available ports are shown 5 Tap the Configure button 6 Under the Port Settings tab choose the appropriate baud rate Data bits parity and stop bits remain at 8 none and 1 respectively 7 Under the Call Options tab be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone since a direct connection will not have a dial tone Set the timeout parameter default is 5 seconds Tap OK 8 TCP IP Settings should not need to change from defaults Tap the Finish button to create the new connection 9 Close the Remote Networking window 10 To activate the new connection select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection and tap the Change Connection button 11 Select the new connection Tap OK twice 12 Close the Control Panel window 13 Connect the desktop PC to the mobile device with the appropriate cable 14 Tap the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection You can activate the connection by double tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window but this will only start an RAS Remote Access Services session and does not start ActiveSync properly Network Capture Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Capture Note Verify the date and time before using the logging utilities to ensure meaningful data The Network Capture panels provide configuration options for logging utilities Two types of logging are
33. MX9 is not Write Capable 1 The OPP client initiates a connection to the MX9 by selecting a file to push to the MX9 2 The file is rejected silently no notification to the MX9 user Notifications disabled MX9 is Write Capable 1 The OPP client initiates a connection to the MX9 by selecting a file to push to the MX9 2 The file is accepted silently no notification to the MX9 user Notifications disabled MX9 is not Write Capable 1 The OPP client initiates a connection to the MX9 by selecting a file to push to the MX9 2 The file is rejected silently no notification to the MX9 user MX9 Pushes File to Remote Device This section assumes that a device supporting OPP is paired with the MX9 The MX9 OPP client initiates a connection to the remote device OPP server by selecting a file to push to the remote device The MX9 sends the file and disconnects The remote device may prompt the user of that remote device to accept the incoming request depending on the security settings of the remote device The prompt may be displayed more than once or it may not be displayed at all Notifications enabled The file is pushed to the remote device and the user of the MX9 is notified of the completion of the push Notifications disabled The file is pushed to the remote device and the user of the MX9 is not notified of the completion of the push EZPair or LXEZ Pairing and External Applications Because only one application can
34. Premium Server CA Secure Server Certification Authority GTE CyberTrust Root D GTE CyberTrust Global Root 10 19 6 Tap to uncheck and disable the Use full trusted store check box 7 Select the desired certificate and tap the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert text box 8 Tap OK to exit the Credentials screen and then tap Commit to save the profile changes 10 20 Configuring Profiles Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions See your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements To begin the configuration process 1 On the Main Tab tap the Admin Login button and enter the password 2 Edit the default profile with the parameters for your network Select the Default profile from the pull down menu 3 Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section determined by network security type and tap the Commit button to save the changes IMPORTANT Remember to tap the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not tapped before an
35. Profile C SSIDO1 ssipo2 ssibo3 SsIDO4 The Auto Profile selection screen displays all currently configured profiles Tap on the check box for any profiles that are to be included in Auto Profile selection then tap OK to save To enable Auto Profile tap the On button on the Main tab When Auto Profile is On if the radio goes out of range from the currently selected profile the radio then begins to attempt to connect to the profiles listed under Auto Profile The search continues until e the SCU connects to and if necessary authenticates with one of the specified profiles or e the Off button is tapped to turn off Auto Profile Note Do not include any profiles with an Ad Hoc Radio Mode in this listing Admin Login To login to Administrator mode tap the Admin Login button Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button or the OK button to logout The Administrator remains logged in when the SCU is not closed and a Suspend Resume function is performed 10 4 Admin Password Entry ES Enter Admin Password Enter the Admin password the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive and tap OK If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed The Administrator default password can be changed on the Main Tab page 10 3 The end user can e Turn the radio on or off
36. Remote Desktop Autologon By default Remote Desktop Autologon is disabled Tap this check box to enable Remote Desktop Autologon Note The RDP file must be saved in the System folder When prompted use the Save As button to save the RDP file is the System directory If the RDP file is saved in the default root folder location the RDP file will not persist across a warmboot Autolaunch TimeSync By default TimeSync does not automatically run on the MX9 To enable TimeSync to run automatically on the MX9 tap this check box Synchronize with a Local Time Server By default GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection To synchronize with a local time server 1 Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime ini from the My Device gt Windows folder on the mobile device to the host PC 2 Edit the copy of GrabTime ini on the host PC Add the local time server s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers You can optionally delete the remainder of the list 3 Copy the modified GrabTime ini file to the My Device gt System folder on the mobile device The System GrabTime ini file takes precedence over the Windows GrabTime ini file System Grabtime ini also persists after a coldboot Windows Grabtime ini does not persist Misc Tab Options on this tab configure device specific options Note that options not available on the MX9 are dimmed or grayed out MX9 Options zo x Communication Misc Status Popup
37. Sa ites nn etna ae lenis deed 2 25 Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration 802 11 b g and a b g Wireless Client 3 1 Central Processing Um eueeEENEEE NEEN tease devceeasieeeeteeeseeed eeviee svcatt raea aedi a oeiia aa ias 3 1 System MEMON cease eeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeecaeeeceaaeecgaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeaeesaaeesneaeeseeaeeessaeeens 3 1 Internal SD Memory Card 3 1 VIGCO SUDSYSLOM EE 3 1 Power Suppi ue Seed Re ETS dE ENNEN See ee 3 1 Input Output CONMECHON eee eeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee cease seaeeeseaaeeeeeaeeseeaeeesaeeseaeeeecaeeseeaeeeseneeseaas 3 2 Audio Support g et ents rience ete ne ale eee Lot neti ee 3 2 Bluetooth Aes EE BT aie EEN 3 2 WS EEN 3 3 Moder ates cers segs fate E aTa TE civ deacon T RA esas eset cteaiee 3 3 Expansion Slots eege ee a aeia a a A ae ae a da ENE 3 3 Power Key FUNCIONS eieiei idee AINE la KAA EKRU EAR REANA KEA EES 3 4 Status LED Sirani eat ergeet san AE e AE ee deed EE eee 3 4 System Status LED WEEN 3 4 Battery Charging Status LED eeccceceseeeseneeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaaeeseaaeeseaaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaees 3 4 Alpha mode Status LEI aine ilaan sisasis tests eased adacvesceueshs be dates ts digesshavladenseistccestanbedeve 3 4 Bluetooth Status LED EE 3 4 SCANS Stats WED EEN 3 5 Cold Storage ric ima eea ities Nestea alias ent eae eee Ae idee 3 5 Vibrate INGICATON AEE E EEE AEE E dudussieaiedavudaneasyesundrdapacveubdindutitiuteuartianbevedhis 3 5 Scanners and
38. Tab Contents Software GUID Windows CE Version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version FPGA Version and Language Language indicates localized version Hardware CPU Type Codec Type FPGA Version Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions Revision level of software modules and NET Compact Framework Version Utilities Drivers Image API and Internet Explorer Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address Only the first 2 adapters are shown usually radio and ActiveSync Bluetooth MAC address is shown if installed Version window information is retrieved from the registry Version Tab and the Registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor For best results use caution when editing the Registry and make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version tab are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Version in the registry To add a user application to the Version panel create a new string value under the HKLM Software LXE Version key The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window Version strings can be equal to or less than 254 characters Because the strings are displayed in a text box any num ber can be accommodated up to the 64K byte text box limitation Languages The Software tab displays any languages built in
39. Usage Exchange oe Min 384 fees Key Size 1024 Max18384 common key sizes 512 1024 2048 4096 3192 16384 Automatic key container name User specified key M Mark keys as exportable container name Export keys to file Full path name lusertkey pvk J Enable strong private key protection C Store certificate in the local computer certificate store Stores the certificate in the local computer store instead of in the user s certificate store Does not install the root CA s certificate You must be an administrator to generate or use a key in the local machine store Additional Options Request Format CMC OPKCS10 Hash Algorithm SHA 1 ze Only used to sign request C Save request to a file Attributes Friendly Name 7 For the Certificate Template select User 8 Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes 10 41 9 Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied Also specify the private key filename Note Be sure to note the name used for the private key file for example EUSER PVK The certificate file created later in this process must be given the same name for example EUSER CER 10 DO NOT check to use strong private key protection 11 Make any other desired changes and click the Submit button Potential Scripting iolation ES This Web site is requesting a new certificate on your behalf You sh
40. Vv Auto Reconnect Options Report when connection lost This option is Enabled by default There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is lost A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped Tap the ok button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report when reconnected This option is Disabled by default There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is made A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has resumed Tap the ok button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report failure to reconnect This option is Enabled by default The default time delay is 30 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device fails to re connect A visual sig nal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the previously paired Bluetooth devices has failed Tap the X button or ok button to close the dialog box Possible reasons for failure to reconnect Timeout expired without reconnecting attempted to pair with a device that is currently paired with another device attempted to pair with a known device that mov
41. WEP Key Entry zl Enter 10 or 26 Hex digits A F 0 9 OR enter 5 or 13 ASCII characters Tx Key GN o e O4 6 Valid keys are 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters for 40 bit encryption or 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters for 128 bit encryption Enter the key s and tap OK 7 Once configured tap the Commit button 8 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 22 LEAP To use LEAP without WPA make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to LEAP 3 Set Encryption to WEP EAP or Auto WEP depending on SCU version 4 Set Auth Type as follows e If the Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open e If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared e If the AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP STT aU ca OKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit a gt Profile Default EN SDC can Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type auto WEP sl LEAP Save Changes Commit 5 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials 6 To use Stored Credentia
42. Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 30 EAP TLS To use EAP TLS make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set EAP Type to EAP TLS Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 2 3 4 Set Auth Type to Open 5 entries as detailed in this section Tae aU BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global i ya Res Sie New Rename Delete Scan Radio Encryption EAP Type wpa TKIP sl EA amp P TLS WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 6 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials 7 Tap the Credentials button e No entries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name when connecting to the network es For Stored Credentials User and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered 8 Enter these items as directed below Credentials ka Gei User User Cert m CA cert Reeg bd _ Validate server Tice store 9 Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required otherwise enter the User name To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other 10 31 10 Select a user certificate from the Windows ce
43. Worn ACCESSOS ENEE ai aE EA eee eevee bene Na a ANIRE a AEE aaa 2 14 Holster without Handle ssssssssseressesrnsnsnrrnsntnrnnanrenennnnennnannnnnnnnnnnnnnentntannnentannntnnanantnnanenannnn nanena 2 14 Holster us El EE 2 14 e 2 14 Using the Input Panel Virtual Keyboard 2 15 Connecting Bluetooth Devices tenses eeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeeeseieeesseaeeesaes 2 15 Bluetooth On Screen Indicator cence eeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeseaaeeeseeeeseeeeesnaeeeeaes 2 16 Bluetooth LED FUNCIONS ek 2 16 Setting Terminal Emulation Parametere 2 16 Using the AppLock Gwitchpad ceases ccaeeeseaeesecaeeeeeneeesenaeeeneeeee 2 17 Using Be BEE 2 17 Using the Touch Goreen nennt 2 17 Rebooting the MX EE 2 17 VE lee EE 2 17 Restart Or Cold Boot 2 17 Installing the SIM Card EEE 2 18 Attaching the Hand Strap kk 2 19 Attaching the Trigger Handle AAA 2 20 Adjusting the Headset Microphone and Securing the Cable cccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 2 21 Connecting Cables to the Mxp 2 22 Connecting the USB Host and Power Cable 2 22 Connecting the USB Client and Power Cable 2 22 Connecting the Serial and Power Cable ssssesseeessessssssiessirtssrtssritsirserisstirnstnnstintntnnternnsennnnna 2 23 Connecting an External Power Guppiy 2 23 Replacing th CLA Fuee tee NEEN eee ete ees aeia dered seeded nth ntinee david EENEG 2 24 Cleaning the Touch Screen and Scanner Aperture 2 24 Starup Helpies eiin en ae elie
44. and a local desktop or laptop computer Enable or disable touch screen heater and scanner window heater if installed Set the flashlight off timer if the flashlight is installed Use the GPS panel to toggle the GPS receiver on and off Set Power scheme properties Review device status and properties Option Regional and Language Settings page 5 54 Registry page 5 56 Remove Programs page 5 57 Stylus page 5 58 System page 5 59 Terminal Server Client Licenses page 5 62 Volume and Sounds page 5 63 Wi Fi page 5 64 WWAN page 5 64 Function Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on country region and language settings Load User Defaults Save User Defaults Load Factory Defaults and Warmboot Select to remove user installed programs in their entirety Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Enter device name and description Review copyright notices Select a server client license from a drop down list Enable disable volume and sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound WAV files to events Set the parameters for the MX9 Summit client Set parameters for the Wireless Wide Area Network client if installed About Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt About The data cannot be edited by the MX9 user on these panels
45. and the Advanced button available on many of the individual Symbology Settings screen to configure the Hand Held Products Imager There are no configuration bar codes for this imager External Bar Code Readers The MX9 can use the following external bar code readers e Tethered hand held scanners are tethered to a serial port on the MX9 or cradle and are configured by scanning the engine specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer s programming guide The manufacturer s guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader e Wireless hand held Bluetooth scanners are configured by scanning the engine specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer s programming guide The manufacturer s guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader e The body worn Bluetooth Ring Scanner module may be using a Symbol 4400 Ring Imager or a Symbol 955 Ring Scanner The Bluetooth Ring Scanner module is configured by scanning the bar codes in the Bluetooth Ring Scanner Programming Guide Return to Factory Default Settings After scanning the engine specific bar code to return the scanner imager to factory default settings the next step is to open the bar code wedge panel on the mobile device collecting the scanned data Click the OK button to close the panel This action will synchronize all scanner formats for your device Another option you can use to reset the Data Collection panel is to scan the LXEReset bar code for Symbol and Hand Held Products scan engin
46. appearing Once the drivers are loaded the slot can be turned on The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file but before acti vating the slot a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on The default values for the default radio drivers listed below is 1 meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up The auto launch process proceeds as follows e The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto launch e First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present If not the registry entry is ignored If it is present and the Installed flag is not set auto launch makes a copy of the CAB file since it gets deleted by installation and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it e If the Installed flag is set auto launch looks for the FileCheck file If it is present the CAB file is installed and that registry entry is complete If the FileCheck file is not present memory has been lost and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file Then the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry until all registry entries are analyzed e To force execution every time for example for AUTOEXEC BAT use a FileCheck of dummy which will never be found forcing the item to execute e
47. attempt is made to close or browse away from the tab in focus if there are unsaved changes If changes are made to the stored credentials tap Commit to save those changes first before making any additional changes No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to None 4 Set Auth Type to Open Sas Uta 2 BOKD x Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit aen a gt Profile Ja Y spc Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type None v None WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 5 Once configured tap the Commit button 6 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 21 WEP To connect using WEP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to WEP or Manual WEP depending on SCU version 4 Set Auth Type to Open STATT 2 AOK X Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit betat sl yd Profile Default SDC Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type Manual WEP v None WEP keysjPsks 5 Tap the WEP keys PSKs button
48. ccccccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaaeeeseeeeseneeeeseaeeesees 5 54 RUE EE 5 56 REMOVE Programs EEN eed ech Eed EEN deeb ene deve eee a neni ve eee ENEE 5 57 EE 5 58 EE 5 59 General dree Aveta a Ante Bia hts eA ee Ae ae 5 59 Memor TaD os recreriarniop ii ne Aena EN ak e LEN Eaa EN a PAKEA EEEE EENeeH 5 60 Device Name Tab EE 5 60 ele EE en i ei aaae aae nce dark ell elated ek 5 61 Terminal Server Client Llcenses 5 62 V l me and Sounds EE 5 63 Good Scan and Bad Scan Goundes 5 63 Wi GEET 5 64 UE E 5 64 Connection Tabirini ited lie ee A a es a fh ede Pe 5 65 Network TADS minidais Sadtiltiinitiei adil E A teh aut AS 5 66 TLE PAP Tab EE 5 67 Security Taber Aa a et Ae A Al ae ae 5 68 Autoconne6ct Tab wc eve celeecee isean raian a conse checieve ee ENEE EEN EEN AEN 5 69 Admin Tab Tsaari ana a a a aE Roclas tenet aTa EN 5 70 About Tab ege aise a a E E AAE a AE E E A ee 5 71 USING eu 5 72 MX9 without Touch Screen ssessessseessieesrisrsserttsrinterttttintsttnsetntsttnntrnnntnnnennnatennenensnnternnnnn 5 72 initial Set p EEN 5 72 Connect Via USB TEE 5 72 Cable for USB ActiveSync Connechon 5 73 Serial Conpechon soiree arai ein ene leet eevee deste ieee teehee ed een neste aaea stevie averse 5 73 Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection c ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeecaeeeseeeeseneeeseaeeseeaeeee 5 73 Wireless Connection ccccccececcceceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeseaee
49. computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button Tap the Options gt gt button to access the General Display Local Resources Programs and Experience tabs Tap the but ton to access Remote Desktop Connection Help Settings Start gt Settings The Settings menu option may include the following Control Panel All control panels Network Shortcut to the Network and Dialup Connections control panel Connect to a network create a new connection and adjust parameters for client connections Taskbar Set Taskbar parameters Transcriber Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input 1 To make changes to the Transcriber application tap the keyboard icon in the status bar 2 Select Transcriber from the pop up menu 3 Open the Input control panel and tap the Options button Transcriber Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input Panel are available only when Transcriber is selected as the active input method Tap the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Start gt Programs gt Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Tap the button to access Windows Explorer Help Taskbar Start gt Settings gt Taskbar There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windo
50. configurable Netlog is a Windows CE utility that monitors network traffic Netlog creates a CAP file that can be read using Microsoft Windows Network Monitor or any compatible tool that supports CAP files NDISLog monitors the the NDIS interface between the Summit radio and the NDIS driver This utility creates a TXT log file Setting Default Netlog Command options pkt_size in bytes 5000 cap_size in bytes 500000 cap file netlog Promiscuous Mode Disabled NDISLog Command stop file ndislog txt Netlog Tab Use this control panel to configure the Netlog utility By configuring Netlog using the control panel Netlog remains run ning across a warmboot However note that e Netlog first stores data to a file named netlogO cap then netlog1 cap Any time the current file reaches maximum size Netlog switches to the other file e If the log file is stored in the root directory any previous data is lost and a new log file started after the warmboot If the log file is stored in System all previous data is saved across the warmboot e If Netlog is enabled across the warmboot a series of brief popups may be displayed during the boot cycle No user interaction is required Network Capture ka Ki E Netlog worsted Command load unload options start stop Options Fon pkt_size in bytes 500000 cap_size in bytes Cap file System netlog Promiscuous Mode Enabled IfName SDCCF10G1
51. configurable selections s RF Data e Ethernet Data e Serial Data e USB Data Note Pressing and releasing the Power key while the MX9 is in the System Idle state will cause it to transition to the Suspend state e External power applied e Real Time Clock RTC Win32 API call CeRunAppAtTime will not work if this is turned off e Detection of external microphone Wake Up Event Default Settings Enabled Disabled Power key Bluetooth connection Touch screen tap COMM CTS Integrated keypad key press Internal serial port device IRQ USB client connection Push to talk on audio headset External power applied Detection of external microphone Real time clock Trigger handle trigger press Events uel do NOT wake up from Suspend these events are not available to be configured to wake the unit up from suspen e External keyboard mouse e Ethernet data or connection e USB Host data or connection e USB client disconnection e Serial data e Internal Serial port handshaking WAN etc e 802 11 radio e Docked signal e a non powered cradle would not wake the MX9 up but a powered cradle could be a wake up event if External Power is set to be a wake up event e MPF Main Power Failure e Audio data e Display data Critical Suspend The purpose of the Critical Suspend mode is to maintain data stored in RAM with minimum power consumption If the Main Battery is removed the Backup Battery is supplying power to the MX9 duri
52. configuration options are allowed The administrator can configure the following options e Create change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access e Create change the password for administrator access e Assign the name of the application or applications to lock e Select the command line of the application to lock In addition to these configuration options the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions Administrator default values for this device e Administrator Hotkey Shift Ctrl A e User Activation Hotkey Ctrl Spc e Password none e Application path and name none e Application command line none End User Mode The default end user Hotkey Activation key is Ctrl Spc End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows OS key combinations such as close X icon File Exit File Close Alt F4 Alt Tab etc are disabled The Windows OS desktop icons menu bars task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible Task Manager is not available If the end user selects File Exit or Close from the a
53. control character name Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names When a character name is selected from the drop down box the default text Ignore drop is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control Ignore drop is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored Once the user types any character into the Replacement edit control reselecting the character from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore drop in the Replacement edit control Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down box typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control according to the formats defined above and then selecting Assign The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button For example if Carriage Return is replaced by Line Feed by specifying J or Ox0A in the configuration the value OxOd received in any scanned bar code or defined in the prefix or suffix will be replaced with the value Ox0a The Wedge then sends Ctrl J to the receiving application rather than Ctrl M List Box The list box shows all user defined control characters and their assigned replacements All replacements are enclos
54. customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device Message Cannot find kbdhook dll Converted Pwd Could not create event EVT_HOTKEYCHG Could not hook keyboard Could not start thread HotkKeyMon Ctrl after L or X Ctrl pressed Ctrl Decrypt acquire context failure Decrypt acquired context OK Decrypt create hash failure Decrypt created hash OK Decrypt failure Decrypt import key failure Decrypt imported key OK Encrypt acquire context failure Encrypt acquire encrypt context failure Encrypt acquired encrypt context OK Encrypt create hash failure Encrypt create key failure Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt export key failure Encrypt export key length failure Encrypt exported key OK Encrypt failure Encrypt gen key failure Encrypt generate key failure Encrypt get user key failure Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt hash data failure Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt length failure Encrypt out of memory for key Encrypted data OK Explanation and or corrective action The load of the keyboard filter failed This occurs when the dll is missing or is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Converted password from wide to mbs The keyboard filter uses this
55. degrees C Tap the radio button to enable or disable the touch screen and or scanner aperture window heater Flashlight Tab Note Setting has no effect if the flashlight is not installed Peripherals ka OK D Heaters Flashlight Gps Turn Flashlight off after fi Minute x Setting has no effect if device is not installed Select an option to set the timeout for the flashlight Options are e 1 minute e 2 minutes e 3 minutes GPS Tab Peripherals a OK E Heaters Flashlight GPS GPS is not installed GPS Power on ofr GPS presence is displayed on the GPS panel Power can be toggled on or off only when a GPS is installed The default setting is Off Power Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power The MX9 power mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the count down after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the device is idle The Display gt Backlight setting is synchronized with the User Idle setting in the Schemes tab in the Power control panel Setting Schemes Tab Battery Power User Idle Timeout Battery Power System Idle Timeout Default 3
56. displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials Using a Sign On Screen 1 Ru Oo D N OO After completing the other entries in the profile tap on the Credentials button Leave the User name and Password blank No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or LEAP WPA For PEAP MSCHAP and PEAP GTC importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional For EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store check boxes are enabled The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button Tap the OK button then the Commit button When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed Enter the User name and Password Tap the OK button 10 17 Summit Credentials Ea User Password 10 Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status Tab page 10 10 indicates the device is Authenticated and the me
57. edu ergeet cy baci edie eer er ave T rates 14 5 Rule EE 14 5 DIMENSIONS EE 14 6 Chapter 15 Customer Support Technical EE 15 1 Product Service and PHepair nenn 15 1 Limited Warranty cs cs tecis lect gea R Seele EEN 15 1 12 MX9 Agency Compliance MX9 mobile computers meet or exceed the requirements of all applicable standards organizations for safe operation However as with any electrical equipment the best way to ensure safe operation is to operate them according to the agency guidelines that follow Read these guidelines carefully before using your MX9 This documentation is relevant for the following models MX9 MX9CS MX9HL Caution RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE The battery should be d disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler Do not incinerate the battery or dispose of the battery with general waste materials Laser Warnings Do not look into the laser s lens e Do not stare directly into the laser beam e Do not remove the laser caution labels from the MX9 e Do not connect the laser bar code aperture to any other device The laser bar code aperture is certified for use with the MX9 only Caution Laser radiation when open Read the caution labels Use of controls adjustments or performance of A procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Laser Label Location f the following label is atta
58. event at the Administrator Control panel The event could not be created If the keyboard cannot be controlled AppLock cannot process the hotkey This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes The watch process could not be initiated Processing the backdoor entry The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry Unable to decrypt password Decryption process ok Unable to decrypt password Decryption process ok Unable to decrypt password Unable to decrypt password Decryption process ok Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password Encrypt password process successful Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password Encrypt password process successful Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password Encrypt password process successful The password encryption failed Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password Encrypt password process successful Unable to encrypt password Encrypt password process successful Unable to encrypt password Unable to encrypt password The password has been successfully encrypted Level LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERR
59. from the Access Point Options are Main Only use the main antenna only Aux Only use the auxiliary antenna only On start on Main on startup use the main antenna or On start on Aux on startup use the auxiliary antenna RX Diversity option should be set based on the antenna configuration as follows e Antenna Configuration A Main and BG Main RX Diversity Main e Antenna Configuration A Main and A Aux RX Diversity On start on Main e Antenna Configuration BG Main and BG Aux RX Diversity On start on Main If the packet size in bytes exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold the packet is fragmented sent as several pieces instead of as one block Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interference Options are Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send RTS threshold an RTS is sent before sending the packet A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point Options are Any number between 0 and 2347 The LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device Options are On Off Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray Options are On Off When On the Summit Config Utility masks passwords
60. green 3 Squeeze the catches of the I O connector and push the cable connector into the MX9 I O port until it clicks The click means the connector is seated firmly 4 Press the power cable connector pin 1 from the power adapter into the connector on the USB Power or Serial Power cable attached to the base of the MX9 External power is now being supplied to the MX9 Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX9 to conserve the main battery power Replacing the CLA Fuse Equipment needed 5A fuse of the same size and amperage Remove the CLA from the cigarette lighter outlet on the vehicle Disconnect the cable from the MX9 Unscrew the tip of the adapter end ZS GO MM A Replace the blown fuse with a fuse of the same rating and size 5 Screw the tip back on to the adapter end replacing any previously removed parts in the order in which they were removed Upon reassembling the cigarette lighter adapter with the new fuse and plugging it into the cigarette lighter port on the vehicle if the LED on the CLA does not illuminate green there may be a problem with your vehicle power source Cleaning the Touch Screen and Scanner Aperture Note These instructions are for components made of glass If there is a removable protective film sheet on the display remove the film sheet before cleaning the screen Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the bar code reader scanning aperture and the mobile d
61. if after installing all the software the device shows 5MB in use this setting should be about 45MB for a standard OS 55 MB for an Asian font OS Wireless Configuration Application WCA Use the Wireless Configuration Application WCA when you want to remotely manage the Summit client device This utility is downloaded and installed in addition to the Remote Management Utility The WCA is included when the Summit radio driver software is updated The WCA is automatically installed when the radio driver is updated User Interface The Enabler can be configured and controlled manually through the user interface on the MX9 This section details the functionality that can be controlled by the user or system administrator Screen displays shown in this section are designed to present the end user with information graphically Placement of information on the screen displays may be split between one or many tabbed panels Standard Avalanche Enabler parameters that are not supported by Honeywell may be missing or dimmed visible but unable to be edited on the tabbed panels or screen displays Enabler Configuration Depending on the version of the Enabler running on the MX9 the Enabler icon may look like one of the following TS Enabler Settings Icon or The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking either the Enabler Settings icon on the desktop or Taskbar or by selecting Avalanche Enabler from the Programs menu The o
62. it subject to the specified Auto Re Launch Delay in seconds after it terminates This option allows the Administrator to disable the re launch operation AppLock cannot prevent all applications from closing When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing terminates per haps because of an error condition AppLock re launches the application when this option is enabled Note If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re launch and Manual Launch are disabled the application cannot be restarted for the end user or by the end user after the application terminates Retries Default is 0 tries Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to re launch the application The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and controlled by AppLock Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches Delay Default is 0 seconds no delay Delay is the amount of time AppLock waits prior to re launching an application that has terminated The delay is specified in seconds Valid values are between 0 no delay and 99 seconds AppLock must also be configured to automatically re launch an application To AppLock application termination by the end user is indistinguishable from application termination for any other reason Manual Launch Default is Disabled Enabling this option allows the end user to launch the specified application s U
63. mode a Switchpad icon it looks like three tiny windows one above the other is displayed in the lower right corner of the display The Switchpad is always visible on top of the application in focus How ever if only one application is configured in AppLock and the Input Panel is disabled the Switchpad is not visible When the user taps the Switchpad icon a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is brought to the foreground The previous applica tion continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only When the user needs to use the Input Panel they tap the Keyboard option Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only Using the Switch Key Sequence One switch key sequence or hotkey is defined by the administrator for the end user to use when switching between locked applications This is known as the Activation key The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter When the switch key sequence is pressed on the keypad the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the back ground End user key presses affect the application in focus only Hotkey Activation hotkey If the mobile device uses AppLock to allow the user to swi
64. ms Note Settings on this panel have no effect when RFTerm is the application with the input focus Data Collection Data Options Processing About A Buffered Key Output Vv Enable buffered key output Same buffer limit ES Delay between buffers Fe ms Enable buffered key output Default is enabled checked Tap the check box to turn off buffered key output Same buffer limit Default is 32 ms Raise or lower this value as desired Delay between key buffers Specifies the number of milliseconds to delay after each character in the scanned bar code is processed as a keystroke This value may need to be adjusted depending on the network traffic in the environment The default value is 75 ms Valid value is from 0 to 9999 A zero value is No Delay between characters About Tab The About tab lists the version of the Data Collection Wedge DCWedge software and the type of scanner imager installed in the MSp Data Collection Data Options Processing About al gt DCWedge Version DCWPCE1Dp Scanner HHP Valid scanner imager types e HHP Hand Held Products 5300 2D Imager e Symbol Symbol SE955 e Symbol Symbol SE1524 e No Scanner None No scanner installed Data Collection Ki ES Data Options Processing About gt DCWedge Version DCWPCE1Dp Scanner Symbol SE 1524ER Hat Encoding Hat Encoded Characters Hex 00
65. not affected by any stripping settings e If the stripping configuration results in a O length bar code a good beep will still be emitted since bar code data was read from the scanner Match List Rules The data in the match list is processed by the rules listed below e Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list If the list contains ABC and AB in that order incoming data with ABC will match first and the AB will have no effect e When a match between the first characters of the bar code and a string from the list is found that string is stripped from the bar code data e Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached e Ifthe wildcard is not specified the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the bar code data The string ABC strips off the prefix ABC The string XYZ will strip off the suffix XYZ The string ABC XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together More than one in a configuration string is not allowed The User Interface will not prevent it but results would not be as expected as only the first is used in parsing to match the string e The question mark wildcard may be used to match any single character in the incoming data For example the data AB D will match ABCD ABcD or ABOD but not ABDE e The data collected is saved per symbology configured The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology f
66. of the hand strap if installed Using a flat head screwdriver unfasten the tethered plastic lock s captive locking screws Place the tethered plastic locking tab to one side Do not remove or unfasten the tether Slide the battery locking tab down to release the battery pack Pull the battery up and out of the battery well with a hinge motion N O oO fF WwW DN Place the discharged battery pack in a powered MX9 battery charger Charging Recharging the Main Battery Warning Only use Honeywell batteries as replacements MX9380BATTERY 161888 0001 or 161915 0001 Low Temperature Note The MX9 Battery Charger is designed for an indoor protected environment It is not authorized for use in areas designated as Hazardous Locations New batteries must be fully charged prior to use The main battery can be recharged in an AC powered Battery Charger after the battery has been removed from the MX9 or its packing material when new The main battery while in the MX9 can be recharged using several different methods Note An external power source is required before the main battery in the MX9 will recharge The main battery can be recharged while it is in the Map e by connecting the MX9 AC power adapter to the I O connector at the base of the MX9 e by docking the MX9 in a powered desk cradle e by docking the MX9 in a powered vehicle cradle e or by connecting the car power adapter CLA to the I O connector at the base of
67. on the Main Tab page 10 3 e Select an active Profile on the Main tab e View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile Tab page 10 6 View the global parameter settings on the Global Tab page 10 12 e View the current connection details on the Status Tab page 10 10 e View radio status software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab e Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags Tab page 10 11 After Admin Login the end user can also e Create edit rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab e Edit global parameters on the Global tab e Enable disable the Summit tray icon in the taskbar 10 5 Profile Tab Note Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Setting Default Profile Default SSID Blank Client Name Blank Power Save Fast Tx Power Maximum Bit Rate Auto Radio Mode See Profile Parameters for default Auth Type Open EAP Type None Encryption None STT aU Cw 7 BOK Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit P 4 Profile Default EN SDC Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type None D None sl WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit When logged in as an Admin use the Profile tab to manage profiles When not logged in as an Admin the parameters can be viewed and cannot be changed The buttons
68. on this tab are dimmed if the user is not logged in as Admin The Profile tab was previously labeled Config Note The settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen Buttons New Button Creates a new profile with the default settings see Profile Parameters and prompts for a unique name If the name is not unique an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created Rename Button Assigns a new unique name If the new name is not unique an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed Delete Button Deletes the profile The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted WEP Keys PSK Keys Button 10 6 Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption Credentials Button Allows entry of a user name and password certificate names and other information required to authenticate with the access point The information required depends on the EAP type Commit Button Saves the profile settings made on this screen Settings are saved in the profile Scan Button Opens a window that lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs Tap the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs Each AP s SSID its received signal strength indication RSSI and whether or not data encryption is in use true or false Sort the list by tapping on the column headers I
69. only be created using direct serial or a USB cable connection After the partnerships are established ActiveSync communication can be initiated using e USB e Serial e Wireless Connect via USB The default connection type is USB Client To change the connection type or to verify it is set to USB select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection USB Client should be shown This will set up the mobile device to use the USB port Tap OK and ensure the check box for Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached is checked 5 72 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel If desired any control panel windows may be closed IMPORTANT DO NOT PUT THE MX9 INTO SUSPEND WHILE CONNECTED VIA USB The device will be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the mobile device the client as detailed below USB will start automat ically when the USB cable is connected not requiring you to select Connect from the start menu Cable for USB ActiveSync Connection MX9051CABLE MX9 USB Client Cable Assembly ActiveSync connection e Connect the I O connector to the I O port on the bottom of the MX9 e The USB client type A plug on the MX9 cable connects to a USB port on a PC or laptop e Itis not necessary to connect the power receptacle to the MX9 power adapter in order to use ActiveSync Do not allow the device to enter Suspend w
70. or smudges are trapped between the protective film and the glass display remove the protective film clean the display and apply the protective film again 2 10 Adjusting the Keypad Backlight The keypad backlight is white can be set to On or Off The default value is On When set to Off the keypad backlight does not turn on during Suspend Restart or reboots When set to On the keypad backlight follows the display backlight setting The keypad backlight turns off when the display backlight dims Setting Date and Time Zone Tap Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Date Time icon or tap the Date Time in the taskbar Set Date Time Time Zone and assign a Daylight Savings location on the MX9 after a warm boot or anytime There is very little functional change from standard desktop PC Date Time Properties options Adjust the settings and tap the OK button or the Apply button to save changes to the registry Any changes take effect immediately Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes the Date Time Properties screen to appear Grab Time Utility The GrabTime utility can be configured to synchronize the time with a local server during each reboot function Autolaunch Time Sync Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt MX9 Options gt Communication By default TimeSync does not automatically run on the MX9 To enable TimeSync to run automatically on the MX9 using the GrabTime utility check this checkbox S
71. profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to LEAP 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type as follows e If the Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open e If the AP is configured to used shared key or passphrase set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared e If the AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP 5 To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section STUUR aU Cw 2 BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit gt Profile Default sl SDC Radio apo 1 Encryption EAP Type wpa TKIP LEAP WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 6 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials 7 To use Stored Credentials tap on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Summit Credentials x User Password 8 Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required otherwise enter the User name 9 Enter the password 10 Tap OK then tap the Commit button 11 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main Tab an
72. ready to run command Run cmd Command Command Function options Specifies the option to perform See the table below for the option parameters and values load Loads and starts Netlog start Starts the Netlog process of logging the network traffic stop Stops Netlog from logging network traffic unload Unloads Netlog Options Options Function Specifies the maximum packet size captured in bytes This option should only be run after you have called load and stop Default is 5000 Specifies the maximum size of NetlogO cap or Netlog1 cap in bytes This option should only be run after you have called load and stop Default is 500 000 pkt_size in bytes cap_size in bytes cap file Specifies the name of the file to which network traffic information is saved This option should only be run after you have called load and stop Default is netlog Run cmd Performs the command selected NDISlog Tab NDISLog creates a TXT file that can be viewed with any text editor program that supports TXT files Network Capture E OK Ea Netlog NDISLog Command start stop File Systemindislog Save File ready to run command Command Function start Starts logging the network traffic stop Stops logging network traffic file Specifies the name of the file to which NDISLog information is stored Save File Stores the file name Run cmd Perfor
73. than Standard Mode In Quick Omni mode the imager searches for a bar code in a reduced field located around the center of the image Decoding is faster in this mode but the user must center the aiming line over the bar code to be read Both linear and 2 D symbologies can be read in this mode The default is Standard Set the linear range Valid 1 6 Default 3 A value of 1 specifies that the linear range that is searched for a readable label is a tight vertical range near the aimer A value of 6 specifies that the entire height of the image is to be searched Option Action Aim Time Duration of the imager aim beam in 0 1 second increments Valid 0 50 0 to 5 seconds Default 0 Lights Specifies if the imager s lights and aimer should be left on during the entire decode process The default is disabled If disabled the lights are turned on only during image capture then turned off while the imager attempts to process and decode the bar code If enabled the aimer and lights remain turned on during the entire process In Aggressive Linear Decode mode set this parameter to enabled to improve the aimer visibility See Mode above Ctrl Char Mapping The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the Data Collection Wedge performs on con trol characters values less than 0x20 embedded in bar codes Control characters can be replaced with user defined text which can
74. the System directory e Warm boot the MX9 The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running See Stop the Enabler Service page 9 2 If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder warm boot the MX9 immediately delete the Avalanche folder and then perform another warm boot Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Mobility Center Console Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Enabler icon on the MX9 desktop Select File gt Settings Select the Preferences tab Select Do not monitor to prevent automatic monitoring upon Startup Select Exit Application for an immediate shutdown of all Enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface Click the OK button to save the changes Reboot the MX9 if necessary NO of WD Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on the MX9 can communicate with the Mobile Device Server running on the host machine e Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server PC and the MX9 e Wired via a USB connection using ActiveSync between the Mobile Device Server PC and the MX9 e Wirelessly via the MX9 2 4GHz radio and an access point After installing the Enabler on the MX9 the Enabler searches for a Mobile Device Server first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network The Enabler running on the MX9 will attempt
75. the product by anyone other than HII or its authorized representatives This warranty shall extend from the time of shipment for the duration published by HII for the product at the time of purchase Warranty Period Any defective product must be returned at purchaser s expense during the Warranty Period to HII factory or authorized service center for inspection No product will be accepted by HII without a Return Materials Authorization which may be obtained by contacting HII In the event that the product is returned to HII or its authorized service center within the Warranty Period and HII determines to its satisfaction that the product is defective due to defects in materials or workmanship HII at its sole option will either repair or replace the product without charge except for return shipping to HII EXCEPT AS MAY BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED BY APPLICABLE LAW THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER COVENANTS OR WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT HIPS RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT WITH NEW OR REFURBISHED PARTS IN NO EVENT SHALL HII BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY LIABILITY OF HII ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT
76. the CA Cert text box Tap OK then tap Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associ ated after the radio connects to the network 10 25 PEAP GTC To use PEAP GTC make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to PEAP GTC 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open 5 To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Tae aU BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global i ya Res Sie New Rename Delete Scan Radio Encryption EAP Type wpa TKIP sl PEAP GTC WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 6 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials 7 Tap the Credentials button No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network 8 Enter these items as directed below Credentials H fa User Password CA cert D _ Validate server Use MS store 9 Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required
77. timer Notification is enabled by default Sounds are emitted when turning a feature on or off Battery Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Battery This panel is used to view the status and percentage of power remaining in the MX9 main battery The data cannot be edited by the user The battery gas gauge icon resides in the system tray and shows four levels of charge 100 75 50 25 At a point below 50 the MX9 system status LED will turn yellow and the gas gauge icon will turn yellow At a point below 25 the system status LED will turn red and the gas gauge icon will turn red indicating the battery is low Jacked is shown in the Status box when the Main battery is receiving external power The main battery is charged recharged when the MX9 is docked in a powered cradle or directly cabled to an external power source Battery E Ki ES Battery Voltage Main 11 084 Y raw 3241 Main Power remaining 100 V Battery Toolbar Icon Status JACKED The backup battery draws power from the Main battery to maintain a charge The backup battery voltage and percentage of power fluctuate continuously When there is no Main battery in the unit the backup battery begins to discharge as it maintains RAM and other vital set tings After a Main battery is installed the backup battery begins to draw power from the Main battery again Note Frequent connection to an external power sour
78. to On unless there is significant co channel interference due to overlapping APs on the same channel Options are On Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions CCX radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features Options are Full Use Cisco IE and CCX version number support all CCX features The option known as On in previous versions Optimized Use Cisco IE and CCX version number support all CCX features except AP assisted roaming AP specified maximum transmit power and radio management Off Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version number Cisco IE Cisco Information Element Use of Wi Fi Multimedia extensions Options are On Off Specifies the type of authentication server Options are Type 1 ACS server and Type 2 non ACS server Authentication method used within the secure tunnel created by EAP TTLS Options are AUTO EAP Any available EAP method MSCHAPV2 MSCHAP PAP CHAP EAP MSCHAPV2 Type of Pairwise Master Key PMK caching to use when WPA2 is in use PMK caching is designed to speed up roaming between APs by allowing the client and the AP to cache the results of 802 1X authentications eliminating the need to communicate with the ACS server Standard PMK is used when there are no controllers The re authentication information is cached on the original AP The client and the AP use the cached information to perform the four way handshake to exchange keys Opportunistic PMK OPMk is u
79. to be Non Discoverable or Invisible When Filtered Mode is enabled the MX9 can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer When Filtered Mode is disabled the MX9 can pair with up to four Bluetooth devices with a limit of one scanner one printer two HID devices one Mouse one Keyboard one PAN device and one DUN device connected at the same time It is not necessary to disconnect a paired scanner and printer before a different scanner or printer is paired with the MX9 The target Bluetooth device should be as close as possible up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight to the MX9 during the pairing process Assumptions The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for the MX9 The MX9 operating system has been upgraded to the revision level required for Bluetooth client operation An application or API is available that will accept data from serial Bluetooth devices HID Human Interface Device HID profiles used by Bluetooth keyboards mice pointing devices and remote monitoring devices PAN Personal Area Networking PAN profiles unmodified Ethernet payloads using BNEP can exchange packets between Bluetooth devices PANU is a PAN User service that uses either the NAP or the GN service DUN Dial Up Networking DUN provides access to the Internet and other dial up services using Bluetooth technology Initial Configuration 1 Open the Bluetooth control panel or tap the
80. zone Internet Local intranet Trusted Sites Restricted Sites Use the Site button to add sites to each zone Internet Options Internet Options General Security pri Jl Connection Privacy ad Alt Start Page Use LAN no autodial fnttp www honeywell com Les Autodial name JusB Client sl Search Page Network ker Joor google com O Access the Internet using a proxy server User Agent requires browser restart Default Windows CE Address Port fo 512 Bypass proxy server for local O Clear Cache Clear History addresses Cache Size in KB Internet Options Internet Options Security Privacy Advanced Pop Alt Privacy Advanced Popups d m Cookies E 4 EA First party Third party Internet Local Trusted site Accept Accept intranet Block Block gt Prompt Prompt e Internet Always alow session cookies This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Internet Options advanced Accessibility Always expand ALT text for Anchors navigate on access T Block popups xceptions Always send URLs as UTF 8 EXCep Display a notification about e Enable stylesheets Enable page transitions Theming support Disable automatic SIP E Underline links 9 Display notification when a popup has been blocked E Open new pages in the current window Keyboard Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Keyb
81. 0A Escaped hex The hex encoding to pass thruto Vertical Tab Ox0A or Value Ox0C is a bar encoded text the application O x0A code is converted to text Ox0A Bar Code Processing Examples The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix suffix configurations The examples assume that the scan ner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier Symbology a eangen Tesm Tozazmg Enable Strip Code 1D SS je p oO po o p o SiipBarCodeData ma Je e A fo oss sds Cid www XXX yyy ZZZ Suffix Code93 Disabled Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table following are examples of scanned bar code data and results of these manipulations Code 93 G0123456 lt rejected gt disabled Code 93 G0444444 lt rejected gt disabled Code 39 A01234567890 aaa4567890www Code 39 full ASCII A41231234567890 aaa1234567890www Code 39 Bar Code Symbology Resulting Data EAN 128 bbb1234567890xxx EAN 128 bbb11234567890xxx EAN 128 lt rejected gt too short EAN 13 ccc E04567890yyy EAN 13 ccc E0234567890yyy Eug Gen 12 5 lt rejected gt too long 12 5 ddd7890zzz EE dddzzz LE mus 100123456 100444444 JA01234567890 1A41231234567890 JA4 lt rejected gt too short Rejected bar codes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from the
82. 3 46 23 PM Time Zone GmT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp C sl Automatically adjust _ apply clock for daylight saving Apply There is very little functional change from general desktop or laptop Date Time Properties options Double tapping the time displayed in the Desktop Taskbar causes the Date Time Properties screen to appear The Sync button activates a utility that will set the clock using a network time server Device Management Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Device Management Allows a Device Management client the device equipped with a Microsoft Windows CE operating system to work with a Microsoft Systems Management Server Device Management Gei Ki E Device Management Setup 1 2 Server name or IP address mmm ex SomeServerName 123 456 7 8 etc Use secure connection due A Cancel Back Next Specify the server name or IP address of management server and tap the check box if a secure connection is to be used Refer to the Microsoft com website for more information on device management for Windows CE equipped devices Dialing Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems Honeywell does not support or supply internal modems in the MX9 Setting Default Location Work Area Code 425 Tone Dialing Enabled Country Region 1 Disable Call Waiting Disabled blank Display Start gt Settings gt
83. 4 Chapter 5 Software Configuration INtrOGUCTION EEN 5 1 Operating Systema wae aaa eal Raho eae ee eee he ined 5 1 Windows CE Operating System c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeeceaaeeseaeeeseaaeesegeeeseeaeeeseaeeesaas 5 1 General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 ccccccceceeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeseeaeesteaeeeseaeees 5 1 HE ue 5 2 Clearing Persistent Storage Reset to Default Settings cccccecceeeteeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeens 5 2 Folders Copied at Startup nesinori s aeniei iE ae dain ena cin aedi ener dE duerech 5 2 Saving Changes to the PHeglseinm tease seeeeeseaaeeeecaeeeeeaeeeseeeeteas 5 2 software oe ed e Zeene te ah ee eee iid eee dein baie edd aed hee 5 3 Software Applications 5 3 Bluetooth Optional uerge ENNEN ENEE REENEN essence AEN ENEE nae 5 3 RF Term Optional 5 3 Avalanche EEN 5 3 Software Development 5 3 Accessing Files on the SD CF Card 5 3 Uleies eege Ed Stee ete sensi hen E 5 4 LAUNCH EXE tistics eat eaten aie inne eevee eee ania 5 4 LAUNCH EXE and Persistent Storage ccccccceceeeeeeeeecneeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeessaeeeseaeeeseaeeetaas 5 4 REGEDIT EE 5 5 REGLOAD EXE eege nl Ga Aid aa en es 5 5 REGDUMP EXE ege patie ated aides aisles a estas hailed 5 5 WARMBOOT EX EE 5 5 AANA a a E EE 5 5 MX9 Command line Uites eee cece e cence eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaaeesgeaeeeneaeeeecaeeesceeeseeeeseeaeeetaas 5 5 PrtSermEX E TT A A atts 5 5
84. 5 1 if entering a power on or screen saver password does not allow you to disable this password protection or perform a Load Factory Defaults Setting Default Password Blank Enter password at Power On Disabled Enter password at Remote Desktop Screen Disabled Saver Password Properties EZ Ki a Password Settings Password Confirm password Enable password protection at power on Enter the password in the Password text box then press Tab and type the password again to confirm it Enable the power on check box and if desired the screensaver check box A changed saved password is in effect immedi ately The password and password settings are saved during a warm boot and a cold boot The screensaver password affects the Remote Desktop screensaver only After a password is assigned and saved each time a Settings gt Control Panel option is selected the user will be required to enter the password before the Control Panel will open The screensaver password is the same as the power on password They are not set independently A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the Enable password protection at power on check box The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the power on check box is enabled PC Connection Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection Use these options to control a cabled connection USB serial be
85. AM Bracket Mounting RAM Bracket Assembly mounting holes are on the back of the cradle The mounting screws fit in Pim nuts and are automat ically secured The number of RAM balls attached to the back of the vehicle mount cradle are dependent upon the desired RAM mount configuration The figure shown below is an example only RAM ball mounting screws are included in the mounting kit Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for the MX9 RAM Mount Kit for the vehicle cradle RAM Bracket Mounting Points 1 RAM ball mounted on the back of the vehi cle cradle 2 Connecting the vehicle cradle to the assembled RAM Mount Kit 3 Adjusting knob 4 RAM arm 5 RAM ball base mounted to the vehicle 13 13 Vehicle Cradle RAM Ball Assembly 1 Fasten the RAM ball with the circular mounting base shown in the middle in above image to the vehicle k g g S GOOD GOD 2 Fasten the RAM ball with the rectangular mounting base shown on the right in above image to the back of the vehicle cradle Loosen the knob on the squeeze arm shown on the left in above image Place either RAM ball opening in the squeeze arm over the vehicle mounted RAM ball Place the remaining RAM ball opening over the vehicle cradle mounted RAM ball Tighten the knob on the squeeze arm until the vehicle cradle is secured to the vehicle N O oO A QO Adjust the position of the secured vehicle cradle by slightly loosening the squee
86. AP MSCHAP 1 See Generating a Root CA Certificate page 10 34 and download the Root CA Certificate to a PC 2 Connect the MX9 to the desktop PC using ActiveSync and copy the certificate to the MX9 System folder 3 See Installing a Root CA Certificate page 10 37 and install the Root CA Certificate User Certificates are necessary for EAP TLS 1 See Generating a User Certificate page 10 38 and download the User Certificate and Private Key file to a PC Connect the MX9 to the desktop PC using ActiveSync and copy the certificate and private key file to the MX9 System folder See Installing a User Certificate page 10 44 and install the User Certificate and Private Key file After installation perform a Warmboot Verify Installation page 10 47 ak Ww PY Generating a Root CA Certificate Note Itis important that all dates are correct on the MX9 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority 1 To request the root CA certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv 2 Sign into the CA with any valid username and password Connect to 10 1 2 204 Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name Lg Password C Remember my password 10 34 Microsoft Certificate Serv
87. Admin V User Using the Key mapping control panel the System Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end user when they want to toggle the Status Popup Window on or off The System Administrator must also assign a Status Admin key sequence to perform the same function Status popup window display options taskbar icons are assigned on the Status Popup tab E g AC Power ActiveSync WLAN radio CapsLock Network status Bluetooth status etc The default for the User and Admin status popup windows is to show all status information The 5 second timeout to remove the status popup from the display is disabled by default for the User and Admin status popup windows Network and Dialup Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dialup Connections Set MX9 network driver properties and network access properties Select a connection to use or create a new connection Be s Make New USB Client comi Connection 57600 Al ie TAL COM1 SDCCF10G1 115200 Creating a New Connection 1 On the mobile device select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dialup Connections A window is displayed showing the existing connections 2 Assuming the connection you want does not exist double tap Make New Connection 3 Give the new connection an appropriate name My Connection 9600 etc Tap the Direct Connection radio but ton Tap the Next button 4
88. Battery LED When Spare LED is It means Off Battery pack not inserted or no power applied Green Battery pack fully charged Red Battery pack charging Yellow Amber Battery pack temperature out of range Flashing Red Battery pack fault or failure Note Spare battery charging does not require an MX9 be docked in the docking bay MX9 System Status LED Status when Docked The MX9 System Status LED is located at the top of the keypad When the LED is The Status is Comment Blinking Red Power Fail Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Or Connect the MX9 to external AC power to allow the internal charger to charge the main battery e g dock ina powered cradle Steady Red Main Battery Low Low Battery Warning Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Or dock the MX9 in a powered cradle Blinking Green Display Off No user intervention required No Color Good No user intervention required Docking and Undocking the MX9 When the MX9 is in Suspend Mode it wakes up when it is docked in a powered cradle There is no change in mode state settings or behavior when the MX9 is docked in a cradle without a power source MX9 mode states while the MX9 is in a powered cradle e g suspend resume display backlight etc are managed by the MX9 OS Power settings If the cradle is not permanently attached to the work surface stabilize the cradle with one hand while insertin
89. Before connecting to Bluetooth Devices e The system administrator has discovered paired connected and disconnected using EZPair or LXEZ Pairing control panel Bluetooth devices for each MX9 e The system administrator has enabled and disabled settings for the MX9 e The system administrator has also assigned a Computer Friendly Name using EZPair control panel for the MX9 To connect Bluetooth devices the MX9 should be as close as possible and in direct line of sight distances up to 32 8 feet or 10 meters with the targeted Bluetooth device during the discovery and pairing process If the Bluetooth devices are in Suspend tap the power key to wake the MX9 Using the correct procedure wake the targeted Bluetooth device if necessary There may be audible or visual signals as both devices discover and pair with each other Bluetooth On Screen Indicator MX9 is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s MX9 is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive MX9 is not connected to any Bluetooth device MX9 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device Bluetooth LED Functions When the Bluetooth LED on the MX9 is off Bluetooth hardware has been turned off or it does not exist in the MX9 When the Bluetooth LED on the MX9 is on e the MX9 is paired with another Bluetooth device but is out of range or not connected or e is paired and connected to another Bluetooth de
90. Bluetooth icon 2 Tap the Settings Tab 3 Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings panel The Bluetooth MX9 default name is determined by the factory installed software version Honeywell strongly urges assigning every MX9 a unique name up to 32 characters before Bluetooth Discovery is initiated 4 Check or uncheck the MX9 Bluetooth options on the Settings tab and the Reconnect tab 5 Tap the OK button to save your changes Subsequent Use Note Bluetooth client icon and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered paired connected and disconnected A Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device A device icon with a red background indicates a disconnected paired device 1 Tap the Bluetooth client icon to open the Bluetooth EZPair or LXEZ Pairing application 2 Tap the Bluetooth Devices tab 3 Tap the Discover button When the Bluetooth module begins searching for in range Bluetooth devices the button name changes to Stop Tap the Stop button to cancel the Discover function at any time 4 The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window 5 Highlight a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window and double tap to open the device properties menu 6 Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the MX9 to receive scanner data 7 Tap Pair as Printer to set up the MX9 to send data to the printer 8 Tap Serial Device when Filt
91. C 14 AC power connector When the power supply is receiving AC DC power from the wall outlet an LED on the power supply illuminates green The green LED indicates the power supply is ready for use This AC DC power supply is designated for e the MX9 I O port multi cables e the MX9 desktop cradle e the MX9 battery Charger There are specific DC DC power supply adapters for the MX9 vehicle cradle do not use any other power supply with the vehicle cradle Car Power Adapter The MX9 Car Power Adapter is a self contained unit The cable has one and a half feet of coiled cord and one and a half feet of straight cord The coiled portion is on the end of the adapter An LED on the adapter illuminates when the car power adapter is receiving vehicle input power The cigarette lighter adapter contains a power supply which converts the vehicle s nominal 12V to 15V a voltage suitable to power the MX9 and charge the MX9 battery One end consists of a plug compatible with a standard vehicle cigarette lighter adapter CLA The Car Power Adapter has a standard size CLA plug that uses center positive 12V and sleeve ground A replaceable fuse is provided on the input side The other end of the three foot cable connects to the MX9 36 pin I O port It has a security latch for stability when the MX9 is connected to the Car Power Adapter cable Software Configuration Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup configu
92. Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels setup radio and security settings There may be a slight delay before the Wireless Zero Config icon indicates the status of the connection Switching Control to SCU 1 To switch back to SCU control select any other profile in the SCU Active Config drop down list except ThirdParty Config 2 Open the Registry page 5 56 panel and tap Warmboot Radio control is passed to the SCU Main Tab Setting Default Admin Login SUMMIT Radio Enabled Active Config Profile Default Regulatory Domain Varies by location Summit Client Utility 7 OK Main Profile Status Diags Global a gt Admin Login SU MMII Disable Radio Active Profile Default Status Associated Radio Type BG Reg Domain FCC Auto Profile On Off List Driver v2 01 17 SCU v2 01 12 __About SCU The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including e SCU Summit Client Utility version e Driver version e Radio Type BG is an 802 11 b g radio ABG is an 802 11 a b g radio 10 3 e Regulatory Domain is preset to either Worldwide or a location specific domain FCC ETSI KCC or TELEC e Copyright Information can be accessed by tapping the About SCU button e Active Config profile Active Profile name e Status of the
93. Control Panel gt Display The display might also called the touch screen Select the desktop background image and appearance scheme for the MX Using the options on the Backlight tab set the display backlight and keypad backlight timers when running on battery or external power Adjust the settings and tap the OK button to save the changes Saved changes take effect immediately Setting Default Background Image Windows CE Image on background Disabled Appearance Schemes Windows Standard Backlight Battery power and user idle 3 seconds Battery power and System idle 15 seconds Battery power idle Suspend 5 minutes External power and user idle 2 minutes External power and System idle 2 minutes External power idle Suspend 2 minutes Backlight Brightness Maximum Background Display Properties Gei OK Eg Background appearance Backlight Image Windowsce sl _ Tile image on background There is very little change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Select an image from the drop down list or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder to display on the Desktop and then tap the OK button to save the change The change takes effect immediately Appearance Display Properties ka OK Fa Background Appearance Backlight Scheme windows Standard sl Save Delete Apply Dialog Box Text Item Desktop sl There is very litt
94. DESK EE 5 6 Rare EE 5 6 NR Ee LEE 5 6 My Device Folders 22 sista eesiseaticdinda taped apa iiadesdinipeiest athe sede p hence eae 5 7 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional 5 7 Internet Explorerss cic cael he I eis ee A EAS LARARE AEAEE 5 7 Start Menu Program Options cccccceeceeceeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeccaaeeseaeeeseaeeesgaeeseaeeesceeeseeeeseaeeeseeeess 5 8 COMMUNICATION MSNA EEE EEEE ATTENTE TE tua idea eaten Apetaetes 5 8 EHNEN neha ng Pb ee ee en ee oe le et ee 5 8 Connect and HSM Connect or LXEConnect ceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeeseeeeteneeeteas 5 8 Start FTP Server Stop FTP Servet eccccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeessaaeeenaeesenaeeeneaees 5 8 SUMM ea r Eeer eye cerca re 5 9 EE 5 9 Command Prompt eege aa eel ee ee Een 5 9 eXpress SCAN neiii eae e bee ede eee NEEN ENEE NENNT 5 9 Internet e 5 9 Microsoft WordPad saics c2cce ecco an E ni e S A A NEEN ai a A bene 5 9 Remote Desktop Connection ccccccececeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeaeeeecaeeesaeeseeaeeeseeeeseeeesenaeeseaees 5 9 Setting Seara Aere EE eee Ye cea deters eit rea Mais et ede aah ere i 5 10 RRC lee 5 10 Windows Explorer aciecisidioiniicianne raii A eee eee ic ede E de wil ernie S 5 10 RASKD Le 5 11 General Tabi EE 5 11 Advanced el DEET 5 11 Taskbar Jong EEN EENS Gale DESEN EEN Eege EES der DEAE 5 12 Upgrading the Operating System cccecceeceeee cence tenet eeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeee cease
95. Default is disabled Required When enabled only transmit bar codes with a 2 or 5 digit addenda Default is enabled Insert Separator When enabled insert a space between the code and addenda Default is disabled HHP Properties Centering Mode Range Aim time Lights HHP Properties E Centering Top fizo Bottor 1 Right 564 Standard e f fo When the MX9 is equipped with a Hand Held Products imager this option is used to configure imager parameters Option Centering Action The centering feature is used to allow the user to accurately scan a selected bar code among a group of bar codes that are located closely together When centering is turned on the imager will only decode bar codes that intersect the centering window defined by the user The centering window must intersect the center of the bar code The default centering settings define a 60 pixel square area in the center of the imager s field of view The default is disabled When enabled the following parameters may be entered Top Valid 0 239 Default 120 Bottom Valid 240 479 Default 360 Left Valid 0 319 Default 188 Right Valid 320 639 Default 564 Mode Range In Standard mode the imager will decode both linear and 2 D symbologies In Aggressive Linear Decode mode the imager will only read linear symbologies in this mode but decoding these is faster and more accurate
96. E 8 7 Enable Code ID EE 8 8 SYMBOLOGY Settin gS EE 8 9 Processing Elte EE E 8 10 Strip Leading Trailing Control 8 11 Barcode Data Match Let 8 12 Add Prefix Suffix Control joc ees ENEE icin lhe eeee teeth adc veer ead aE oedi iai 8 13 lee Te EE 8 14 AIM SYMbOlOGieS is cine cosets ca edie a dceeesi en nid EENS EEAAENEAEN 8 14 ll ee te UE 8 15 Advanced Button Hand Held Products Imager Only 8 15 Codabar Advanced Properties 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeteaas 8 16 Code 11 Advanced Properties 0 cccccececeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeeeseeeeeeeaeeseaas 8 16 Code 39 Advanced Properties cccccccececeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseieeeeneaeeseaas 8 17 EAN 8 Advanced Properties A 8 18 EAN 13 Advanced Properties AAA 8 19 Interleaved 2 of 5 Advanced Properties A 8 19 Mesa Advanced Properties AA 8 20 MSI Plessy Advanced Properties cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeaeeseeeesesaeeesiaees 8 21 OCR Properties Advanced Properties 0 ccccccsceeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseneeeeeeaeeseeas 8 22 Planet Advanced Properties AA 8 23 Posicode Advanced Properties AAA 8 24 Telepen Advanced Properties AA 8 24 UPCA Advanced Properties 0 ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeetcaeeeseeeeteaeeeneaeeee 8 25 UPCEO Advanced Properties ccccecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeseaeeeseeeeseneee
97. E1524 Lorax laser scanner engine bar code decoding only e Hand Held Products 5300SF laser imager engine non decoding A scan aperture heater is implemented for low temperature environments Tethered Bar Code Decoders The external serial port at the base of the MX9 is used to connect via serial tether tethered laser scanners as needed Bluetooth Client Bar Code Decoders The Bluetooth Module in the MX9 can accept data from paired Bluetooth bar code readers GPS Module The MX9 default setting for GPS is Off GPS Global Positioning System is a U S space based radio navigation system that provides reliable positioning navigation and timing services on a continuous basis The primary function of the embedded GPS module is to provide worldwide location to applications which are running on the MX9 GPS presence is displayed on the Peripherals control panel Using the GPS tab GPS power can be toggled on or off only when a GPS is installed Power Modes and Batteries Power Modes On When in the On state the display touch screen is on The keyboard touch screen and all peripherals function normally The display backlight is on until the User Idle timer expires The display does not turn off until the System Idle timer expires Only interrupts classified as User Activity events will keep the unit in the On state Mao User Activity Events are Note These items are not configurable selections e Any key on the keypad excep
98. F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 gt j ojal ojojo bake Press these keys in this order ome pe o waw ooo S Bom P Sd ERR o Bue bomaro M ome feom Sd omne fes id orane oaro o Grange Tooman aer IR mer Ip mer Ip C e ge e awe e o C e ge E ama foo oo ge A ge e aw o SEE Result Notes Backtab Cursor up one line Cursor down one line Cursor right one space Cursor left one space Insert mode Delete one character Home End Up 1 screen Down 1 screen F1 mode F2 mode F3 mode F4 mode F5 mode F6 mode F7 mode F8 mode F9 mode F10 mode F11 mode F12 mode F13 mode F14 mode F15 mode F17 mode F18 mode F19 mode F20 mode F21 mode F22 mode F23 mode F24 mode ojal ojojo era 11 12 To get this function j TR 29 9 0 5 3 10 N lt X s lt C 4 0 3 O 3 O z z T X 7 z 9 7 m 9 OF DW S NIX x ey lt c Press these keys in this order EE Result Notes j a e Ape i Jl ee eooo e Jm IL ge Il Dee IST ge JI ge JL ee IST e JL e Jm JL ee IST e JI e JL ee II ser Abta ER ser Abna E ser ae o ESCHER sar Abna E sar Abra CS ser Apna ser ae ioe BEE 1OQ 90 O 5 3 10 N lt x s lt c A o dD o d Of z z m x zol nlm of of wD SPN lt x e lt 11 13 To get this function CO CO N OD ol BY Gol N 0 zero
99. Failed do not Restart the system manually Perform a warm boot then try the upgrade again Restarting will cause a system crash since there is no valid image in the MX9 system Upgrade Help Issue The powered device won t boot up after the upgrade is finished Solution Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 if the device won t boot up after the upgrade is finished for re imaging options Warning Opening the device e g removing endcaps or access panels etc could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Battery State and OS Upgrade A fully charged main battery must be installed in the MX9 prior to upgrading the operating system A prompt may appear when the battery reaches Critical Low that informs the user there is not enough power in the main battery to perform the upgrade The operating system will not be able to execute the OS update when the battery level is too low 25 or less as there is a high risk that the power remaining in the battery expires when executing the upgrade and the MX9 will be left in an inop erable state When main battery power level is too low connect external power to the MX9 before performing the upgrade procedure Do not disconnect external power before the process is complete Control Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel or My Device gt Control Panel link Note Change the language displayed on the touch screen by choosing Start gt Settings gt Control Pane
100. Honeywell MX9 Mobile Computer with Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 User s Guide Disclaimer Honeywell International Inc HII reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing performance or use of this material HII disclaims all responsibility for the selection and use of software and or hardware to achieve intended results This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII 2009 2014 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved Web Address www honeywellaidc com Trademarks RF Term is a trademark or registered trademark of EMS Technologies Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows ActiveSync MSN Outlook Windows Mobile the Windows logo and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries
101. I documentation A Software Developers Kit SDK and additional information about software development can be found the Technical Sup port Portal Contact Technical Assistance for more information Accessing Files on the SD CF Card Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop then tap the System icon A SD CF card is used for permanent storage of the MX9 drivers CAB files and utilities It is also used for registry content back up CAB files when executed are not deleted Always perform a warm reset Start Run Warmboot when exchanging one card for another Utilities The following files are pre loaded LAUNCH EXE Launch works in coordination with registry settings to allow drivers or applications to be loaded automatically into DRAM at system startup Registry settings control what gets launched see the App Note for information on these set tings For examples you can look at the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist Launch will execute CAB files BAT files or EXE files Note All applications to be installed into persistent memory must be in the form of Windows CE CAB files These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image and are copied to the CE device using ActiveSync or using a Compact Flash ATA card The CAB files are copied from ATA or using ActiveSync Explore into the folder System which is the persistent storage virtual drive Then information is added to the regist
102. IMAGENS inseneri e ENEE SEENEN iia nea aa Kaai aiia ae EAEE ae SEE ai a 3 6 Integrated Bar Code Decoders 3 6 Tethered Bar Code D c d rS nianna a NEE a a a a A 3 6 Bluetooth Client Bar Code Decoders 000 0 cccccccccccccccccceeeeeseeeeeaauaeeeeeeesessececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeauaaaaaegees 3 6 GPS Megdtil ene ne ee mn eee 3 6 Chapter 4 Power Modes and Batteries Power Modan eor anre ai te Eeer 4 1 OM eric sel ti es es tal ce A eee ee ee le eee 4 1 e a e l E EEE AEE tee EERSTEN 4 1 ER a i a i a E oE ered ne Ge ai ante 4 1 Wake Up Event Default Settings ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeaeesseaeeseeaeeeseaeeeteeeeteas 4 2 Critical Suspend EE 4 2 Off reve ete ER Oia AT eta Ee arate aves adap EE ee 4 2 SE EE 4 3 Checking Battery Gtaius nent 4 3 Main Battery Rack 1 EREERSEEENENENEETERNNEEEHNNEEN EDERT 4 3 Battery HotSwapping uk 4 3 Low Battery Warnings neracio an veces NEEN Reeg ENEE NE NNA AE en Eder Neen Cen 4 3 Super cap Internal Battery ccccceceseeceneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeseaeeeseaaeeseaeeeseaaeeseaeeeesaeeeseeeesaas 4 3 Handling Batteries Safely ccecccccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeesceaeeseaaeeseaaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaees 4 4 External Power Supplies cccccccesesceeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeseaeeesaaeeeaaeesaaaeeeeaaeeeccaeeeseaeesseaeeessieeesaas 4 4 AC DC 15V Power Supply euer TEEN eia e chars eide Eia aeaaea aeo EE entered 4 4 Car Power Adatpter AAA 4
103. IP67 Charge Cycles 500 minimum Discharge Time Average Standard 8 hours Low Temperature 5 hours Discharge Current Average lt 300mA Charging low voltage cut off 3 9A nominal Wireless Radio Two wireless radios are available e Summit CF 802 11b g 2 4GHz e Summit CF 802 11a b g 5 GHz These radios support antenna diversity and are Wi Fi certified For 2 4 GHz frequency band the site survey limit is 75 dBm signal strength 15 dB SNR as measured by Honeywell For 5 GHz frequency band the site survey limit is 65 dBm signal strength 15 dB SNR as measured by Honeywell The noise levels for each of the radios as measured by the MX9 appropriate antenna is less than or equal to the values specified in the table below for the frequency band specified WLAN Radio Noise Level Channel Freduenev Band Type dBm Bandwidth SE 802 11 b g 95 dBm 20 MHz 2 4 GHz 2 483 GHz 802 1 1a b g 85 dBm 20 MHz 5 15 5 35GHz FCC UNII 1 and UNII 2 5 725 5 825GHz FCC UNII 3 WLAN Radio Channels Type 802 11 b g 1 11 FCC 1 13 ETSI 802 1 1a b g FCC 1 11 36 40 44 48 149 153 157 161 ETSI 1 13 36 40 44 A8 14 2 Bluetooth System Compatibility Bluetooth specification Version 2 0 EDR Supports Bluetooth Enhanced Data Rate EDR e Supports UART e Class 2 2 5mW 4dBm output power e Supports the 921 kbps baud rate e Adaptive Frequency Hopping AFH e Bac
104. K button to dismiss the About CERDisp dialog box on the MX9 desktop by clicking the OK button in the HSM Connect window on the host PC desktop The dialog box automatically times out and disappears after approx imately 20 seconds 7 The host PC displays the MX9 screen m RO File Zoom Tools Help F H My Device My Documents Recycle Bin Microsoft Windows CE Pa td Internet Explorer 8 The MX9 can now be configured from the HSM Connect window Input from the host PC s mouse and keyboard are recognized as if they were attached to the MX9 9 When the remote session is complete close the HSM Connect program by selecting File gt Exit or clicking on the X in the upper right hand corner to close the application on the host PC then disconnect the ActiveSync cable Note After using HSM Connect the MX9 cannot go into Suspend mode until after a warmboot If using Power Management on a MX9 always warmboot the MX9 when finished using HSM Connect 5 78 AppLock Introduction Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administration AppLock application Locking is designed to be run on Windows based devices only The AppLock program is installed before shipping Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the MX9 end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can
105. M MX9 Cradle Docking Charging Bay MX9 Docked LED Spare Battery LED Table Mounting Holes Spare Battery Charging Bay Headset Audio Cable port AC DC Power port Serial port Ethernet port USB Client port USB Host port 1 Front MX9 Docking Charging Bay 2 Spare Battery Charging Bay 3 Back Power port 4 Table Mounting Holes 13 4 Top View S O d e 1 94 4 93 cm GB 7 5 19 05 cm Oak oD a Spare Battery Charging Bay Battery Catch Power port Spare Battery Spring Spare Battery Charging Bay Desktop Table Mounting Holes MX9 Docking Charging Bay 1 Front 2 Table Mounting Hole Guides 3 Back Not to Scale Bolts washers screws screwdriver or wrench needed when attaching the MX9 desktop cradle to a protected flat surface are not supplied by Honeywell Periodically check the table mounting hardware and re tighten if necessary Table mounting hardware can be finger tight ened Note Do not over tighten the table mounting hardware If the cradle is cracked it must be replaced before being placed into service 13 5 Assemble Attach the AC Power Adapter Note Connect the cable to the cradle first then to an AC source The external Power Supply for the cradle is shipped with the cradle Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 if there is no AC cable The Power connector is located on the b
106. MX9 and the host PC e If the MX9 uses a serial port for ActiveSync it will be necessary to configure the MX9 to use the serial port Complete details on the proper cables and port configuration are included in Initial Setup page 5 72 Installing HSM Connect or LXEConnect 1 Contact Technical Assistance for the HSM Connect files 2 Download the files to a location on your host computer hard drive 3 Run the setup exe file that was copied to the host computer The setup program installs the HSM Connect utility on the host computer 4 Follow the on screen installation prompts 5 When the installation is complete create a desktop shortcut 6 HSM Connect or LXEConnect is now installed on the host computer and ready to use Using HSM Connect or LXEConnect 1 Power up the MX9 2 Connect the MX9 to the host computer using the USB Power or Serial Power cable Once connected the ActiveSync dialog box appears and the ActiveSync connection is automatically established 3 Select No for partnership when prompted Dismiss any ActiveSync dialog boxes warning a partnership is not set up It is not necessary to establish a partnership to use HSM Connect However if a partnership is desired for other reasons one may be established now 4 Double click the HSM Connect icon you created on the host PC desktop 5 HSM Connect launches About CERDisp Remote Control for Windows CE Version 2 03 OK 6 Click the O
107. MX9 is connected to external power Checking Battery Status Open the Battery control panel Battery voltage level status and power remaining is displayed Main Battery Pack The main battery pack has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary rigors of an industrial envi ronment Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the MX9 Multi Charger or the MX9 unit When the main battery pack is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of operation depending upon use and accessories installed The battery pack is resistant to impact damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge The more you use the scan ner or the wireless transmitter the shorter the time required between battery recharges When the MX9 is docked in a powered cradle the battery in the MX9 is recharged through the cradle connector in the dock ing bay An extra Li lon battery pack can be recharged in a powered desktop cradle The battery is fully recharged in a pow ered cradle in less than 4 hours The MX9 can be Off in use or in Suspend Mode while the battery is recharging Note When the main battery and internal battery are fully depleted the MX9 turns off The operating system reverts to the last saved registry settings when a ful
108. Marvell is a registered trademark of Marvell Technology Group Ltd or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Summit Data Communications the Laird Technologies Logo the Summit logo and Connected No Matter What are trade marks of Laird Technologies Inc The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc microSD and microSDHC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD 3C LLC in the United States and or other countries Symbol is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license Hand Held is a trademark of Hand Held Products Inc a subsidiary of Honeywell International RAM and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc 1205 S Orr Street Seattle WA 98108 Wavelink the Wavelink logo and tagline Wavelink Studio Avalanche Management Console Mobile Manager Mobile Manager Enterprise are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation Kirkland WA Wi Fi WMM Wi Fi Mutlimedia Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and the Wi Fi CERTIFIED logo are trade marks or registered trademarks of Wi Fi Alliance Acrobat Reader 2014 with express permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other com
109. Name Printerod Bluetooth Address 00 20 E0 00 12 34 cop enge 14 Subclass COM port Status not pared Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by the user The data displayed is the result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device Settings Note Options can be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled EZ Pairi ol x Settings Reconnect OPP Setup Alt Turn Off Bluetooth V Computer is connectable Computer is discoverable Vv Prompt if devices request to pair T Continuous search V Filtered Mode _ Printer Port COM9 Logging r Friendly Name Turn On Bluetooth Button Tap the button to toggle the Bluetooth client On or Off The button title changes from Turn On Bluetooth to Turn Off Blue tooth The default value is Enabled Bluetooth client is On Options Computer is connectable This option is Enabled checked by default Disable this option to inhibit MX9 connection initiated by a Bluetooth scanner 7 8 Computer is discoverable This option is Disabled unchecked by default Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the MX9 Prompt if devices request to pair This option is Enabled checked by default A dialog box appears on the MX9 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests t
110. Network TCP IP Autoconnect and Admin tabs to be enabled Network Tab WTO cnet 2 Ten x Network TCP IP Security Autoconnect Alt Phone Username Password APN Domain Enter the following information for the MX9 e Phone data access number e Username e Password e APN Access Point Name Note Some fields may not require an entry Contact your system administrator for the information needed TCPAP Tab The TCPIP tab contains a check box for indicating that TCP IP parameters are to be obtained from the network DHCP server This tab also contains fields for entering a static IP address and the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers if DHCP and DNS are not used SLUR TIERS een foki x TCP IP security Autoconnect Admin ab Alt Use DHCP Use DNS IP Address bn pa l SS Kr Da Del pP pP E e E E Tap the check box to enable or disable DHCP and or DNS When the Use DHCP check box is enabled the static IP address is disabled When the Use DNS check box is enabled the DNS address fields are disabled If DHCP and DNS are not used enter the addresses for e Static IP Address e Primary DNS server e Secondary DNS server Security Tab The Heading tab allows for entering and storing of security parameters for the WWAN connection If security parame ter are set using the Network and Dial up Connections control panel they are not stored a
111. Null or The text boxes accept string values only Note that executables and parameters are not checked for accuracy by the keyboard driver If the launch fails the MX9 emits a single beep if the launch is successful it is silent Keypad Control fia OK E KeyMap LaunchApp RunCmd App1 PO App2 Ftc el aps p App Opt exe O opt The Launch App command is defined for use by system administrators These instructions are parsed and executed directly by the keyboard driver 1 Place the cursor in the text box next to the App you wish to run e g App1 App2 2 Enable the EXE radio button if the application is an EXE file 3 Enter the name of the executable file 4 Enable the OPT radio button to add options or parameters for the executable file in the same text box Switching from EXE to OPT clears the text box but the information previously entered is stored allowing parameter entry Tap the OK button when finished The changes take effect immediately The result of the application exe and options opt entries are displayed on the KeyMap tab in the Key Sequence box when the key mapped to the LauchApp is selected RunCmd Tab The default for all text boxes is Empty Null or The text boxes accept string values only Note that executables and parameters are not checked for accuracy by the keyboard driver If the launch fails the MX9 emits a single beep if the launch i
112. OCESSING Encrypt exported key len lt gt LOG_EX Encrypt password length lt gt LOG_EX Encrypted data len lt gt LOG_EX Key pressed lt gt A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey LOG_EX processing PUREE Sage a The status information is being saved to a file and LOG_EX the file has been opened successfully Address of keyboard hook procedure AppLock found the kbdhook dll but was unable to LOG_ERROR failure get the address of the initialization procedure For some reason the dll is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kodhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Address of keyboard hook procedure OK AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the LOG_EX keyboard filter initialization procedure Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG_EX HotKey processing Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete LOG_ERROR initialization Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock LOG_ERROR the application could not be found or is corrupted Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed The LOG_PROCESSING backdoor hotkeys provide a method for
113. OPP in EZPair or LXEZ Pairing via an API call while the application is using OPP and restore this setting upon completion e When this item is checked the other parameter settings on this screen are unavailable dimmed OPP Send Tab EZ Pairi OKA Xx OPP Setup OPP Send no Send Selected File From Outbox Send Cancel Discover Select OPP Server From Remote Device List Addr Device Name When EZPair OPP is disabled no file names or OPP servers are displayed on this tab These areas are grayed out Similarly the buttons on this tab are also inactive when EZPair OPP is disabled Send Selected File From Outbox This area displays the file listing from the currently selected Outbox All files are shown The most recently pushed file is highlighted assuming the file is still present in the Outbox Select OPP Server from Remote Device List This list displays the known OPP capable servers that the MX9 has previously discovered The most recently paired server is selected and highlighted Buttons Send Tapping this button sends pushes the selected file to the remote server device Cancel Tapping this button cancels the send process initiated by tapping the Send button Discover Tapping this button initiates a discovery of OPP devices Results of the discovery are shown in the OPP Server selection box Data Collection Wedge Introduction Start gt Settings gt Cont
114. OR Message Registry read failure Reset system work area failure Shift pressed Shift Show taskbar Switching to admin backdoor Switching to admin hotkey press Switching to admin kbdhook dll not found Switching to admin keyboard hook initialization failure Switching to admin registry read failure Switching to TaskbarScreenMode Switching to user mode Switching to user hotkey press Taskbar hook failure Taskbar hook OK Explanation and or corrective action The registry read failed The registry information read when this message is logged is the application information It the Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty this error is logged The other application information is not required If the AppName value is not available AppLock cannot switch into user mode The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode AppLock was unable to adjust this area The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the administrator The system is currently in user mode and is now switching t
115. OR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX Message Enter AppLockEnumWindows Enter DecryptPwd Enter EncryptPwd Enter FullScreenMode Enter GetAppInfo Enter password dialog Enter password timeout Enter restart app timer Enter TaskbarScreenMode Enter ToAdmin Enter ToUser Enter verify password Exit AppLockEnumWindows Found Exit AppLockEnumWindows Not found Exit DecryptPwd Exit EncryptPwd Exit FullScreenMode Exit GetAppInfo Exit password dialog Exit password dialog cancel Exit password dialog OK Exit password timeout Exit restart app timer Exit TaskbarScreenMode Explanation and or corrective action In order for AppLock to control the application being locked so it can prevent the application from exiting AppLock launches the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered Entering the password decryption process Entering the password encryption processing Entering the function that switches the screen mode In full screen mode the taskbar is hidden and disabled Processing is at the beginning of the function that retrieves the application information from the registry Entering the password dialog processing Entering the password timeout processing Some
116. On Volume Up Volume Up Volume Down Volume Down Display Backlight Lighter Display Backlight Darker Alt mode QO TL Power Power Orange Blue Orange Blue Blue Blue ALT capital i m O S Right Scan Right Scan Right Scan Right Scan Up Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Down Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Result Notes 5250 Attn 5250 Clr 5250 Del 5250 Dup 5250 E Inp 5250 Field Exit 5250 Fld 5250 Fld 5250 Ins 5250 NL 5250 SysReq Windows Start menu Power On Suspend or Resume mode Volume increases Volume increases Volume decreases Volume decreases Backlight lighter Backlight darker Alt mode 11 6 To get this function Ctl mode Escape Space Enter Capslock toggle Mapped Diamond 1 Key Mapped Diamond 2 Key Uppercase Alpha toggle Back space Tab Backtab Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor Right Cursor Left Insert Insert Delete Home End Page up Page down F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 Press these keys in this order CTL ES SPC Enter i Blue TAB Diamond 1 Blue Diamond 1 SHFT g Backspace TAB Orange TAB Up Arrow Down Arrow Blue Up Arrow Down Arrow letter i CTL Blue Blue Orange n Orange SHFT SHFT Up Arrow Orange Orange Orange Orange Down Arrow Rull faul OI N TT 1 TH H o CO N A m F10 Blue H T N Blue a
117. Operating system and boot loader software image update is supported via expansion card and remote management via radio Internal flash is used for boot loader code and system low level diagnostics code Bootloader code is validated at system startup The UUID is stored in the boot flash A second copy of the bootloader code is stored on the internal SD Flash drive so that if a damaged bootloader is detected it may be re flashed correctly Internal SD Memory Card The MX9 has one SD card interface for storage of operating system and program code as well as persistent storage The internal SD flash card appears to the OS as a folder This allows the contents to be manipulated via the standard Win dows interface Video Subsystem The touch screen display supports QVGA and 16 bit color depth and is readable indoors or outdoors even in direct sunlight The display is transflective active matrix TFT and has an LED backlight A tethered stylus is included The touch screen surface can be activated with the stylus or a gloved or bare finger The Cold Storage option includes a touch screen heater and a scan aperture heater to eliminate condensation The heaters can be enabled or disabled by the user Once enabled the heaters will turn on whenever the ambient temperature warrants for example when moving into and out of freezers or refrigerated buildings Power Supply The MX9 uses one of two batteries for operation A Lithium lon Li lon standard
118. ROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING Message Exit ToAdmin Exit ToUser Exit ToUser Registry read failure Exit verify password no pwd set Exit verify password response from dialog Found taskbar Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure Getting configuration from registry Getting encrypt pwd length Hook wndproc failure Hook wndproc of open app failure Hot key event creation failure Hot key pressed Hot key pressed Hot key set event failure Hotkey press message received In app hook WM_SIZE In app hook WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED Initializing keyboard hook procedure Keyboard hook initialization failure Keyboard hook loaded OK L after Ctrl Explanation and or corrective action into admin mode user mode cannot be entered The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode The registry must be re read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled The length of the encrypted password is being calculated AppLock is unable to lock the application This could happen if the application being locked encountered an error aft
119. SOLD HEREUNDER WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM A CLAIM BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO HII FOR THE PRODUCT THESE LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT EVEN WHEN HI MAY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INJURIES LOSSES OR DAMAGES SOME STATES PROVINCES OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 15 1 All provisions of this Limited Warranty are separate and severable which means that if any provision is held invalid and unenforceable such determination shall not affect the validity of enforceability of the other provisions hereof Use of any peripherals not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by this warranty This includes but is not limited to cables power supplies cradles and docking stations HII extends these warranties only to the first end users of the products These warranties are non transferable Limited Warranty Durations The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 Desktop Cradle is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 Vehicle Cradle is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 Battery Charger is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 2400mAh Li lon and 2100mAh Li lon Battery is 6 mo
120. Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network e For Stored Credentials User Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered 8 Enter these items as directed below Credentials a ei User Password CA cert D _ Validate server Use MS store 9 Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required otherwise enter the User name 10 24 10 Enter the password 11 Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now 12 Tap OK then tap Commit Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main Tab 13 See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 10 19 for more information on certificate storage 14 Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store 15 Return to the Credentials screen and enable the Validate server check box Credentials fal a User Password Full trusted store d Validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Tap the Use MS store check box The default is to use the Full Trusted Store CA cert 2 To select an individual certificate tap on the Browse button 3 Uncheck the Use full trusted store check box 4 Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in
121. The following list represents the factory default program installation Your system may contain different items from those shown below based on the software and hardware options purchased Program Function Communication Stores Network communication options ActiveSync Transfer files between the MX9 and a host computer Connect Run this command after setting up a connection Start or Stop FTP Begin end connection to FTP server Server Command Prompt The command line interface in a separate window eXpress Scan Option Requires Wavelink Avalanche option eXpress Config Internet Explorer Access web pages on the world wide Internet Microsoft WordPad Opens an ASCII notepad Remote Desktop Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Connection RFTerm Option Terminal emulation application Settings Access to all Control Panels a shortcut to the Network and Dialup Control Panel and access to Taskbar options Summit Set Summit radio network parameters Transcriber Enter data using the stylus on the touch screen Wavelink Avalanche Option Remote management for networked devices Windows Explorer File management program e If installed RFTerm runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e If installed and enabled AppLock runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e The wireless client connects automatically during each reboot e Bluetooth re connects to nearby paired devices automatically at the c
122. ack of the cradle 1 Plug the AC power plug 3 into any AC wall outlet with a dependable power source 2 Firmly press the adapter end 4 of the power cable into the 3 pin connector 2 on the power adapter 3 Firmly press the cradle end 1 of the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle 4 AC power is now being supplied to the AC power adapter and the cradle Connecting Input Output and Power Cables to the Desktop Cradle Note Route all cables to ensure they are protected from jostling tugging or being disconnected by passing objects The cradle must be receiving power from an external power source before MX9 battery charging can begin Note Periodically test the connections for stability and adjust as necessary Headset Audio port Power port Serial RS232 port Ethernet port USB Client port USB Host port oar WN 13 6 Desktop Cradle Connector Identifiers jeje rE S 2 Power 3 Serial 4 Ethernet 5 6 USB A and USBB Connecting a Headset Audio Cable Firmly press the cradle end into the MX9 Headset Audio port 1 on the back of the cradle Test the connection for sta bility Connecting the Power Cable Assemble the power cable by first plugging the AC end into an electric socket then plug the other end into the AC adapter The cradle cord is secured to the AC adapter Firmly press the cradle end of the power cable into the MX9 Power port 2 on t
123. acters use the following template aaaaaa 2 To read the same string with a modulo 10 check digit in the seventh character position use the following template aaaaaac Then enter 0123456789 for the Check parameter 3 To read either a string of 6 alphabetic letters OR a string of 8 numeric digits use this template 111111tdddddddd Note the use of the t to separate the first template from the second 4 To read multiple rows of OCR data as shown below 123456 ABCDEF Either of the following templates could be used ddddddr1l11111 or aaaaaaraaaaaa Note the use of the r to define the position of the second row OCR Checksum Calculation The following explains how the checksum is generated for the OCR bar code Modulo 10 1 Add the characters in the string not including the checksum character Valid values are 0 9 for modulo 10 2 Subtract 10 from the sum obtained above Continue subtracting 10 until the remainder is less than 10 3 The remainder obtained above is the checksum Enter this digit in the checksum position Modulo 36 1 Add the characters in the string not including the checksum character Digit Alpha values are defined as follows for modulo 36 0 9 0 9 A 10 B 11 Z 25 2 Subtract 36 from the sum obtained above Continue subtracting 36 until the remainder is less than 36 3 Subtract the remainder obtained above from 36 The value obtained is the checksum Enter this character in the chec
124. ad screws to 3 1 in lb 34 11 N m Secure the strap tether to the trigger handle AN Oa PWD Place the stylus in the stylus holder in the trigger handle Periodically check the trigger handle for wear and the connection for tightness If the handle gets worn or damaged it must be replaced If the trigger handle connection loosens it must be tightened or replaced before the MX9 is placed in service Adjusting the Headset Microphone and Securing the Cable The headset consists of an earpiece a microphone a clothing clip and a cable The headset attaches to the audio cable end of the voice cable which attaches to the MX9 Align the audio connector and the headset quick connect cable end Firmly push the cable ends together until they click and lock in place wt fe Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth Note the small Talk label near the mouthpiece Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing Under Clothing e Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar e Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head Over Clothing e Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body e Tuck the cable under the belt but leave a small loop where it goes under the b
125. add saved code ID from above to output buffer 9 Add processed data string from above to output buffer 10 Add suffix string to output buffer 11 Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer in case the data is processed as a string 12 If key output is enabled start the process to output keys If control characters are encountered e If Translate All is set key is translated to CTRL char and output e If Translate All is not set and key has a valid VK code key is output e Otherwise key is ignored not output 13 If key output is disabled a windows message is broadcast to notify listening applications that data is available The manipulated data is ready to be read by applications Main Tab The Data Collection Wedge supports up to three concurrent data collection devices For example the internal scanner could be used to collect data at the same time a Bluetooth scanner is paired and or a serial device is attached to COM1 The MX9 must be in a desktop cradle to use a tethered scanner Setting Default Device 1 Disabled Device 2 Internal Device 3 Disabled Keep Awake Disabled Output Disabled Send Key Messages Enabled Scan Mode Continuous Disabled Scan Mode Timeout between same symbol 1 second Device 1 Internal Radio button allows scanner input output on Device 1 scan key or trigger Device 2 Output is enabled when COM1 is enabled on this port Device 3 Output is enabled when COM is ena
126. adle e 2 Screws to attach RAM ball to cradle e RAM arm The installer must supply hardware to attach the RAM ball base to the vehicle Communications cables for the MX9 are available separately Quick Start Vehicle Cradle The following list outlines in a general way the process to follow when preparing the MX9 powered vehicle mounted cradle for use Refer to the following sections for more details 1 Attach the vehicle mounting assembly to the vehicle Attach the cradle to the vehicle mounted assembly Secure the MX9 in the mounted vehicle cradle 2 3 4 Adjust the MX9 to the best viewing angle 5 Connect peripheral cables 6 Secure the DC DC or 12 VDC power connector from the vehicle power supply to the Power port on the cradle 7 Secure all cables in strain relief cable clamps The MX9 in the powered vehicle mounted assembly is ready for use 13 11 Components Before installation begins verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary for your mount type Front View oak WN Hr Sp ba Docking Guide Pin left Release Latch left Docking Bay Charge Communicate port Power LED RAM Bracket Upper Ball Mount Input Output port Power connector Serial Interface port Alternate RAM Bracket Upper Ball Mount Strain Relief Cable Clamps 1 0 PORT SERIAL INTERFACE Vehicle Cradle Label back of cradle 13 12 R
127. al interface for data communication Transmission TX and Reception RX signals are implemented to send commands and to receive GPS data Honeywell designs use UART B on the module for communica tion The default baud rate for the NMEA 0183 protocol is 9600 bps 8 bits Parity None 1 Stop The baud rate can be increased to 115Kbps 14 3 Accuracy Position to within 10 meters 2D Root Mean Square RMS and 5 meters 2D RMS Satellite Based Augmentation System SBAS corrected Velocity to within 24 meters per second SBAS is compatible with the Wide Area Augmentation System WAAS satellite signal augmenter United States and the EGNOS satellite signal augmenter Europe Protocol The module outputs the following messages e GGA GPS Fix Data e RMS Recommended Minimum Specific GPS Data e GSA GPS DOP and Active Satellites e GSV GPS Satellites in View e GLL Geographic Position Latitude Longitude e VTG Course over Ground and Ground Speed The GPS module supports NMEA 0183 protocol and SiRF Binary Protocol Desktop and Vehicle Cradle Pinout RS232 Connector The connector is industry standard RS232 and is a PC AT standard 9 pin D male connector Description Data Carrier Detect Received Data Input Transmitted Data Output Data Terminal Ready Signal Power Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear To Send Rl or Power 5 VDC sourced by the Cradle Note Pin 9 of this port is connec
128. al support team directly by filling out our online support form Enter your contact details and the description of the question problem Telephone www honeywellaidc com locations For our latest contact information please check our website at the link above Product Service and Repair Honeywell International Inc provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world To obtain warranty or non warranty service please visit www honeywellaidc com and select Support gt Contact Service and Repair to see your region s instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number RMA You should do this prior to returning the product Limited Warranty Honeywell International Inc HII warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and to conform to Hie published specifications applicable to the products purchased at the time of shipment This warranty does not cover any HII product which is i improperly installed or used ii damaged by accident or negligence including failure to follow the proper maintenance service and cleaning schedule or iii damaged as a result of A modification or alteration by the purchaser or other party B excessive voltage or current supplied to or drawn from the interface connections C static electricity or electro static discharge D operation under conditions beyond the specified operating parameters or E repair or service of
129. alog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again If the passwords match the password is encrypted and saved Options Panel Administrator Control Pei Ki Security Options Launch timeout feoo00 Replace timeout 20000 Restart timeout 20000 AppLock uses 3 timeout values when locking applications Launch timeout the time to wait for an application to initially launch before timing out Default value is 60000 milliseconds 60 seconds Replace timeout the time to wait for an application to replace the current window with another one before timing out Default value is 20000 milliseconds 20 seconds Restart timeout the time to wait for an application to restart itself before timing out Default value is 20000 milliseconds 20 seconds Status Panel Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile specified by the Administra tor For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information Administrator Control E Ki Options Status i Filename system
130. and wires back into the cavity before securing the hatch Before securing the hatch completely examine the seam between the front and back half of the MX9 If the gasket is off center loosen the screws a little adjust the gasket and re tighten the screws Press the Power button to turn the MX9 on Attaching the Hand Strap Note Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX9 or the hand strap is attached not both In the absence of a trigger handle the hand strap should be used at all times The hand strap is pre installed on a MX9 that is purchased without a trigger handle 1 Place the MX9 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface 2 Place the hand strap base 2 in the grooved area matching the screw holes in the hand strap base with the screw holes in the body of the Mx9 3 Insert the screws supplied into each of the four holes and fasten the base securely 4 Slide the hand strap bottom clip pins into the slots at the base of the MX9 and pull the strap towards the top of the MX9 until the top clip slips into the groove 5 Making sure the closed loop fastener surface on the hand strap are facing up slide the strap through the latch in the top clip 6 Fold the end of the strap over so that the closed loop fastener surfaces mate evenly and the hand strap is secured to the MX 7 Test the strap s connection making sure the MX9 is securely connected to each end of the strap connectors Check the cl
131. apable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry metal surfaces conductive tools etc making the objects very hot Never place a bat tery in a pocket or case with keys coins or other metal objects External Power Supplies External power supplies are available for the following any I O cable with a power connector desk cradle vehicle cradle car power adapter CLA Battery Charger The indoor power supplies e g AC DC Adapters use IEC320 C 14 AC power connectors The car power adapter uses the cigarette lighter adapter CLA and is powered by the vehicle s automotive 12V battery The adapter power supply converts the input voltage into a voltage suitable to power the MX9 and charge the unit s internal backup battery The vehicle mount cradle uses a 36V 24 60V or 70 150V DC DC power supply Note The MX9 desk cradle and battery charger use the same external power supply AC DC 15V Power Supply The MX9 receives AC DC power from the AC DC 15 VDC 4 Amp 60 Watt Power Supply The MX9 external power con nection is part of the serial cable assembly and the USB cable assembly The AC DC Power Supply is connected to a wall outlet then to the power cable secured to the base of the MX9 Note The Honeywell approved AC Power Adapter is only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment The indoor power supply has a IEC320
132. app still open ToUser after admin no app or cmd line change Unable to move desktop Unable to move taskbar Unhook taskbar wndproc failure Unhook wndproc failure Unhooking taskbar Unhooking wndproc WM_SIZE adjusted X after Ctrl L Ret from password lt gt Decrypt data len lt gt Window handle to enumwindows x WM_WINDOWPOSCHG adjusted x Explanation and or corrective action After the application is launched AppLock must wait until the application has initialized itself before proceeding The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press the administrator may have left the configured application open If so AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified otherwise it just locks it The desktop is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode This pr
133. application shut down before AppLock can stop it In these cases AppLock gets notification of the exit When the notification is received AppLock starts a timer to restart the application This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function Entering the function that switches the screen to non full screen mode and enable the taskbar Entering the function that handles a mode switch into admin mode Entering the function that handles the mode switch to user mode Entering the password verification processing There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumeration function found the application There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumeration function did not find the application Exiting password decryption processing Exiting password encryption processing Exiting the function that switches the screen to full screen Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the application information from the registry Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator Level LOG_EX LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_P
134. applications using a standard DOS display box should specify condev_appcls in the Match text box e Remote Desktop remote exe should specify TSSHELLWND in the Match text box Allow Close Default is Disabled When enabled the associated application can be closed by the end user This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to be terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end user s request Error conditions may generate a topmost popup requiring an end user response memory resource issues requiring an end user response etc Also at the administrator s discretion these types of applications can be started manually see Manual Launch by the end user Security Panel Administrator Control ka Ki ES zeg zem D Hot Key shift Ctrl 4 Password Gen Confirm Password _ Setting an Activation Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use The hot key sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is
135. applock txt og Level None sl Save As Clear status Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button the button The stan dard Windows OS Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog tap OK View Select a View level from the drop down box Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed Error Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for Customer Support when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging All All messages are displayed Log Note If a level higher than Error is selected the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is None however to reduce registry use the administrator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the r
136. ar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC The REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC REGDUMP EXE Registry dump Saves a copy of the registry as a text file The file REG TXT is located in the root folder Note The REG TXT file is not saved in persistent storage To use the REG TXT file as a reference in the event of a restart copy the file to the System folder on the MX9 or store a copy of the REG TXT file on a PC WARMBOOT EXE Double tap this file to warm boot the computer e all RAM is preserved It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost WAVPLAY EXE Double tapping a sound file e g WAV causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background MX9 Command line Utilities Command line utilities can be executed by Start gt Run gt program name PrtScrn EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in BMP format in the System folder Tap Start gt Run and type prtscrn and tap OK or press Enter There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made The device beeps and the screen captured file scrnnnnn bmp is placed in the System folder The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activated The command is not case sensitive Desktop Note For general use instruction refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows on line Help application insta
137. arty software associated with these settings Status The Status panel displays the current status of the MX9 network adapter selected in the drop down box Note the avail ability of the Windows standard Refresh button When the Windows Refresh button is tapped the signal strength signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the drop down menu Avalanche Update Settings OK Shortcuts Adapters Status ZE H spccri0e1 sii Signal Strength Signal Quality IP Address MAC SSID BSSID Link Speed 100 100 100 200 00 17 23 0 1 02 03 AP2 00 1d 45 01 02 03 54 0 Mbps Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the MX9 Speed is dependent on signal strength Exit The Exit option is password protected The default password is leave The password is not case sensitive Input Exit Password E If changes were made on the MX9 Startup Shutdown tab screen then after entering the password tap OK and the fol lowing screen is displayed Avalanche Monitor Do you want to Continue monitoring O Stop monitoring Change the option if desired Tap the X button to cancel Exit Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet Using Remote Management 1 Configure the radio to connect to the n
138. ash memory 128MB 512MB 1GB and 4 GB supported Internal CF slot for Summit a b g radio protected inside device Microsoft Windows CE 5 802 11 a b g radio WWAN Bluetooth GPS receiver Symbol 9551 Short Range Symbol 1524 Lorax scan engine Hand Held Products 5300SF Imager TFT Active Matrix Transflective LED backlight 10 grams min to 80 grams max Operating System Radio Modules Integrated Scanner Imager Display technology Touch screen actuation force Standard Battery Low Temperature Battery 2400mAhr room temperature 2200mAhr room temperature Backup Power SuperCap is used for backup no backup battery is used External Power In USB Host USB Client RS232 RS232 w 5V 4 wire Audio 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Ethernet port available in cradle External I O Port Functions Internal I O Ports One serial port DTE for an integrated laser decoder USB 1 1 Host capable with power 5V 500mA One SSP port capable One SD port for I O expansion capable One serial port DTE with appropriate power for a WAN radio One SIM port for WAN One serial port DTE for interface with GPS receiver chip One camera port for non decoding imager MX9 Dimensions and Weight Length overall Width at Display Depth at display scanner Width at keypad Depth at keypad Configured with battery scanner Bluetooth 802 11x radio handstrap and stylus Configured with battery Bluetooth hand
139. ates Name Type Private Keys sl 12 Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the private key file change the Type pull down list to Private Keys select the certificate desired and tap OK Enter the password for the certificate if appropriate 10 46 Verify Installation Tap on View to see the certificate details again Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Private Key sl Present ee E The private key should now say Present If it does not there is a problem Possible items to check Note Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file as shown earlier in this section If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file generate a new certificate and follow the import process again Note Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name for example euser cer for the certificate and euser pvk for the private key file If the file names are not the same rename the private key file and import it again 10 47 10 48 11 KeyMaps Introduction The keypad is available in a 62 key or 38 key configuration The 62 key keypad is also available in an IBM 5250 configuration e When using a sequence of keys that includes a sticky key press the sticky key first release it then press the rest of the key sequence e Sticky keys do not need to be held down while pressing the next o
140. attery every time a scan read decode sequence is performed Enabling Continuous Scan Mode will ensure the laser is always on and decoding Note Do not scan decoder engine configuration bar codes when Continuous Scan Mode is on Configuration bar codes do not decode when scanned while Continuous Scan Mode is On A Caution Laser beam is emitted continuously Do not look or stare into the laser beam Set the Timeout between same symbol to a value sufficient to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a sym bol is left in the scanner s field of view If trigger mode power mode or timeout between same symbol parameters are changed using external configuration bar codes in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide the operating system automatically restores the parameters to their programmed settings upon a cold boot and or any change made in the Data Collection settings When the scanner is in continuous mode the trigger and scan buttons function as a scanner On Off switch The scanner red LED will always be off in continuous mode The audio beeps and green LED function the same as they do for normal trigger mode Switching to and from continuous and normal trigger modes is in effect after upon tapping the ok button and waiting for the amber scan LED to go out A reboot is not required or necessary COM1 Tab Setting Default Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Collection OK B
141. ault if the value is not set in the registry AppName registry value does not exist or is empty This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application The Internet registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both Applock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the application name or command line The registry has to be read when switching into user mode This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_ERROR LOG_ERR
142. b page 5 65 enter Identification numbers for the SIM card and provides a button to disable enable the radio PRUE een 2 BOKD x Security Autoconnect Admin about New Password Re enter Submit Enable Radio Password Enter a new password then re enter the same password Tap Submit to save the new password Tap the Enable Radio button to turn the radio On or Off When the radio is Off the Admin password will need to be entered before the radio can be set to On PIN Personal Identification Number The PIN is a unique sequence of numbers stored on the SIM card If the radio is enabled and the SIM card requires a PIN a connection will not occur until the PIN is entered successfully After entering the PIN code tap the Submit button A message is displayed with either Success or the number of retries allowed before the SIM card PIN number entry is locked from further use If the radio is disabled entering and submitting the PIN saves the PIN value on the MX9 The next time the radio is enabled and requires a PIN the saved PIN will be sent and a PIN will not need to be entered again PUK Personal Unblocking Key The PUK is a unique sequence of alpha characters displayed on the SIM card A default PUK code is not available After entering the PUK code tap the Submit button A message is displayed with either Success or the number of retries allowed before the SIM card PUK entry is locked from
143. bar AppLock is resident on each mobile device Avalanche Update Settings Ki x Preferences Display Taskbar Exe lr Administration Keep settings unlocked for 10 min Application Startup Monitor For Updat sl Shutdown Monitor for Updat w Activity Log Log Level No Activity Log D Administration By default Keep settings unlocked for 10 minutes is disabled checkbox is blank Application Startup Behavior of the Enabler when the MX9 boots up The default is Monitor for Updates Do not Monitor When the device boots do not launch the Enabler application and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server Monitor for Updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application Launch User Interface Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Launch the Enabler application Shutdown Behavior of the monitor when the Enabler is exited The default is Monitor for Updates Monitor for Updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application Exit Application Terminates the monitor requires successful password entry if a password has been configured Activity Log Log Level Use this option to control the level of detail recorded in the log file The default is No Activity Lo
144. battery ambient temperature remaining charge etc before charging begins As with all batteries expect to see a reduction in the total number of operations a fully charged battery pack can deliver as it ages When the battery reaches end of life end of life occurs after 500 charge discharge cycles it must be replaced Battery packs do not need to be fully discharged between charge cycles While charging the charger and battery pack will generate enough heat to feel warm This is normal and does not indicate a problem 12 4 Inserting a Battery into the Charging Pocket de Aa It is important that battery packs are inserted into the charging pocket correctly Inserting the battery incorrectly could result in damage to the battery pack or the charger Do not slam the battery pack into the charging pocket Damage may result 1 When preparing the battery pack for insertion into the battery charging pocket hold the battery with its four charging contacts in line with the charging contacts in the charging pocket 2 Aim the retaining catch towards the back of the charger 3 Push the locking tab towards the back of the battery charging pocket until it stays in place 4 Place the battery in the charging pocket making sure the tab at the top of the battery pack fits into the slot at the top end of the charging pocket 5 With a hinging motion slip the battery down into the charging pocket until the locking tab
145. battery has a 2400 mAh capacity Low temperature Lithium lon Li lon batteries have a 2100 mAh capacity Input Output Connector A single external connector at the base of the MX9 provides the following signals e USB Host and USB Client e RS232 with support for powering a tethered device e g scanner or imager e Audio in and out for headset e Power input e Ethernet only accessible when MX9 is secured in a cradle docking bay The MX9 cables are designed to be securely connected to this port This port is also used to connect the MX9 to the docking bay connector in cradles A tethered protective cap is provided to cover the I O connector when it is not in use Audio Support All Microsoft supplied audio codecs are included in the OS image The hardware codecs the input and output analog voice circuitry and the system design are designed to support voice applications using a headset accessory cable Bluetooth The MX9 contains Bluetooth version 2 0 with Enhanced Data Rate EDR up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air Bluetooth device connection or pairing can occur at distances up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight The wireless client retains network connectivity while Bluetooth is active The user will not be able to select PIN authentication or encryption on connections to or from the MX9 However the MX9 supports authentication requests from pairing devices If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption the MX9 di
146. bled on this port Note Since Internal is the default setting for Device 2 a Bluetooth scanner can be paired with the Wedge on Device 1 without disabling the internal scanner Output When Output is enabled data is received from the scanner and processed via the wedge but an application can also open the WDGO device and write data to it An example is when a printer is connected to the same COM port as the scanner via a switch Data can be written to the WDG device and is redirected to the associated COM port The application must open the WDGO port not the COMx port as the Wedge has exclusive rights to the COM port If Output is not enabled the WDGO port can still be opened but any attempts to write to that port fail Note Adjust the settings and tap OK to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Data Collection ol x Bluetooth I Output Output Output Bluetooth I Output I Output Output M Send Key Messages WEDGE M Send Key Messages WEDGE Scan Mode Continuous Same symbol timeout fi fo sec Panel showing options for Symbol scan engine Panel showing options for HHP scan engine The Scan Mode Continuous Scan section is only present if the MX9 is equipped with a Symbol integrated scanner Continuous Scan Mode Continuous scan mode is only available if the MX9 is equipped with a Symbol scanner Continuous scan mode draws power from the main b
147. bology field The scanner driver searches the beginning of the bar code data for the type of ID specified in the Data Options tab Enable Code ID field plus any custom identifiers When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming bar code data if the symbology is disabled the bar code is rejected Otherwise the other settings in the dialog are applied and the bar code is processed If the symbology is disabled all other fields on this dialog are dimmed If there are customized settings uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology This results in disabling all symbolo gies except the customized ones Min This field specifies the minimum length that the bar code data not including Code ID must meet to be processed Any bar code scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected The default for this field is 1 Max This field specifies the maximum length that the bar code data not including Code ID can be processed Any bar code scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected The default for this field is All 9999 If the value entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology the maximum valid length is used instead Strip Leading Trailing Control This group of controls determines what data is removed from the collected data before the data is buffered for the applica tion When all values are set Code ID
148. box To disable the headset select None in the Input Selection combo box Note The list of input selections and headset selections is stored in the registry Both WAN and Bluetooth are included in the input list in the registry but with the disabled flag set they do not appear in the list Mouse Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Mouse Use this option to set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the MX9 touch screen Mouse Properties Pei OK E Double click this grid to set the double click Ge sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above MX9 Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt MX9 Options Set options unique to your device such as keypad backlight Status Popup taskbar icon display and CapsLock It may be necessary to warmboot the MX9 after making desired changes A pop up window imforms if a warmboot is required Communication Tab Options on this tab configure communication options for the MX9 MX9 Options 2 foki x Communication Misc Status Popup Enable TCP IP version 6 Allow Remote Desktop Autologon Note RDP file must be saved in System folder Autolaunch TimeSync Enable TCP IP Version 6 By default IPv6 is disabled on the MX9 Tap this check box to enable IPv6 Allow
149. ccccceeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeescaeeeseeeeeseaaeeeseaeesseaeeeseaeesseaeeesenaeeseaees 9 4 File Menu Options EE 9 5 Avalanche Update using File gt Settings ccccssccccesseseeeeeeesnneeeeeseeneeeeesseeaeeeeesenaeeeeesaeaeeeeess 9 6 Menu Options ieran neste eet ee EEN a e aaaea a eae el lentes 9 6 COMECON heia aea aa aa eae aaea Eaa ea Aaaa ea Naka aer aaao A arke E eLa A an AED h 9 7 LTE 9 8 Server Contact EE 9 8 Daf Eegeregie Wid eet aie nal leat eee 9 9 le 9 11 TASKD LEE 9 12 SCAN COMIG NEE 9 13 KIT VE 9 14 elle 9 15 SAAS ris Sialic teeters rece ed E eee eT ae i eat sede eee 9 16 ACAD TEE 9 17 Static kisi a ana eet eh ae Ree ee ete ee 9 19 Et DEE ee are Gee es 9 20 Using Remote Management 9 21 USING express Dean 9 21 Creating Bar Codes AA 9 21 Scanning Bar CodeS uereg nia a naaraan dea oariad raaraa a anioe taaa aa aaia 9 21 Process Complete ees e aee aoe dee aena Gate Ged a a a aeaii 9 22 Chapter 10 Wireless Network Configuration MOJU CION an T aA ET E TET 10 1 limpotant Notesin a ea ea e ea a anette E A a ain p aie 10 1 Summit Client Utility 2 00 0 ccc e eee e cence cece eee aeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeecaeeeseaaeeseaeeeseeaeesseaeessaeeeseaeeesenaeeesaees 10 1 RE 10 1 SUMMit Re ele 10 2 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 10 3 Using the Wireless Zero Config Utility 0 cccceceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeeeaeees
150. ce if feasible is recommended to maintain backup battery charge status as the backup battery cannot be recharged by a dead or missing main battery Certificates Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Note Digital certificates are date sensitive If the date on the MX9 is incorrect wireless authentication will fail Certificates E OK fa Stores Trusted Authorities D Lists the certificates trusted by you The Certificates stores lists the certificates trusted by the MX9 mobile device user These values may change based on the type of network security resident in the client access point or the host system Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Windows CE Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates Date Time Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Date Time or Time in Desktop Taskbar Use this MX9 panel to set Date Time Time Zone and assign a Daylight Savings location Setting Default Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT 05 00 Daylight Savings Enabled Date Time Properties a OK E 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 345 67 8
151. ched to your MX9 it indicates the MX9 contains an engine with a laser aimer Ze Se AVOID EXPOSURE LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE EN60825 1 2007 IEC60825 1 2007 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 LASER LIGHT DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT 1 0mW 630 680nm Laser Safety Statement This device has been tested in accordance with and complies with IEC60825 1 ed2 2007 Complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated June 24 2007 LASER LIGHT DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT 1 0 mW MAX OUTPUT 630 680nM Model Number Serial Number and IMEI Labels The model item number serial number and international mobile equipment identity IMEI number for the terminal are located on labels affixed to the back of the terminal FCC Part 15 Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses an
152. clicks into place and the battery pack is secure in the charging pocket Removing the Battery from the Charging Pocket 1 Push the locking tab away from the battery The battery will pop up slightly 2 Grasp the battery and with a hinging motion lift it out of the charging pocket Interpreting the Charging Pocket LEDs The status of the charge operation is indicated by the color of the LED for each charging pocket RED Continuous on any charge pocket Continuous red means the battery pack is charging RED FLASHING on all charge pockets Battery charger fault or failure GREEN on any charge pocket Continuous green means the battery pack charge is complete Battery is Ready YELLOW on any charge pocket Continuous yellow amber means the battery pack temperature is out of range The charging pocket is in standby mode while the pocket waits for the battery pack to warm up or cool down NO LIGHT on any charge pocket No light on a charge pocket means there is no battery pack installed e or the battery pack in the pocket is not fully inserted e ora defective or damaged battery pack is installed e or the charger is defective or damaged Refer to Battery Charger Help page 12 6 12 5 NO LIGHT on all charge pockets No light means there is no AC power available for the battery charger or there is power but there are no batteries in any charging bay Battery Charger Help The following is intended as an aid
153. client Down Associated Authenticated etc The Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Administrator mode The profile must already exist Always perform a Suspend Resume func tion when changing profiles Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin login password has been entered and accepted When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile the Summit Client Utility passes control to Wire less Manager for configuration of all client and security settings for the network module The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the network card Once disabled the button label changes to Enable Radio By default the radio is enabled The Admin Login button provides access to editing wireless parameters Profile and Global may only be edited after enter ing the Admin Login password The password is case sensitive Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout To logout either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button Auto Profile Auto Profile allows the user to configure a list of profiles that the SCU can search when a radio connection is lost After using the Profile tab to create any desired profiles return to the Main tab To specify which profiles are to be included in Auto Profile tap the List button Auto Profile
154. comi Notification Data Options Alt Baud Rate Data Bits 115200 s 57600 O7 38400 Stop Bits Power on pin 9 5v Integrated laser scanner default values are 9600 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and No parity If these values are changed the default values are restored after a cold boot or reflashing Note COM1 does not support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners connected to the MX9 I O port Tethered scanners must be connected to a MX9 cradle Notification Tab Setting Default Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enabled Good Scan Vibration Off Bad Scan Vibration Off Data Collection OK ES Notification Data Options Processi 4 gt Enable Internal Scanner Sound Good Scan Vibration off Short Medium O Long Bad Scan vibration off Short Medium Long Internal Scanner Sound This panel toggles internal scanner sounds on and off Internal scanner sound by default is enabled Vibration Vibration on the MX9 is activated when a scan is completed successfully or with a failure scan key released before good scan timeout or rejected because of Data Options configuration It is not activated when a trigger or scan key is pressed The default setting for both Good Scan and Bad Scan vibration is Off Enable this parameter when a tactile response on a good scan or bad scan is desired Scan sounds are ac
155. companied by a tactile response when the internal scanner Sound parameter is enabled Enable short medium or long duration for each selection good scan and bad scan When the MX9 does not have vibrate capability any active vibration setting is ignored Data Options Tab Bar code manipulation parameter settings on this tab are applied to the incoming data resulting from successful bar code scans sent to the MX9 for processing Note The Data Options tab contains only those options available for one type of decoding engine Setting Default Enable Code ID None Symbology Settings All Control Character Translate All Disabled Custom IDs Name blank HHP Properties Hand Held Options Disabled Products Centering DecodeMode LinearRange AimTimer LeaveLightsOn The Data Options tab contains several options to control bar code processing Options include Defining custom Code IDs Disable processing of specified bar code symbologies Rejecting bar code data that is too short or too long Stripping characters including Code ID leading or trailing characters and specified bar code data strings Replacing control characters Adding a prefix and a suffix For MX9 with Symbol Decoding Engine Data Collection Wedge can only enable or disable the processing of a bar code inside the Wedge software Enabling or disabling a specific bar code symbology at the scanner imager is done manually using the configu
156. creen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate Recalibrate p If your device isn t Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK button to save any double tap changes Calibration Tab Calibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the tar get s center and then lift the stylus To begin tap the Recalibrate button on the screen with the stylus Press and hold the stylus on the center of the target as it moves around the screen Press the Enter key to keep the new calibration setting or press the Esc key to revert to the pre vious calibration settings System Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System Use these MX9 panels to e Review System and mobile device data and revision levels e Adjust Storage and Program memory settings e Assign a device name and device descriptor Setting Default General No user interaction Memory 1 3 storage 2 3 program memory Device Name Unique to equipment type Device Description Unique to equipment type Copyrights No user interaction General Tab System Properties fa Ki ES General Memory Device Name lr System Microsoft Windows CE Version 5 00 Build 1400 Copyright 2004 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright law Comp
157. ctions on obtaining CA and User Certificates Options are none For example when the valid certificate is stored as My Computer System MYCERTIFICATE CER enter System in the Certs Path text box as the Windows folder path Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Options are 32 bytes 64 128 256 512 or 1024 bytes The amount of time in milliseconds that a device will be continuously pinged The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms The amount of time in milliseconds between each ping after a Start Ping button tap Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms 10 16 Sign On vs Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password the Summit Client Utility offers these choices e The User name and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen If this method is selected anyone using the device can access the network es The User name and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed The user must enter the User name and Password at that time to authenticate Using Stored Credentials 1 2 3 4 5 6 N 9 10 11 12 13 After completing the other entries in the profile tap on the Credentials button Enter the User name and Password on the Credent
158. d Properties OCR Properties Ki Ea Font Disabled Oa Cp Direction Left to Right Top to Bottom Right to Left Bottom to Top Money MICR Template dddddddd Group G ss Group H fo Check Character fo Font Font selection Default is disabled e A OCRA e B OCRB e Money OCR Money e MICR Magnetic Ink Character Recognition Direction Decoder reads OCR fonts in any direction but setting direction parameter correctly can increase decoding speed Default is Left to Right Template Template length must match the length of OCR string to be read Default is dddddddd Valid template selections are e a alphanumeric character digit or letter e c check character e d digits from 0 to 9 e e any character e g any character specified in group G e h any character specified in group H e alphabetic letter e r delimits a row e t delimits multiple templates All characters are transmitted as is except for the selected template Group G Null terminated string defines the set of characters in group G The default is null Group H Null terminated string defines the set of characters in group H The default is null Check Enter the string constant 0123456789 for modulo10 checksums and the string constant 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ for modulo36 checksums The default is null OCR Template Examples 1 To read a combination of 6 alpha and numeric char
159. d Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 28 EAP FAST The SCU supports EAP FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning With automatic PAC provisioning the user cre dentials whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen are sent to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the MX9 For automatic PAC provisioning once a username password is authenticated the PAC information is stored on the MX9 The same username password must be used to authenticate each time See the note below for more details Note When using Automatic PAC Provisioning once authenticated there is a file stored in the System folder with the PAC credentials if the username is changed that file must be deleted the filename is autoP 00 pac For manual PAC provisioning the PAC filename and Password must be entered To use EAP FAST make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to EAP FAST 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open 5 To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Summit Chent ut 2 BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global Edit etat sl a Profile efault SDC
160. d can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user may find the following booklet helpful Something About Interference This is available at FCC local regional offices Honeywell is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Honeywell The correction is the responsibility of the user Caution Any changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authorization to operate t
161. d from the menu that appears Use this panel to make the Input Panel on screen keyboard or the physical keypad primarily available when entering data on any screen Selecting Keyboard enables both Tap the Options button to set the size of the keys displayed on screen and whether Transcriber gestures are enabled or disabled Internet Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Internet Options Set options for MX9 Internet connectivity Select a tab Tap the button for help using Windows CE Help installed in your mobile device Adjust the settings and tap the OK button The changes take effect immediately Clear History Connection tab Use LAN Autodial Name Proxy Server Bypass Proxy Security tab Privacy tab First party cookies Third party cookies Session cookies Advanced tab Stylesheets Theming Support Multimedia Security Popups tab Block popups Display notification Use same window Setting Default General tab Start Page http Awww honeywellaidc com Search Page http Awww google com User Agent Default Windows CE Cache Size 512Kb Clear Cache Button enabled Button enabled Disabled USB Client Disabled Disabled Internet Default site Accept Prompt Always allow Enabled Enable All options enabled All options enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Security Tab Use the Settings button to set ActiveX control scripting and plug in behavior for each
162. d main tenance of the vehicle 5 Remove the lid from the DC to DC power supply by removing only the screws on the top of the lid 6 Attach the stripped wire ends to the output side of the DC to DC power supply 7 Attach the stripped wire ends to the input side of the DC to DC power supply 8 The input and output blocks each have two plus and two minus connectors Either connector in the block can be used to connect the matching polarity wire The input and output blocks also each have two chassis ground connec tions When connecting the cradle to vehicle power use one chassis ground connector in each block 13 19 9 Wire colors depend on the type of device attached Please refer to the Wiring Schematic for wire colors 10 Use the looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown above then reattach the lid 11 Connect the DC to DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system as directed below Caution A For battery powered vehicles VIN is connected to battery positive ViN must be connected to battery negative must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles VIN is connected to battery positive ViN is connected to battery negative is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative 12 While observing the fuse requirements shown in Specifications for Electrical Supply connect the power cable as c
163. dio button is selected In the text box App1 4 corresponding to the number selected for Launch App1 4 enter the application to launch If any parameters are needed for the application tap on the OPT radio button This clears the text box though the application name is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box Tap OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control If the KeyMap tab is accessed again the application plus any specified parameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected Remap a Command NO Of WD Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select RunCmd 1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Tap on the RunCmd tab Make sure the FILE radio button is selected In the text box Cmd1 4 corresponding to the number selected for RunCmd1 4 enter the desired command If any parameters are needed for the command tap on the PARM radio button This clears the text box though the command is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box Tap OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control If the KeyMap tab is accessed again the command plus any specified parameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected LaunchApp Tab The default for all text boxes is
164. e 6 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type electri cal terminals are an accepted method of termination Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG 1mm2 conductors 7 Wiring color codes for Honeywell supplied DC input power cabling Vehicle Supply Wire Color 12 VDC Brown Return Blue Vehicle Chassis GND Green 8 Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket 9 Refer to the following sections to complete the power connection to the vehicle cradle Connecting Power Supply to Vehicle Cradle The power cable connector is L shaped The long end of the L the cable will be facing up towards the strain relief cable clamps The Power port is on the back of the vehicle cradle 1 Align the connector pins to the vehicle cradle Power port firmly pushing the connector into the Power port 2 Tighten the nut of the plug clockwise until the power cable is securely fastened 3 Secure the cable to the cradle with the Vehicle Cradle Strain Relief Cable Clamp page 13 23 4 The power LED on the MX9 illuminates when it is receiving external power and the MX9 is docked Attaching a Serial or I O Connector The serial cable can originate with a tethered scanner a desktop laptop PC a printe
165. e F22 mode F23 mode F24 mode a lowercase is the default TPOlO O 5 3 o 11 3 To get this function Press these keys in this order Result Notes y peda E DEN 2 TEE SE P EE es 2 EE BEE l C E GE i EE DEET J TE EE 2 EE D w E A SET Pe lt CO CO N S a BY CO N N lt X lt c A M 3 O DV O z Gell Ce TT Lee period SPC Ps Period pered Orange Ri Blue III Reverse Solidus or Backslash Oranye IS S E Solidus or Forward slash Be p oar rac EE eee eS i Acute accent or single quote or apostrophe omw p Fora C TT 1 number fF Exclamation mark a oa e a a sem feam a r orange Rr EE EE s EE To get this function Press these keys in this order Result Notes eg Ud _ S Arirae SREY per TI Deeg sar omme iont parenesi Qo Qo gt gt EE EE EE mw oo o a oe T ari orange S EE C Tee E Orange NI SE Underscore or horizontal bar Enter ENTER Enter 62 Key 5250 Keypad Overlay KeyMap To get this function Attention Attn Clear Clr Delete Del Duplicate Dup Erase Input E Inp Field Exit Enter Fid Field Minus Fid Field Plus Ins Insert NL New Line SysReq System Press these keys in this order CTL CTL TL CTL CTL Diamond 1 CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL i The following are ANSI keymaps Windows key On when Off Suspend toggle when
166. e e 9000302PWRSPLY Power Supply 60 110VDC with cable Shown With Lid Attached Shown With Lid Removed e Lid is secured with screws on the top of lid e Input and output connector blocks under lid e Two positive negative and ground connections per terminal block If your DC to DC power supply does not look like the image above see DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Side of Lid page 13 15 for installation instruction Connecting Electrical Cables to Power Sources The DC to DC power supply is used to provide vehicle power to the MX9 when placed in a DC powered vehicle cradle Specifications for Electrical Supply Input Voltage Always observe input voltage range specified on the DC to DC power supply Output Voltage 12 VDC 10 Power 60 W Fuse 5 A slow blow fuse Fuses are USER SUPPLIED Note Refer to the Wiring Schematic that follows for wiring colors and connections Caution For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle This fused circuit requires a five Amp maximum time delay slow blow high interrupting A rating fuse If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery positive terminal Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Caution Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoid
167. e cradle must be empty The last connection must be to the vehicle power source 1 Connect the power cable to the vehicle cradle 2 Route the cable from the cradle to the DC DC power supply 3 4 Route the power cable the shortest way possible The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle Remove the lid from the DC DC power supply by removing only the screws on the side of the lid 13 16 6 Attach the stripped wire ends to the output side of the DC DC power supply Note The input block has Vin Vin and GND terminals The output block has Vo and Vo terminals 7 Connect the ground wire from the cradle to the GND terminal on the input side of the DC DC power supply 8 Route the wiring from the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system Do not connect to vehicle power at this time 9 Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC DC power supply 10 Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown 11 Reattach the cover with the screws 12 Connect the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s elec
168. e docking bay Remove the foreign objects and reseat the MX9 into the docking bay Check the docking bay is clear of foreign objects and reseat the MX9 fully into the docking bay Check that power is applied to the Power Jack at the rear of the MX9 Desktop Cradle 13 10 Using a Powered Vehicle Cradle Introduction Vehicle mounted cradles and brackets are specifically designed for vehicle mount applications The vehicle mounted assembly restrains the MX9 and isolates it from shock and vibration Overhead dash and roof support pillar mounting is via a RAM Mount accessory which includes all the hardware and squeeze plates required for vehicle mounting In most cases disconnect any power and peripheral cables from the MX9 before it is secured in the vehicle mounted assembly Never put the MX9 into the vehicle mounted assembly until the assembly is securely fastened to the vehicle The MX9 must have a main battery installed when it is docked in a vehicle mounted cradle The main battery in the MX9 is recharged when the MX9 is docked in a powered vehicle cradle The MX9 vehicle mount cradle uses one of the following power supply options e A power cable for 12V vehicles e DC DC power supply for non 12V vehicles e AC DC power supply with US power cord e AC DC power supply requires country specific C14 type power cord The available RAM mount options include es RAM ball base for vehicle e RAM ball base for MX9 vehicle cr
169. e location where files pushed to the MX9 from a remote client are stored Use the browse button to browse to and select the Inbox folder e Use Windows Explorer to create a custom directory if desired before selecting the Inbox folder The default Inbox is My Device My Documents DefaultInbox Outbox This is an alphanumeric field displaying the currently selected Outbox e The Outbox is the location where files are stored to be pushed from the MX9 to a remote server Use the browse button to browse to and select the Outbox folder e Use Windows Explorer to create a custom directory if desired before selecting the Outbox folder The default Inbox is My Device My Documents DefaultOutbox Write Capable When checked files may be written to the MX9 When unchecked inbound files are rejected This option is enabled checked by default Enable Notifications When checked the user is notified and may be prompted for a response when files are received by the MX9 When unchecked inbound files are received with no notification to and no required action from the user This option is enabled checked by default Disable EZPair or LXEZ Pairing OPP When checked OPP is disabled in EZPair or LXEZ Pairing When unchecked OPP is enabled in EZPair or LXEZ Pairing The default is unchecked OPP is enabled for EZPair or LXEZ Pairing e Because only one application can use OPP at a given time custom applications should disable
170. e mobile device when it is shipped The installation files are located in the System folder Note Important If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device s the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s Doing so results in unnecessary delays when booting the device The Avalanche Enabler installation file HSM_ENABLER_CAB is loaded on the MX9 by Honeywell however the device is not configured to launch the Enabler installation file automatically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After installation the Enabler will run as a background application monitoring for updates This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface The RMU CE CAB file is placed on the device during manufacturing in the System RMU folder During the Enabler installation process the Enabler checks for the RMU CE CAB file in the System folder e If present it assumes the RMU CE CAB file is already installed and continues e If the file RMU CE CAB file is not present it looks for the file in the System RMU folder e If present the Enabler copies the file to the System folder and installs it At this point the OS will automatically install the RMU Remote Management Utility after the MX9 reboots Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the Avalanche Enabler from the MX9 e Delete the Avalanche folder located in
171. e scanner has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode If the scanner is reset the sequence is repeated Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for help Bluetooth Printer Setup The Bluetooth managed device should be as close as possible no more than 32 80 feet 10 meters line of sight in a quiet environment to the MX9 during the pairing process 1 Open the Bluetooth control panel 2 Tap Discover Locate the remote Bluetooth printer in the Discovery panel 3 Tap and hold the stylus or double tap on the Bluetooth printer until the right mouse click menu appears 4 Select Pair as Printer to pair the MX9 with the Bluetooth managed printer The devices are paired The Bluetooth managed printer may respond with a series of beeps or LED flashes Refer to the remote Bluetooth printer manufacturer s User Guide it may be available on the manufacturer s web site Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for Bluetooth product help Note If there is no beep or no LED flash from the remote Bluetooth printer the MX9 and the printer are currently paired Using OPP Pairing with an OPP Device Prerequisites A remote device such as a mobile phone that supports OPP OPP is enabled on the MX9 Place the remote device in discovery or visible mode Initiate discovery on the MX9 by tapping the Discover button on the OPP Send tab The Mag discovers the remote device The MX9 attempts to send a
172. e shape of the MX9 main battery The spare battery can be inserted in the battery well in only one direction When there is an MX9 with or without a handle docked in the cradle a spare battery can still be inserted in the charging bay You do not need to undock the MX9 before inserting or removing a Spare battery Stabilize the cradle with one hand when inserting removing the spare battery if necessary Inserting a Spare Battery 1 Hold the battery with the charging terminals facing down toward the charging pocket 2 Tilt the end with the charging terminals into the re charging terminals at the front end of the spare battery charging bay Slide the battery forward until it is fully inserted into the battery bay 3 Push down on the spare battery until the catch clicks into place securing the spare battery in the battery bay This will ensure the charging contacts on the spare battery connect with the re charging contacts in the battery bay 4 The Spare charging bay LED illuminates indicating the battery is properly seated in the charging bay Removing a Spare Battery A green Spare battery LED signifies the spare battery is charged Remove the Spare battery by sliding the latch in and pulling the Spare battery up with a hinging motion and out of the charging bay The Spare charging bay LED turns Off Desktop Cradle Help The following is intended as an aid in determining whether the MX9 battery pack or the cradle battery charg
173. e the shipping container for later storage or shipping Introduction The MX9 Battery Charger is designed to simultaneously charge four rechargeable Lithium lon Li lon battery packs The time required for charging is dependent upon the battery pack temperature and conditions The battery charger should be located in an area where it e Is well ventilated e Is notin high traffic areas e Locates or orients the AC cord so that it will not be stepped on tripped over or subjected to damage or stress e Has enough clearance to allow easy access to the power port on the back of the device e Is protected from rain dust direct sunlight or inclement weather This device is intended for indoor use only and requires an indoor AC power source The charger is not approved for use in hazardous locations This device cannot charge recharge coin cell batteries sealed inside the mobile device if any This chapter is intended to familiarize the user with the safety and operating instructions necessary to use the MX9 Battery Charger Model MX9385CHARGER MX9384CHARGER to charge rechargeable lithium ion battery packs MX9380BATTERY MX9381BATTERY This information should be readily available to all users and maintenance personnel using this battery charger Store the charger and batteries when not in use in a cool dry protected place 12 1 Cautions and Warnings Battery Charger There is a risk of explosion if the MX9 Li lon battery
174. eaeeeeees 10 3 Switching Control tO SCHU eee iieii aeai ioiii ei iaa iae iaaa 10 3 Mal FADS aa a A a S AET E E TN 10 3 Auto Profle ege Eed ncra sc NE E AEE E E AEE EEA S EAEE 10 4 Fete an Uu LOO UE 10 4 Profile Tab E 10 6 BUTOR EE 10 6 Profile Parameters oouccncin oen irane i EEE aE N E A A N ETE 10 8 status TaD seca aire Tan Care EAE ee Bie ets ete NRA Pe ee RN Be a 10 10 Diags Tab EE 10 11 Global Tab EE 10 12 Custom Parameter Option 10 13 Global Parameter 10 13 Sign On vs Stored Credentials ccccccceccsceeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseeeeeseeaeeeeeeeseaeeseeaeesenaeeesseeesaas 10 17 Using Stored Credentials AA 10 17 Using a Sign ON Green 10 17 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path 10 19 Ws r Certificate Ssni See dE ENEE 10 19 Root CA Certificate Smii inertie ania e ie aia a aa e ia eed ea ia aias 10 19 Using the Certs Pat 10 19 Using the Windows Certificate Store 0 eccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeesteaeeeseneeeee 10 19 Configuring Profiles AAA 10 21 KKK DEE 10 21 NEE eet Lee cate tea tacts frac EE 10 22 LEAP emgeet Actin tak ead de ee A eee At es ite ee a eee 10 23 PEAP IMSGCHAP ee ioe caret Ga Gok ean EE T oe aieates 10 24 PEAP GUG contig Ceci ev eee ed ay ete SE een Se eer a 10 26 E EE geen nde leede hee seet ee 10 28 EAP FAST ete niece aii ech ite sete ea Rectan ith ea ee a ee i 10 29 BARTS ee eege 10 31 WPA RSR esoe ie Goeres eigen e EES ee E ATA denied 10 33 CO
175. ecify the address of the Mobile Device Server Barcodes should be printed at a minimum of 600 dpi Scanning Bar Codes Follow these instructions for each device to be configured 1 Start express Scan on the MX9 by double clicking the express Scan icon 2 Enter the bar code password if any eXpress Scan passcode Enter Passcode Press Start before scanning the first barcode 3 Click Start 4 Bar code 1 must be scanned first The scanned data is displayed in the Data text box The password if any entered above is compared to the password entered when the bar codes were created eXpress Scan Remaining Scanned Scan Barcode 1 into Data field 5 If the passwords match the bar code data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect the number of bar codes included in the set 6 If the passwords do not match an error message is displayed The current screen can be closed using the X box in the upper right corner The password can be re entered and Bar code 1 scanned again eXpress Scan Scan next barcode into Data field 7 The remaining bar codes may be scanned in any order After a bar code is scanned that bar code is removed from the Remaining list and placed in the Scanned list Process Complete After the last bar code is scanned the settings are automatically applied Configuring settings Please Wait Once co
176. ed The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective A enclosure Caution For installation by trained service personnel only Warning Risk of ignition or explosion Explosive gas mixture may be vented from battery Work only in well ventilated area Avoid creating arcs and sparks at battery terminals 13 18 Wiring Schematic EXISTING CIRCUITRY ON VEHICLE FORKLIFT BATTERY MAIN SWITCH 5A slow fuse Close to power source VEHICLE MOUNTED CRADLE BROWN RED WHITE H 8 BLUE RED BLACK 4 GND LJ GREEN GREEN ISOLATED DC DC x a Use color scheme corresponding to input wire provided Connecting Vehicle Electrical Supply 1 The vehicle cradle must be empty 2 Begin by connecting the power cable to the vehicle cradle Work from this connection with the last connection being to the vehicle s power source 3 Route the cable from the cradle to the DC to DC power supply 4 Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends Route the power cable the shortest way possible The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation an
177. ed in percentage and graphically There are no user entries on this screen Note After completing radio configuration it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated no encryption WEP or authenticated LEAP any WPA as indicated above 10 10 Diags Tab STT MU em BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default IP Address 100 100 100 100 Re connect Release Renew Start Ping 100 100 100 200 Diagnostics Save To SDC Diagnostics Output The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues Re connect Button Use this button to apply or reapply the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen Release Renew Button Obtain a new IP address through release and renew All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button Start Ping Button Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button Once the button is tapped the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping Clicking the button ends the ping The ping also ends when any other button on this
178. ed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted When an entry or entries is highlighted and Delete is selected the highlighted material is deleted from the list box Custom Identifiers The Custom Identifiers button is located on the Data Options tab Code IDs can be defined by the user This allows processing parameters to be configured for bar codes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for bar codes that have data embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID These are called custom Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog unless Enable Code ID is set to None When the custom Code ID is found in a bar code the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the bar code data The dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs if Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol or to replace the list of standard code IDs if Enable Code ID is set to Custom When Enable Code ID is set to None custom code IDs are ignored Note Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog and are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID it
179. ed into the Certs Path directory Using the Certs Path 1 See Generating a Root CA Certificate page 10 34 and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a 2 Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device The default location for Certs Path is System A dif ferent location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable Note the location chosen for certificate stor age should persist after a reboot 3 When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication do not enable the Use MS store check box after enabling the Validate server check box 4 Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert text box 5 Tap OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes Using the Windows Certificate Store 1 See Generating a Root CA Certificate page 10 34 and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a PC 2 To import the certificate into the Windows store See Installing a Root CA Certificate page 10 37 3 When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication be sure to enable the Use MS store check box after enabling the Validate server check box 4 The default is to use all certificates in the store If this is OK skip to the last step 5 Otherwise to select a specific certificate tap on the Browse button Choose certificate E IT Use full trusted store Issued By Thawte Server CA Thawte
180. ed out of range or was turned off attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why reconnect failed is unknown Clear Pairing Table on Boot This option is Disabled by default When enabled checked all previous paired information is deleted upon any reboot sequence and no devices are reconnected When enabled checked Auto Reconnect on Boot is automatically disabled dimmed Auto Reconnect on Boot This option is Enabled by default All previously paired devices are reconnected upon any reboot sequence When disabled unchecked no devices are reconnected upon any reboot sequence Auto Reconnect This option is Enabled checked by default This option controls the overall mobile Bluetooth device reconnect behavior When Auto Reconnect is disabled unchecked Auto Reconnect on Boot is automatically disabled and dimmed When Auto Reconnect is disabled unchecked no devices are reconnected in any situation The status of Auto Reconnect on Boot is ignored and no devices are reconnected on boot The status of Clear Pairing Table on Boot controls whether the pairing table is populated on boot When Auto Reconnect is enabled checked and Auto Reconnect on Boot is disabled unchecked devices are not reconnected on boot but are reconnected in other situations example return from out of range When Auto Reconnect is enabled checked and Clear Pairing Table on Boot is enabled checked devices are not reconnected on bo
181. eeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeseaaeeseeeeeseneeeesnaeeseaes 12 7 EE Une Ee EE 12 7 ele EE 12 7 EIVICC serie a eege det deele eene ze is 12 7 Battery Cleaning Storage and Service cccccecceeeneeeetee scenes eeeeeeeceaeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeteeeeeseeeesenaeee 12 7 EE Une WEE 12 7 10 SlOrage EE 12 7 EIER eeh Ee kee Lee 12 8 Chapter 13 Cradles Unpacking your Cradles ccccccecceeeeneeeceneee cease eeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseeaeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeneaeeee 13 1 OVEMVIOW Ee EE EE eebe T ae 13 1 Preparing the Cradle for Use A 13 1 Tethered Scanners and the MX9 Cradles ssssseeseeesiessiresrrssirtetitttirtetitterrnstinsetnnstnntennntennnnnnn nnna 13 2 Cradle Cleaning Storage and Service ccccececceeeneeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaas 13 2 Battery Cleaning Storage and Service ccccccecceeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee ceases ceases seaeeeecaeeeseneeeseeeeeeeeeee 13 3 Using a Desktop Cradle vic c cccccieececiveieeececeecseneeeitepecevetieheciessitesscessubveneesec esbersectivecesdeteedteesedvereeeseed 13 3 let reie e el ET EE 13 3 Quick Start Desktop Cradle A 13 3 Battery Charging in a Desktop Cradle 13 3 Front E 13 4 le 13 4 EE 13 4 TOD EE 13 5 Desktop Mounting Footprint A 13 5 Assemble Attach the AC Power Adapter ssssssssesseessriesrrseissrirteritstintstinstietatinttnnnennnstnnnenennt 13 6 Connecting Input Output and Power Cables to the Desktop Cradle
182. eeseeaeesseaeeeseneeeeed 2 8 LEDs Backlights and INdiCators A 2 9 Status LEDS EE 2 9 System Status LED coho secs civsnedsdeessseehceeds coeasssupsecsfeeenaaiiciadeevsecetvGitpeeeceuakaeceneseves wensesn i cand ARARE 2 9 Battery Charging Status LED EE 2 9 Alpha mode Status LED sissit ioana n e a dt novice BEES Eege 2 9 Bluetooth Status LED EE 2 9 Keypad Backlight Seti oj es crasdcevassccesins tadevcvssctucavsasea bees SERA aaa aaa anaE EENE AERAR EES 2 9 Toggle le Clees 2 9 Tapping the Touch Screen with a Givlus 2 9 Calibrating the TOUCH SCree ine cccssteacescduscacetegueteasccbesdecedsoesetveds ceentie cu ladhveasecavie eee sevavee ds AEEA ATENE 2 10 Adjusting the Display Backlight Brightness A 2 10 Adjusting the Display Backlight Tmer A 2 10 Applying the Touch Screen Protective Film 2 10 Adjusting the Keypad Backlightissssccsccceceeccstes enansa iaaa d e AE ene aSa aE aE 2 11 Setting Date RUE 2 11 Grab Time Utility discccssed cesses bovedvecess aaa aada daa daoa ae tears eege 2 11 Autolauneh Na 2 11 Synchronize with a Local Time Server cccecceeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeesceeeseneeesenaeeeseaes 2 11 Setting Power Scheme Timers cc cccccccceeeceeeeeneeeseeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeeaaeeegaeeeeaaeeeesaeeseeaeeeseaeeseeaeesenaeeetes 2 12 Battery NEE 2 12 AC Power Sheme EE 2 12 Setting Speaker Volume tuntua StEAAtEEAOEEEEEEASEEnASEEASnEnnnEnAnnnnnEnnenEnnt 2 13 Using he BEE 2 13 Using a Control Panel AA 2 13 Body
183. eesieesiieitttkttstktttk instit tetin nttu tatt untknnannnnkunsnnn nanena nnnnt 6 3 Hotkey Activation Notkey AAA 6 4 End User Internet Explorer EUIE kee 6 4 Application Configuration ccccccccceccceceneeeteneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaaeeeseaeeeeeaeessaeeeseaeeescaeeeseeeeesesaeeeseeesnaas 6 5 Application Panel 000 EENS ENEE EEN Deedee cid EEN denies 6 5 Lamien Le 6 7 Auto At Boot eier dane ioe sate en et deet ea cade 6 7 Auto ET E E 6 8 Manual LAUNCH EE 6 8 Ee EE 6 8 AllOW Close eege eee vain in ee a a i ve ede ate 6 9 DECUMITY EE 6 9 Setting an Activation Hoken 6 9 Setting a Password in the Security Panel 6 10 Options Panel vis c 0st ie iaia iee isd ae ite ad ee deed CEET 6 10 Status Panels EE ee at et eet dee E 6 11 KI 6 11 MOG D 6 12 SAVE EE 6 12 Applbock HED e a R E E ee Ee nite amidase eae 6 12 AppLock Error Messages kk 6 13 Chapter 7 Bluetooth Configuration e dreet Le TEE 7 1 Initial Configurations EE 7 3 SUBDSEQUOME RE 7 3 Bluetooth Devices acna eee aa hadi eee ties ERENNERT dee A 7 4 Clear Button arises Ee EE 7 4 Discover BOtfopt ieii aeeaiei eee a eraa eed ENEE EENS CERN 7 4 DISCOVENING EE 7 5 Stop BUON a iiinis taae nan el cee ce Seen eee a e tends E 7 5 Bluetooth Device aceite ain Aad ANA ce ean Re ee ee 7 6 Bluetooth Device Men arreir soii eee hone eee eos ee dee NOS CEE Ee se 7 7 Bluetooth Properties ek 7 8 Settings EE 7 8 Turn On Bluetooth Button 7 8 OPTIONS isc decent S
184. eg istry e None e Error e Processing e Extended e All Save As When the Save As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and file name If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created AppLock Help Issue The MX9 won t switch from Administration mode to end user mode Solution e Ifthe configuration is valid for one application but not the other the switch to end user mode fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered e If two copies of the same application are configured but the application only allows one copy to run at a time for example Microsoft Word and RFTerm the switch to end user fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered Issue The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed What does this mean Solution When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications Honeywell has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY When RF Term is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator the following error message is displayed in a message box Selected hotkey is not allowed
185. ehicle Battery To Vehicle Mounted Device Green GND Brown DC Blue DC 12 VDC Vehicle Electrical System 10 Amp Slow Blow Fuse DC DC Vehicle Chassis Brown Blue Green Note Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation The cradle will not power on or function if the cable is connected with the polarity reversed See the following figure titled Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes for additional wire color coding specifics 13 21 Connecting Vehicle 12 VDC Supply 1 The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the MX9 vehicle cradle 2 While observing the fuse requirements specified above connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle When available always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel after providing proper fusing 3 ATTENTION For uninterrupted power electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the igni tion switch of the vehicle 4 Route the power cable the shortest way possible The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this tem perature Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate 5 Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicl
186. elt e Do not wear the cable on the front of your body It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects Connecting Cables to the MX9 Note Do not connect or disconnect cables in a Hazardous location Connecting the USB Host and Power Cable AC DC Adapter must be assembled before this process begins Do not connect AC power to the AC Adapter until instructed in the following procedure OI Kale Mm P vi ke 1 Holding the cable I O connector 1 pinch the catch release buttons in until the catches are open Connect the cable to the MX9 I O port by matching the shape of the I O connector on the cable with the shape of the I O connector at the base of the MX9 Release the catch release buttons LA gt 2 Insert the AC adapter single pin cable 2 3 Connect the AC Adapter to a power source wall outlet 4 Insert the USB host plug 3 into the USB Host port The MX9 and the host device are connected Connecting the USB Client and Power Cable AC DC Adapter must be assembled before this process begins Do not connect AC power to the AC Adapter until instructed in the following procedure Bt m yo kam 1 Holding the cable I O connector 1 pinch the catch release buttons in until the catches are open Connect the cable to the MX9 I O port by matching the shape of the I O connector on the cable with the shape of the I O connector at the base of the MX9 Release the catch release buttons
187. en communicating with the AP The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio installed in the mobile device Options e Brates only 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps e BG Rates Full All B and G rates e Grates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps e BG optimized or BG subset 1 2 5 5 6 11 24 36 and 54 Mbps e A rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps e ABG Rates Full All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred e BGA Rates Full All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred e Ad Hoc when connecting to another client device instead of an AP Default e BG Rates Full for 802 11b g radios e BGA Rates Full for 802 1 1a b g radio Note BG radio only Previous SCU versions may have the default set as BG Rates Full Depending on the SCU version either BG Optimized or BG subset is the default It is important the Radio Mode parameter correspond to the Access Point AP to which the device is to connect For example if this parameter is set to G rates only the MX9 may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates The options for the Radio Mode parameter should be set based on the antenna configuration as follows A Main and BG Main Antenna Configuration Radio Mode ABG Rates Full BGA Rates Full A Main and A Aux A Rates Only BG Main and BG Aux B Rates Only G Rates Only BG Rates Full BG Subset Contact Tech
188. entiate them in the Switchpad Default is blank Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box Default is 1 Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order and do not need to be sequential Option Internet Launch Button Global Key Global Delay Input Panel Clear Button Scroll Buttons Explanation Default is Disabled Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE When the checkbox is enabled the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available See the section titled End User Internet Explorer EUIE page 6 4 for more details See following section titled Launch Button page 6 7 Default is Ctrl Spc Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching between applications The Global Key default key sequence must be defined by the AppLock Administrator The Global key is presented to the end user as the Activation key Default is 10 seconds Enter the number of seconds that Applications must wait before starting to run after reboot Note Delay Global may not be available in all versions of AppLock You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application lowest Order launched and setting the delay to 0 for all other applications Default is Disabled Enable check to show the Keyboard opt
189. environmental for the ROHS REACH WEEE information Dealer License Republic of Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA103458 Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement Vehicle Power Supply Connection If the supply connection is made directly to the battery a 10A slow blow fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches 12 7 cm of the battery positive terminal Brazil Restrictions Bluetooth and GSM technology are not available in Brazil In Brazil the MX9 is not available with the MX9 AC DC power adapter and MX9 Desktop cradle Getting Started Overview The MX9 is a ruggedized handheld computer targeted for indoor and outdoor use It is powered by a lightweight main battery that can be removed and replaced without the need for special tools MX9 wireless connectivity is secured by user configured encryption and authentication protocols The MX9 has an integrated keyboard outdoor readable touch display a tethered stylus Microsoft Windows operating system and many wireless connection options The keypad is available in a 62 key or 38 key configuration The 62 key keypad is also available in an IBM 5250 configuration Bar code reader options are an imager or laser scanner integrated in the MX9 or a handheld scanner tethered to the port at the base of the MX9 Bluetooth mobile bar code imagers and scanners or the Bluetooth Ring Scanner module Wireless network connection is accomplis
190. eout 8 seconds Certs Path System Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout 5000 ms Ping Delay ms 1000 ms 10 12 foj Main Profile Status Diags Global Summit Client Utility BW Property Value SDC 65 dBm e Changing this setting will reset the connection d Commit Custom Parameter Option Save Changes Honeywell does not support the property Custom option The parameter value is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a value that is not available from the param eter s drop down list Selecting Custom from the drop down list has no effect Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the custom value in the registry Global Parameters Parameter Default Function Roam Trigger If signal strength is less than this trigger value the client looks for a 65 dBm Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set Full DFS Channels different Access Point with a stronger signal Options are 50 dBm 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 dBm or Custom The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must exceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the different Access Point is attempted Options are 5 dBm 10 15 20 25 30 35 dBm or Custom The amount of time after association or a roam scan with no roam that the radio collects Received Sig
191. er is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Manager After configuration Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset Network parameter configuration is supported for es IP address DHCP or static IP e RF network SSID e DNS hosts primary secondary tertiary e Subnet mask e Enabler update Related Manual Using Wavelink Avalanche on Windows Computers The MX9 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed when it is shipped The installation files are located in the System folder The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Follow ing this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help Start Menu Program Options
192. er may be mal functioning Issue Cause Solution Battery pack does not Different manufacturer s battery pack Check if the battery pack is part number 161888 fit in battery well or there is an object in the battery 0001 or a low temperature battery 161915 0001 If well not do not use Remove the object from the battery well No battery pack in Dirt or foreign objects are in the Unplug cradle from outlet Remove any dirt or spare battery charging battery well foreign objects from battery well well but the charging LED is on If the LED continues to stay ON the cradle may be defective Return charger to an authorized Honeywell service center 13 9 Issue Cradle is plugged into a live outlet battery pack is inserted but RED LED is OFF and no other LEDs are on or all LEDs are off When you first put a fully charged battery pack in the battery well the RED LED comes on indicating the battery pack is charging LED is flashing RED at any station LED is flashing RED at any station Solid YELLOW LED when battery pack is inserted in the cradle MX9 docked in cradle but cannot work with accessory cables connected to cradle MX9 docked in cradle but Docked LED does not light up Cause Battery pack is not making contact with charging terminals in the battery well Faulty battery pack New battery pack same result During the first few minutes the charger checks the battery
193. er performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock The application is open but AppLock cannot lock it The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey notification Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry When the administrator changes the hotkey configuration the hotkey controller must be notified This notification failed The user just pressed the configured hotkey In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization The keyboard filter initialization failed The keyboard hook dil exists and loaded successfully Processing the backdoor entry Level LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_PROCESSING LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_PROCESSING LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX Message Loading
194. ered mode is disabled to set up the MX9 to communicate with a Bluetooth serial device 9 Tap HID Device to pair a HID device 10 Tap PAN Device to pair a PAN device 11 Tap DUN Device to pair a DUN device 12 Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device Once disconnected tap Clear to remove the device name and data from the MX9 Bluetooth Devices list Select Yes at the Delete all disconnected devices Yes No dialog box 13 Upon successful pairing the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection The reaction may be an audio signal from the device flashing LED on the device or a dialog box is placed on the MX9 display 14 Whenever the MX9 is turned On all previously paired live Bluetooth devices in the vicinity are paired one at a time with the MX9 If the devices cannot connect to the MX9 before the re connect timeout time period expires default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired device there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to Reconnect is disabled Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices tab displays any device previously discovered and paired with the MX9 EZ Pairi OKI x Bluetooth Devices Settings Recc Jr EZ Pairi Name Last 4 Blue Name PrinterO1 12 34 EJ Printeroz AA BB D ScannerO1 AB CD Scanner02 14 26 D Discover Discover Before Discover After Disc
195. ership has been established with Connect on a desktop computer ActiveSync will synchronize using the wireless link serial port or USB on the MX9 Requirement ActiveSync version 4 5 or higher for Windows XP must be resident on the host computer Windows Mobile Device Center version 6 1 or higher is required for a Windows Vista or higher host computer ActiveSync and Windows Mobile Device Center for the host computer is available from the Microsoft website Follow their instructions to locate download and install ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center on your computer Note For readability in this section ActiveSync will be used in instructions and explanations If you have a Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on your desktop laptop replace ActiveSync with Windows Mobile Device Center Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can synchronize information on your desktop computer with the MX9 and vice versa Synchronization compares the data on your mobile device with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data For example you can e Back up and restore your device data e Copy rather than synchronize files between your device and desktop computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize command By default ActiveSync does not automatically sync
196. erve this warning may result in injury from inhalation of vapors or burns from flying debris Do not immerse Li lon batteries in water or any other liquid If batteries are immersed contact Honeywell Do not disassemble or perform modifications to the battery There are no user serviceable components in the battery Do not place the Li lon battery into a pocket or toolbox with conductive objects coins keys tools etc A Li lon battery placed on damp ground or grass could be electrically shorted Do not store Li lon batteries above 140 F 60 C for extended periods Sob to observe these warnings could result in injury or damage to the battery from rapid discharge of energy or battery overheating Electrolyte Burns Be careful when handling batteries If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not attempt to charge it Dispose of it Lead and Nickel based cells contain a chemical solution that burns skin eyes etc Leakage from cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur In this event rinse the affected area thoroughly with water If the solution contacts the eyes get immediate medical attention Electrical Burns Batteries are capable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry metal surfaces conductive tools etc making the objects very hot Never place a charged battery in a pocket or case with keys coins or other metal objects 12 2
197. erver can be disabled until needed refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details Menu Options Note Your MX9 screen display may not be exactly as shown in the following menu options Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for version information and upgrade availability Connection Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server Set the order in which serial ports or RF connections are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device Server Execution Not available in this release Use AppLock page 6 1 instead which is resident on each Windows device Server Contact Setup synchronization scheduled Mobile Device Server contact suspend and reboot settings Data Control when data is transferred between the device and the Mobile Device Server Preferences Set options for Enabler startup or shutdown and logging Replaces Startup Shutdown tab in some Enabler versions Taskbar Set options for Taskbar Scan Config This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special bar code that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center console Scan Config not currently supported Display Set up the Windows display at startup on connect and during normal mode The settings can be adjusted by the user Shortcuts Add delete and update shortcuts to user allowable applications SaaS Configure the Enabler to connect with Avalanche on Demand Adapters Enable or disable ne
198. es located in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide Engine specific bar codes for integrated scanners are contained in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide They can be used to set or reset scan engine parameters by scanning a bar code then saving the change Symbol scan engines can be programmed using programming bar codes Do not scan decoder engine configuration bar codes when Continuous Scan Mode page 8 4 is on Configuration bar codes do not decode when scanned while Continuous Scan Mode is On Data Processing Overview Bar code data processing involves several steps Some steps may be skipped during the processing depending on user selections on the Symbology Settings panels The steps are presented below in the order they are performed on the scanned data 1 Scanned data is tested for a code ID and length Min Max If it matches it is processed per the rules in place for that sym bology If the scan does not meet the criteria for that symbology it is processed based on the settings for All If a code ID is not found the bar code data is processed based on the settings for All If the symbology is disabled the scan is rejected Strip leading data bytes unconditionally Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally Parse for and strip if found Data Options strings Replace any control characters with string as configured Add prefix string to output buffer AN DA FW PY If Code ID is not stripped
199. eseaeeeseeeessaeeesenaeeetaas 5 73 Synchronizing from the Mobile Device sessseesseeeseeesresteseirteittrintstintttinstnnnstnnnrnnsnnnennnstn 5 74 Explorer eegene eege CO ee eee eu a iat cee ete EE eeh coer ed Eeer DEENEN 5 74 Backup Data Files using Acthvefvnc 5 74 Serial Port Transfer irrino erian eta eaa de bel echdcnesneliiestitens EENS an de 5 74 ET CR EE 5 74 CONNEC EE 5 74 DISCOMMOCK E EE 5 74 USB Gonnection isana noei Sie ee eee EEN 5 74 Serial Connection sania tere tet adele os apad raakh eadi arpio eee ene 5 75 Network Connection 000 cece iiiaio ier bane EEN aawa daie Eeer 5 75 ActiveSyne Help EE 5 75 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection ceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeteaeeeeeaaeeseaaeeesaeeennees 5 76 Configuring the MX9 with HSM Connect or LvEConnech 5 77 Installing HSM Connect or LXEConnect 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeecaeeeteaeeeseaeeeeenaeessaaes 5 77 Using HSM Connect or LXEConnect 00 0 cceeeeeceeceneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseaeeeseaeeseaeesssaeeennaees 5 77 Chapter 6 AppLock IntrOduCtiON tiie cai ed bee hte ME ee ene need i enen ie nit eel 6 1 Setup a New Device A 6 1 Administration MOd6 2ecccecsesavceeeeeeceees eedaiee NEE a A Ea NEEN dhe needed R teeny eset 6 2 End WSO MOG EE 6 2 Passwords EE 6 3 AppLock Password Help 6 3 End User Switching Technioue 6 3 USING aStyl s Tap EE Gaetan aretha ale 6 3 Using the Switch Key Sequence sssseesee
200. esktop computer screen Using the stylus to tap icons on the touch screen is the basic action that can e Open applications e Choose menu commands e Select options in dialog boxes or drop down boxes e Drag the slider in a scroll bar e Select text by dragging the stylus across the text e Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data e Place the cursor in a text box prior to retrieving data using a scanner imager or an input output device connected to a serial port A right click can be simulated by touching the touch screen with the stylus and holding it for a short time A stylus replacement kit is available Calibrating the Touch Screen If the touch screen is not responding properly to stylus taps you may need to recalibrate the touch screen Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center and then lift the stylus To recalibrate the screen select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Stylus gt Calibration tab To begin tap the Recalibrate button on the screen with the stylus Follow the instructions on the screen Adjusting the Display Backlight Brightness When the display backlight is on press the Blue key and then press either Scan key e Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust backlight brightness until the display lightens or darkens to your satisfaction e Press any key except the up arrow or down ar
201. ess adjust mode is entered by pressing the Blue Scan key combination After this the up and down arrow keys brighten or dim the backlight Pressing any key other than up arrow or down arrow exits the brightness adjustment mode Additional characteristics e There is no separate brightness level indication except for the actual brightness of the display e Once the maximum or minimum brightness is reached by repeated presses of the up or down key the display will cease getting brighter or dimmer and saturate at that maximum or minimum brightness e Continuously pressing the up or down arrow keys does not cause an automatic repeat of the up or down arrow key e The brightness setting is stored in the registry and is recalled at power on e The number of steps from maximum brightness to minimum dimness is five At minimum dimness level the display is still viewable Input Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input Panel Set the current MX9 keys and data input method Default Keyboard Enabled Setting Input Method Allow applications to change input panel state Options button Small keys Disabled Use gestures Input Panel Properties Sei Ki Input Panel Current input method Keyboard v ay Allow applications to change the input panel state To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired metho
202. etwork running the Mobile Device Server After the MX9 is connected proceed to step 2 If itis desired to configure the radio using the Summit package add the configured package to the Wavelink Avalanche MC Console and enable it Verify RMU CE CAB exists in the System RMU folder Double click the MX9 enabler CAB file in the System folder The enabler automatically launches after installation and contacts the Mobile Device Server The Avalanche MC Console connected to that Mobile Device Server identifies the remote device and performs a sync This downloads any available packages available for the MX9 Using eXpress Scan Eug eXpress Scan Desktop Icon If the MX9 has an eXpress Scan icon on the desktop eXpress Scan may be used for the initial configuration of the device If the eXpress Scan icon is not present on the desktop install the Enabler If the icon is still not present the Enabler must be updated If the eXpress Scan icon is present follow these steps to configure the MX9 to connect with the wireless network and the Mobile Device Server Creating Bar Codes Barcodes are created with the eXpress Config utility on the desktop laptop computer not the mobile device Depending on the bar code length and the number of parameters selected eXpress Config generates one or more bar codes for device configuration The bar codes contain configuration parameters for the wireless client in the mobile device and may also sp
203. events them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar This error does not affect AppLock processing AppLock could not remove the hook that allows monitoring of the application In administration mode the taskbar should return to normal operation so AppLock s control of the taskbar should be removed When the administrator leaves user mode the device is fully operational therefore AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application Processing the backdoor entry Return value from password dialog Length of decrypted password This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the window size The window handle that is passed to the enumeration function This message can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot application lock failures Output the window size after it has been adjusted by AppLock Level LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_EX Introduction Bluetooth Configuration Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for upgrade availability if your Bluetooth panels are no
204. evice touch screen If the glass becomes soiled or smudged clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol Dampen the cloth with the cleaner and then wipe the surface Do not use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface Use a clean damp lint free cloth Do not scrub optical surfaces If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint and particulates can be removed with clean filtered canned air Startup Help Issue Can t change the date time or adjust the volume Solution AppLock is installed and may be running in User Mode on the MX9 AppLock user mode restricts access to the control pan els Issue Touch screen is not accepting stylus taps or needs recalibration Solution Press Ctrl Esc to force the Start Menu to appear Use the tab backtab and arrow keys to move the cursor from element to element Press Enter to open folders or start a program e g Registry panel Warmboot button Issue MX9 seems to lockup as soon as it is rebooted Solution There may be slight delays while the wireless client connects to the network authorization for voice enabled applications complete and Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish When the desktop appears or an application begins the MX9 is ready for use Issue New MX9 main batteries don t last more than a few hours Solution N
205. ew batteries must be fully charged prior to first use Li lon batteries like all batteries gradually lose their capacity over time in a linear fashion and never just stop working This is important to remember the MX9 is always on even when in the Suspend state and draws battery power at all times Issue Keep losing ActiveSync connection between my host computer and the MX9 Solution Disconnect the USB cable from the host wait 1 2 seconds and reconnect the cable The MX9 should not enter Suspend as long as an ActiveSync session is running Hardware Configuration 802 11 b g and a b g Wireless Client The MX9 has an 802 11x network card that supports diversity with two internal antennas The CPU board does not allow hot swapping the network card WEP WPA and LEAP are supported Central Processing Unit The CPU is a 806 MHz Marvell PXA 320 CPU The OS image is stored in on board flash memory The MX9 supports the following I O components of the core logic e One serial port DTE with appropriate power for a WAN radio e One serial port DTE for an integrated laser decoder with ring indicator RI e USB 1 1 Host capable with power 5V 500mA e One SSP port capable not implemented e One SDIO port for I O expansion capable e One SIM port for WAN e One serial port DTE for interface with GPS receiver chip e Non decoding imager System Memory The MX9 supports 128 MB on board RAM and 128 MB on board Flash
206. external scanner and then the rejection of scanned bar code data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data Length Based Bar Code Stripping Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two bar codes with the same symbology but with different discrete lengths This procedure is not applicable for bar codes with variable lengths falling between a maximum value and a mini mum value Example 1 e Anormal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired bar code ID e Next a custom bar code symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings Example 2 For the purposes of this example the following sample bar code parameters will be used EAN 128 and Code 128 bar codes Some of the bar codes start with 00 and some start with 01 The bar codes are different lengths e 34 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 18 e 26 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 10 e 24 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 8 This 24 character bar code is Code 128 e 20 character length with first two characters 00 strip first O no characters and last 4 1 On the Data Options tab set Enable Code ID to AIM 2 Create four custom IDs using 1 for EAN 128 bar code and 0 for Code 128 bar code e c1
207. ey keypad only e Bluetooth Status LED applies to Bluetooth client functions System Status LED Blinking Red Solid Red Yellow Amber Battery power fail critical suspend Main battery low Initial few seconds when Power key is pressed Battery Charging Status LED Off No battery no AC power battery pack not plugged in or no AC power applied Flashing Red Fault battery pack fault or failure Yellow Amber Standby battery pack temperature out of range Red Charging battery pack charging icon on touch screen Green Charged battery pack fully charged Connected to external power Alpha mode Status LED Green when in alpha mode 38 key keypad only Bluetooth Status LED Blinking slowly Bluetooth is active but not connected to a device Blinking medium Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Blinking fast Bluetooth is discovering other Bluetooth devices Unit Bluetooth hardware has been turned off or does not exist in the MX9 Scanner Status LED The integrated scanner and imager Scan Status LED is centered below the MX9 keypad next to the Power button e Steady green indicates a good scan e Steady red indicates a scan is in progress e Steady yellow amber indicates parameter changes are being written to the integrated scanner imager engine The Scan Status LED illuminates when a Scan button on the MX9 is depressed scan in progress or the trigger on the at
208. f you are logged in as an Admin tap an SSID in the list then tap the Configure button You return to the Profile window to recreate a profile for that SSID with the profile name being the same as the SSID or the SSID with a suffix such as 1 if a profile with the SSID as its name already exists If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID the list displays the AP with the strongest RSSI and the least security ssp RST Secure Net4 47 true Net2 48 true Her 51 true Net3 51 false Note Unsaved Changes The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not tapped before an attempt is made to close or browse away from this tab 10 7 Profile Parameters Parameter Edit Profile SSID Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate Auth Type EAP Type Encryption Default Default Blank Blank Fast Maximum Auto None Explanation A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters establishes the name of the Profile Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Establishes the Service Set Identifier SSID of the WLAN to which the client connects A string of up to 16 characters The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card The client name may be passed to networking wireless devices e g Access Points Power save mode is On Options are Constantly Awake Mode CAM p
209. file to the remote device The remote device prompts the user for a 4 digit PIN User enters the PIN The MX9 prompts the user for a 4 digit PIN User must enter the same PIN code as entered on the remote device o o 4 Oa KR o D The MX9 now pairs with the remote device Remote Device Pushes File to MX9 This section assumes that a device supporting OPP is paired with the MX9 If a duplicate filename is received EZPair or LXEZ Pairing writes the file in the specified location with an incremental number appended to the file name For example if a file named file jpg is pushed to the MX9 and that filename already exists in the Inbox EZPair saves the new file as file001 jpg If the same file is pushed again it is saved as file002 jpg Following are several scenarios based on configuration options on the OPP Setup tab Notifications enabled MX9 is Write Capable 1 The OPP client initiates a connection to the MX9 by selecting a file to push to the MX9 2 The MX9 user is notified that a File Push request has been issued from a remote device 3 The MX9 user is prompted to accept or reject the incoming request 4 If the user accepts the request e The file is pushed to the Mag e EZPair notifies the user that a file has been received e The connection is closed by the remote device OPP client 5 If the user rejects the request e The file is not pushed to the MX9 e The connection is closed Notifications enabled
210. flush and then a restart Remove Programs Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Remove Programs Note Lists programs installed in RAM that have been marked for removal Select a program and tap Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall MX9 user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately Files in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option Remove Programs ei OK E Remove Programs To remove a program select it and then press Remove AppLock Bluetooth LXEZPAIRING v1 0 Data Collection Wedge SDC Summit WLAN Adapter Wavelink TelnetCE 7340 Remove Note Do not remove Honeywell installed programs using this option Contact Technical Assistance for help if Honeywell installed programs must be deleted Stylus Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Stylus Use this control panel option to set stylus double tap sensitivity properties and calibrate the MX9 touch panel when needed fof x Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration Zo Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Double Tap Tab responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your s
211. further use Enable Disable Radio button Tap the Enable Radio button to turn the radio On or Off If the radio is currently enabled the button is labeled Disable Radio If the radio is currently disabled the button is labeled Enable Radio 5 70 About Tab The About tab displays information about the WWAN radio and the current network connection The About tab displays the SW Version FW Version and Serial Number of the radio if there is a WAN radio installed in the device the Local Phone Number shows the subscribers own number from the SIM card The current radio enable disable status is dis played The Carrier entry displays the carrier configuration of the SIM card In addition to the data shown in the dialog box below the SW Version is displayed as well The version matches the corresponding version in the Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt About gt Versions dialog box All fields in the About dialog box are read only This information is available to all users without requiring the configuration password wWwAN ERS 2 BOKD x Security Autaconnect Admin About dv WWAN Data Radio is Disabled Carrier Local Phone SW Version WANPIGSM1Af EW Version Serial Number ESN or IMEI Some of the information shown on this panel can be edited after logging in on previous panels e Enable Radio e Carrier Name e Local Phone Number Using ActiveSync Once a relationship partn
212. g No Activity Log No log file is written Critical Only critical errors written to the log files Error Communication or configuration problems are written to the log file along with critical messages Warning Possible operation problems are written to the log file along with critical and error messages Info Operational information is written to the log file Debug The most detailed log file Display Level Use this option to control the level of detail shown on the main Enabler screen The default is Basic Output Basic Output General information is displayed Critical Critical errors are displayed in addition to those above Error Communication or configuration problems are displayed in addition to those above Warning Possible operation problems are displayed in addition to those above Info Operational information is displayed in addition to those above Debug The most detailed list is displayed Taskbar For best results use AppLock page 6 1 to manage the taskbar AppLock is resident on each mobile device Avalanche Update Settings Ki E Taskbar Execution Scan Config d Note These settings are only applied to the taskbar if the Enabler UI is active Display State Normal Hidden Locked Settings No Relevant Settings The Display State options control the appearance of the taskbar while using the Enabler interface e Normal taskbar is visible taskbar ico
213. g or removing the MX9 with the other hand The MX9 is inserted into the charging pocket with the keypad facing forward Dock the Mx9 Remove any cables attached to the I O port in the base of the MX9 Carefully press the MX9 straight down into the docking bay until the multi pin connector at the base of the MX9 clicks into place with the multi pin charging communication connector at the bottom of the docking bay The MX9 cradle is designed to secure the MX9 facing front The cradle s Docked LED illuminates Undock the MX9 Remove the MX9 from the cradle by pulling it straight up and out of the docking bay If necessary brace the cradle with one hand while the other hand removes the MX9 The cradle s Docked LED turns Off Inserting Removing a Spare Battery from the Desktop Cradle Prerequisites The steps outlined in Assemble Attach the AC Power Adapter page 13 6 have been completed and the cra dle has a dependable power source The cradle has been bolted to a stable surface if desired Note Do not drop or slam the spare battery into the charging pocket Damage may result 13 8 A fully depleted spare battery recharges in approximately four hours in the MX9 powered cradle Charging time may take longer if a tethered scanner connected to the Serial port and drawing power from the cradle is used The spare battery charger can recover a battery that has had its safety circuit tripped The spare battery well is molded in th
214. ger has timed out Solid YELLOW AMBER LED when The battery pack is too hot or too Remove battery pack from the charging battery pack is inserted in the charging cold to charge pocket and allow it to adjust to room pocket temperature Note If the battery pack is left in the charging pocket it will cool down or warm to a temperature upon which the charger will begin the charge cycle However depending on the temperature of the battery it may take 2 3 hours to adjust The cool down warm up of a battery pack is much quicker if the battery is not in the charging pocket Charger Cleaning Storage and Service Cleaning Unplug the charger from the power source before cleaning or removing debris from charging pockets Use only mild detergent with a slightly damp cloth to clean the outside of the charger Do not use solvents or flammable cleaners Allow the case to dry fully before using again Do not allow cleaning agents of any kind to contact the charging contacts they may be damaged If necessary clean them with a soft bristle dry brush or compressed air Storage Remove all batteries from the charging bays and disconnect AC power before placing the charger in storage It should be stored in a cool dry place protected from weather and airborne debris Battery packs should be kept in a cool dry place whenever possible Do not store battery packs in direct sunlight on a metal surface or anywhere the battery pac
215. gure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus When the user taps the Switchpad icon with the stylus a menu pops up listing the applications available to the user The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is brought to the foreground The previ ous application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only When the user needs to use the Input Panel they tap the Keyboard option Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only Rebooting the Mx9 When the Desktop Start screen is displayed or an application begins the power up sequence is complete If you have previously saved your settings they will be restored on reboot Application panel changes are saved when OK is tapped on an application properties panel During the process that follows there may be small delays while MX9 wireless clients connect to the network and Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish Warmboot A warmboot reboots the MX9 without erasing any registry data Applications and data in RAM are preserved during a warmboot All registry configurations are automatically preserved Any applications stored as CAB files in the System folder and configured in the Registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the Launch utility Use the Registry control panel Warmboot button Restart or Cold Boot
216. h time the volume increases or decreases Volume must be enabled when you want to adjust volume settings using keypad keys Setting Default Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Disabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Disabled Screen tap Disabled Sounds Scheme LOUD Volume amp Sounds Pro fa OK E volume Sounds Volume amp Sounds Pro fa Ki E Volume Sounds El eg oe lel Soft Loud Enable sounds for M Events warnings system events M Applications T Notifications alarms reminders Key clicks Loud Soft Loud Screen taps Soft Event Windows CE it Asterisk Close Program gt Critical Stop Default Sound Empty Recycle Bin Gi Exclamation Sound Preview None 7 Scheme gt The volume setting is stored in the registry and is recalled at power on Note Rejected bar codes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from a tethered scanner and then the rejection of scanned bar code data by the bar code processing causes a bad scan beep from the mobile device on the same data Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows directory as SCANGOOD WAV and SCANBAD WAV These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the user s choice By default a go
217. harge While the MX9 is in a hazardous location DO NOT e Connect an external power source to the MX9 e Connect a USB device or audio jack to the MX9 e Connect the Car Power Adapter to the I O connector at the base of the MX9 e Remove or install a battery pack in the MX9 Hardware Setup 1 Connect accessories e g hand strap if necessary trigger handle etc 2 Provide a power source e Insert a fully charged main battery e Connect a power cable USB Power or Serial Power e Place the MX9 in a powered desktop or vehicle mounted cradle 3 Press the Power key Software Setup Hardware setup should be completed before starting software setup 1 Oo AN DO a F Go DN Calibrate touch display Set Date and Time Zone Set Power Timers Set Speaker Volume Pair Bluetooth devices Set Wireless client parameters Set terminal emulation parameters Set AppLock parameters Set DCWedge parameters Components Front View Microphone Touch screen Speaker Scan buttons Enter key Scanner status LED Power key NOOR OD The above list is the same on the 38 key Mx9 Special keys are listed on the following pages 62 Key Keypad DD JO OS WD Function Keys Backspace BS key and Space SPC key Escape ESC key Power key Tab key Alt key Control CTL key Orange key 9 Blue key 10 Shift SHFT
218. has not been configured the Administrator panel is displayed Important Before setting up multiple instances of the same application make sure the targeted software application will allow two instances to run at the same time Application Panel Title Order Administrator Control Fra Ki ES Application Security DD Filename el Arguments lo Icon ed _ Interne Menu V Status Launch or Global Key EES sl v Input Panel APLCKPNET2Cn Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End user Mode If no application is specified when the Administrator Panel is closed the MX9 reboots into Administrator mode If a pass word has been set but an application has not been specified the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered Option Filename Title Arguments Order Explanation Default is blank Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK Default is blank Enter the Title to be associated with the application The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique titles in order to differ
219. he Power key e Incoming data through the scanner port e Touch screen tap e Unit docked in powered cradle e Trigger pull e Incoming Bluetooth connection or data on the virtual COM port e Connection of USB Device to host port Note The scanner port is defined as a software SW port Any hardware HW device that sends data to the software SW defined scanner port will transition the unit from User Idle to On The following events DO NOT wake the unit from the User Idle state or reset the timers e COM1 CTS e Serial connection e USB client connection to a host PC e Power key press transitions to Suspend Example Bluetooth Voice will not transition the unit from User Idle to On Bluetooth Scan data will transition the unit to On as it sends the data to the scanner port System Idle After transitioning to the User Idle power state the timer is started for the transition to System Idle When this timer expires without any further user activity the keypad backlight if enabled is turned off and the display is turned off Only interrupts classified as System Activity events will wake the unit from System Idle to User Idle Any activity classified as User Activity will transition from System Idle to On System Idle timers are set using Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power gt Schemes tab The following System Activity events DO transition theMX9 from the System Idle state to User Idle state Note These items are not
220. he Wireless Zero Config utility E Bluetooth Connected Disconnected Tapping the icon opens the Bluetooth control panel Ba ActiveSync Connection D Cerdisp connected displayed when HSM Connect or LXEConnect is connected E il Summit Client signal indicator No signal Excellent signal Tapping on the icon opens the Summit Client Utility Battery charge indicator Percent of battery charge is indicated g f External power connected 9 01 PM Current time Tapping the time display opens the Date Time control panel Tap this icon to return to the Desktop E A AppLock switchpad r Ge By Input method Keyboard Input panel Transcriber al CapsLock active P No modifier key is in focus Py Orange modifier key active 2 Blue modifier key active 2 Shift modifier key active Multiple modifier keys active Shift plus Orange Upgrading the Operating System Introduction Depending on the size of the operating system the total time required for a successful upgrade may require several min utes The OS upgrade files are unique to your MX9 physical configuration and date of manufacture OS upgrade files designed for one device configuration should not be used on a different device configuration Updates and Language Options Same Language to Same Language During the upgrade process all settings revert to factory defaults Parameters will need to be changed from factory defaults to your preferred value
221. he back of the cradle Test cable connections for stability Connecting a Serial Cable The serial cable is connected to the Serial port 3 on the back of the desktop cradle The serial cable end can origi nate with a tethered scanner a desktop laptop PC a printer or another serial device Align the RS232 serial cable end female carefully to the Serial Interface port male on the back of the desktop cradle Press the ends together and finger tighten the screws on either side of the connector Test the connection for stability Connecting an Ethernet RJ 45 Cable Firmly press the cradle end into the MX9 Ethernet RJ 45 port 4 connector on the back of the cradle until it clicks into place Test the connection for stability Connecting a USB Host and USB Client Cable Firmly press the cable end into the MX9 USB Client 5 or USB Host 6 Port connector on the back of the cradle Test the connections for stability Cradle LEDs When the desktop cradle AC DC power supply cable begins to supply power to the cradle the cradle LEDs flash yellow red green for three seconds then turn off The cradle is ready for use MA SPARE DOCKED RED CHARGING GREEN READY YELLOW STANDBY FLASHING FAULT Docked LED When Docked LED is It means Off MX9 not inserted or no power applied Red MX9 docked and power applied Note The cradle must be connected to a AC power before the LEDs illuminate 13 7 Spare
222. he vehicle cradle Do not stretch the cable Leave enough slack in the cable to allow the cable to be connected and disconnected from the MX9 easily when needed 4 Continue in this manner until all cables are secured to the back of the vehicle cradle 13 23 Vehicle Cradle LED The cradle LED is located at the front center of the vehicle cradle When Cradle LED is It means MX9 is docked Cradle does not have power MX 9 is not docked Cradle may have power Check the power connection at the back of the cradle No power applied to the cradle Off MX9 is docked and external power is connected Green Docking the MX9 in a Vehicle Mounted Cradle Note Do not put the MX9 into the vehicle cradle until the cradle is securely fastened to the vehicle 1 The MX9 is docked in the vehicle cradle by sliding the base of the MX9 down into the cradle docking bay until the con nector at the base of the MX9 clicks into place with the charging communication connector at the bottom of the docking bay 2 If the cradle is connected to a power source the Docked LED illuminates 3 Firmly press the MX9 backwards until the MX9 mates with the pins and the release mechanisms snap forward securing the MX9 in the vehicle cradle Do not slam the MX9 into the cradle pocket Damage to the cradle and MX9 components may occur If the vehicle cradle or MX9 is damaged it must be removed from service and repaired bef
223. hed using a Summit WLAN 802 11 radio WWAN and Bluetooth Desk and vehicle cradles a trigger handle or hand strap holsters with shoulder straps or belts clear covers for cases and holsters Bluetooth scanners and printer standard and low temperature batteries and battery chargers are among the many accessories available for the MX9 About this Guide This MX9 User s Guide provides instruction for the system administrator to follow when configuring a MX9 with a Microsoft Windows CE 5 operating system Also included are setup and use instructions for the MX9 Battery Charger Desktop Cradle and Powered Vehicle Mounted Cradle Out of the Box After you open the shipping carton verify it contains the following items e Mao Hand Held Computer e Rechargeable battery e Hand Strap attached to the MX9 e Quick Start Guide If you ordered accessories for the MX9 verify they are also included with the order Keep the original packaging material in the event the MX9 should need to be returned for service For details see Product Service and Repair page 15 1 Initial Setup for MX9 Following are steps you might take when setting up a new MX9 Follow the links for further instruction for each step Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 if you need additional help Note Installing or removing accessories should be performed on a clean well lit surface When necessary protect the work surface the MX9 and components from electrostatic disc
224. hile connected CH 1 Connect to Input Output port on kat MX9 SE d 2 Insert A C adapter cable 3 Connect to host USB port m Serial Connection The connection type must be changed to Serial 1 57600 To change the connection type select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection Tap the Change button From the popup list choose Serial 1 57600 This will set up the mobile device to use the serial port Tap OK and ensure the check box for Allow connection with desk top computer when device is attached is checked Tap OK to return to the Control Panel If desired any control panel windows may be closed Select Start gt Settings gt Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is NOT the same as the ActiveSync port Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the mobile device the client Select Connect from the Start Menu on the client Start gt Programs gt Communications gt Connect Note Run Connect when the Get Connected wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection MX9055CABLE MX9 Serial Cable Assembly ActiveSync connection e Connect the I O connector to the I O port on the bottom of the MX9 e The serial port on the MX9 cable connects to a COM port on a PC or laptop e Itis not necessary to connect the power receptac
225. his equipment FCC 5GHz Statement LAN devices are restricted to indoor use only in the band 5150 5250 MHz For the band 5600 5650 MHz no operation is permitted When using IEEE 802 11a wireless LAN this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5 15 to 5 25 GHz Frequency range The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5 15 GHz to 5 25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co channel mobile satellite systems High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5 25 to 5 35 GHz and 5 65 to 5 85 GHz bands These radar stations can cause interference with and or damage to this device Canadian Compliance This ISM device complies with Canadian RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 CE Mark The CE marking indicates compliance with the following directives e 1995 5 EC R amp TTE e 2011 65 EU RoHS Recast In addition complies to 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive when shipped with recommended power supply European contact Hand Held Products Europe BV Nijverheidsweg 9 13 5627 BT Eindhoven The Netherlands Honeywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment i e power supplies
226. hows the device is associ ated after the radio connects to the network Generate a Root CA certificate or a User certificate 10 32 WPA PSK To connect using WPA PSK make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 4 Set Auth Type to Open Taam 7 AOK X Man Profile Status Diags Global Edit betat sl a Profile Default SDC Radio apo 1 Encryption EAP Type wpa PSK x None WEP keysjPsks 5 Tap the WEP keys PSKs button PSK Entry For Passphrase enter 8 63 chars For PSK enter 64 Hex chars 6 This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value Enter the key and tap OK 7 Once configured tap the Commit button 8 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 33 Certificates Note Refer to the Security Primer available at www honeywellaidc com to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for communication Note It is important that all dates are correct on the MX9 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail Root Certificates are necessary for EAP TLS PEAP GTC and PE
227. hronize all types of information Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize The synchronization process makes the data in the information types you select identical on both your desktop computer and your device When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes e connect your device to your desktop computer e setup a partnership so you can synchronize information between your device and your desktop computer and e customize your synchronization settings Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help Note Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for upgrade availability if your application or control panels are not the same as the application or control panels presented in this chapter MX9 without Touch Screen The MXQ touch screen can be disabled It may be easier to configure the MX9 using ActiveSync and HSM Connect or LXEConnect rather than using the MX9 keyboard only Initial Setup The initial setup of ActiveSync must be made via a USB or serial connection When there is a Connect icon on the desktop this section can be bypassed Partnerships can
228. ials screen and tap the OK button Tap the Commit button For LEAP and WPA LEAP configuration is complete For PEAP MSCHAP and PEAP GTC importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional For EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store check boxes are enabled The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning input the PAC filename and password Tap the OK button then the Commit button If changes are made to the stored credentials tap Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used Note See Configuring Profiles page 10 21 for more details Note If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials the authentication will fail No error message is
229. icate link File Download Security Warning 7 Click the Save button and save the certificate Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate 10 36 8 Install the certificate on the MX9 Installing a Root CA Certificate Note This section is only if the Windows certificate store is used If the certificate store is not used copy the certificate to the System folder or other path specified in the Summit Certs global parameter Copy the certificate file to the MX9 Import the certificate by navigating to Start gt Control Panel gt Certificates Certificates El OK ES Stores Trusted Authorities x Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 2 Public Prin PY Class 3 Public Prim Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root Gel 9 Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key Ki ES From a File From a Smart Card Reader Card Absent 10 Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK 10 37 Select a Cer GJ My Documents 3 Shortcut to Office Templates ja euser Name Type Certificates 11 Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK Root Certificate Store ES Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject doe SUPPORT LOCAL Issuer mickey LOCAL Time Validity Thursday July 01
230. ices Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL 3 Click the Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL link 4 Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box 10 35 Microsoft Certificate Services Download a CA Certificate Certificate Chain or CRL To trust certificates issued from this certification authority install this CA certificate chain To download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL select the certificate and encoding method CA certificate Encoding method DER C Base 64 Download CA certificate Download CA certificate chain Download latest base CRL Download latest delta CRL 5 Click the DER button 6 To download the CA certificate click on the Download CA certif
231. ices that reset the power state are not active Battery Power Scheme Use this option when the MX9 will be running on battery power only Switch state to User Idle Default is After 3 seconds Switch state to System Idle Default is After 15 seconds Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes AC Power Scheme Use this option when the MX9 will be running on external power eg connected to an A C power source Switch state to User Idle Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to System Idle Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes The timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Sus pend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the MX9 in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the MX9 is idle Using the Battery Power Scheme Defaults listed above the cumulative effect results in the following e The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity e The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15 seconds 3 seconds e And the MX9 enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity Setting Speaker Volume The speaker is located on the front of the MX9 between the Scan keys and underneath the LEDs Speaker volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the lis
232. iii iaaii diaaa t 5 27 ee re tec aana E EE 5 30 KeyMap EE 5 31 Key Map RE EE 5 32 Remap a Single EE 5 32 Remap a Key to a Unicode Value A 5 32 Remap a Key Sequence 0 ecccccccececeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeecaaeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeseneeeeneaeeee 5 32 Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values sssseseeesseeeseeesreesreeirterrrsrrneernse 5 33 Remap an Application sossissianrerii annarri iaeaea sara AREER RENE E enaA Eaa 5 33 Remap a Commande 5 33 LaunchApp NET WEE 5 34 RunCmid E Le DEE 5 35 License Viewer et EEN EES ech ai hen cet een poe ease DEn ENEE EEN 5 36 lt 5 37 Output TEE 5 37 Input Panels aati ere eA Oe cana eat cane eee ee E hee Mee 5 38 le 5 38 MAO Options EE 5 39 Communication Tab WEE 5 39 MISC TA aosan Seege Es atta EE e 5 40 Status POPUP Tabs ovis aoi or ie an ie EEN UE dE Ee SEENEN dee 5 41 Network and Dialup Options 00 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaaeeesaeeseaeeeseaeeeeaes 5 42 Creating a New Connechon 5 42 Network Captures aeoea a ienai sts tants aera eaa e de ties Mactan ttt eens atte ane ate 5 43 Netlog WE BEE 5 43 KIIRCH 5 45 WEE een cenit las ces Ace aed ees ence ete Aa ished based eed ee 5 46 PASSWOlG E 5 48 PG Copnpnechlopn eg uggdkeureg NEE celery vei ev a e E ae ies Gate i i aa Eea ira yee 5 49 ST ONE 5 50 Heaters RT BEE 5 50 Flashilighit E EEN 5 51 GPS Tab EE 5 51 POWO orrat ege ere EES Ee 5 52 Regional and Language Settings
233. ility Note When making changes to profile or global parameters tap the power key to place the MX9 in Suspend When the Mx9 resumes from suspend the parameters are applied The MX9 can be resumed by tapping the power key or the touch screen or by pressing any key Select the Summit Client Utility using the Start button or tap the Summit Tray Icon if present The Main Tab page 10 3 provides information admin login and active profile selection Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile Tab page 10 6 The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile The Status Tab page 10 10 contains information on the current connection The Diags Tab page 10 11 provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio Global parameters are found on the Global Tab page 10 12 The values for these parameters apply to all profiles Help Help is available by clicking the icon in the title bar on most Summit Client Utility SCU screens Help may also be accessed by selecting Start gt Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link The SCU does not have to be accessed to view the help information using this option 10 1 Summit Tray Icon iil The Summit tray icon provides access to the SCU and is a visual indicator of radio status The Summit tray icon is displayed when e The Summit radio is installed and active e The Windows Zero Config utility is not active e The Tray Icon setting is On Tap the icon to
234. in determining whether the battery pack or the charger may be malfunctioning Issue Battery pack does not fit in charging pocket No battery pack in charger but any of the LEDs are on Charger is plugged into a live outlet battery pack is inserted but RED LED is OFF and no other LEDs are on or all LEDs are off Charger is plugged into a live outlet battery pack is inserted but RED LED is OFF and no other LEDs are on or all LEDs are off Charger is plugged into a live outlet battery pack is inserted but RED LED is OFF and no other LEDs are on or all LEDs are off When you first put a fully charged battery pack in the charging pocket the RED LED comes on indicating the battery pack is charging LED is flashing RED at any pocket LED is flashing RED at any pocket Cause Different manufacturer s battery pack or there is an object in the charging pocket Dirt or foreign objects are in the charging pocket Battery pack is not making contact with battery charge terminals in the charging pocket Faulty battery pack New battery pack same result During the first few minutes the battery charger checks the battery pack for correct voltage and charge state During this time the LED is RED and is continuously ON After charging is complete the LED is GREEN Current could not be sourced through the battery pack due to age exhaustion or damage to the cell s The battery pack does not com
235. in the charging pocket is replaced by an incorrect type Other batteries or battery packs may burst causing injury or property damage Do not insert any other type of Li lon battery in the MX9 battery charging pocket Do not allow cleaning agents of any kind to contact the battery charging contacts they may be damaged If necessary clean them with a soft bristle dry brush or compressed air Disconnect the charger from AC power by pulling the plug not the cord Use care when inserting battery Do not slam or slide the battery into the pocket this could damage the charger Keep dirt and foreign objects out of the battery pocket Do not short circuit any of the contacts in the battery pocket this could result in injury or property damage Do not disassemble or perform modifications to the charger There are no user serviceable components in the charger Lithium lon Battery Pack Dispose of used Li lon batteries according to the instructions for the type of battery When not in use lay the battery pack contact side up in a protected environment Do not store the Li lon battery pack in direct sunlight or anywhere the battery pack cannot cool down If the Li lon battery pack is hot after removal from the MX9 allow it to cool at room temperature or in a cool air stream before placing it in the charger Do not dispose of Li lon batteries into a fire Burning will generate hazardous vapors and may cause the battery to explode Failure to obs
236. include hat encoded or hex encoded values In key message mode control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences Control Character Ki E Translate All Control Character Replacement Character NULI iv Replacement Ignore drop Assign Delete Translate All When Translate All is checked unprintable ASCII characters characters below 20H in scanned bar codes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the bar codes are sent in Character mode The wedge provides a one to one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control character sequence of keystrokes If control characters are translated the translation is performed on the bar code data prefix and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode on the Main tab selected In Key Message mode when this option is enabled control characters embedded in a scanned bar code are translated to their equivalent control key keystroke sequence 13 0x0d is translated to Control M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL SHIFT and m keys on the keypad Additionally when Translate All is disabled any control code which has a keystroke equivalent enter tab escape backspace etc is output as a keystroke Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the
237. ing each boot Select Auto Execute App The drop down box provides a list of applications that have been installed with the Avalanche Management System Delay before execution Time delay before launching Auto Execute application Server Contact Avalanche Update Settings OK A Server Contact Preferences Disp a gt Sync clock Contact V on startup On IP Change On resume on ext power Periodic Update _ Reboot before attempt _ Require external power _ Use relative offset Note Your MX9 screen display may not be exactly as shown above Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for upgrade availability and version information Sync Clock Reset the time on the MX9 based on the time on the Mobile Device Server host PC Contact On Startup Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the Enabler is accessed On Resume Connect to the Mobile Device Server when resuming from Suspend mode On IP Change Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the IP address of the MX9 changes On Ext Power Initiate connection to the Mobile Device Server when the device is connected to an external power source such as based on a docking event Periodic Update Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server and query for updates at a regu lar interval beginning at a specific time Wakeup device if suspended If the time interval for periodic contact with
238. ings When enabled the Enabler will control the network settings This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is enabled by default Manage Wireless Settings When enabled the Enabler will control the wireless settings This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is disabled by default For Summit clients Manage Wireless Settings should not be checked as configuration packages provide more radio configuration options Current Adapter Lists all network adapters currently installed on the MX9 Primary Adapter Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter active only if there are multiple network adapt ers Icon on taskbar Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may optionally override the standard Windows taskbar Use Avalanche Network Profile The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Mobile Device Server Avalanche Icon Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network Profile tab which will display current network settings Use Manual Settings When enabled the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Avalanche MC Console and use only the network settings on the Mx9 Properties Icon Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet From here the user can configure Network DNS and Wireless parameters using the d
239. inserted into the battery compartment 3 Push down on the battery until the retaining clip clicks into place 4 Replace the hand strap clip in its holder if installed The MX9 draws power from the battery immediately upon successful connection Check battery status in the Battery control panel Remove Battery To remove the battery complete the following steps 1 Place the MX9 in Suspend mode 2 Detach the bottom hook of the hand strap if installed 3 Slide the battery retaining clip down to release the main battery 4 Pull the battery up and out of the battery well with a hinge motion 5 Place the discharged battery pack in a powered MX9 battery charger Insert Battery in HazLoc MX9 1 Detach the bottom hook of the hand strap if installed 2 Tilt the end with the terminals of the fully charged battery pack into the upper end of the battery compartment and firmly press the other end until it is seated into the battery compartment 3 Push down on the battery pack until it clicks into place 4 Place the tethered plastic locking tab over the battery latch matching up the screw holes in the MX9 body and the screw holes in the tethered plastic locking tab 5 Using a flat head screwdriver secure the battery in the battery well by securing the locking screws to the MX9 body 6 Replace the hand strap clip in its holder Remove Battery from HazLoc MX9 1 Place the MX9 in Suspend mode Detach the bottom hook
240. installed There are several warmboot methods available e Using the Registry control panel tap the Warmboot button The MX9 immediately warmboots e Using the Start menu select Start gt Run and type WARMBOOT in the text box Press Enter The MX9 immediately warmboots The WARMBOOT text command is not case sensitive The text typed in the text box can be upper or lower case or a combination of upper and lower case letters e Using the keypad press the Ctl key and release it press the Alt key and release it press the Del key combination and release it The MX9 immediately warmboots Clearing Persistent Storage Reset to Default Settings Use the Registry control panel Restart button to set the MX9 registry back to factory defaults No other clearing is available or necessary Folders Copied at Startup The following folders are created in the System folder they are copied at startup System Desktop copied to Windows Desktop System Favorites copied to Windows Favorites System Fonts copied to Windows Fonts System Help copied to Windows Help System Programs copied to Windows Programs AppMgr copied to Windows AppMgr Recent copied to Windows Recent This function copies only the folder contents no sub folders The Windows Startup folder is not copied on startup because copying this folder has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from Syste
241. ion in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system e Ifthe ToggleKeys option is selected note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do e If the SoundSentry option is selected note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do Accessibility Pei OK x D Keyboard Sound Display Mouse StickyKeys S StickyKeys are not Cmt supported on this system Use StickyKeys Settings ToggleKeys ES Use ToggleKeys if you C ok want to hear tones when t pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock _ Use ToggleKeys Tab Contents Keyboard Sticky Keys Disabled ToggleKeys Disabled by default Tap the Use ToggleKeys check box to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters Sound SoundSentry is disabled by default Tap the Use SoundSentry check box to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters Display High Contrast is disabled by default Tap the Use High Contrast check box to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters Mouse MouseKeys is disabled by default Tap the Use MouseKeys check box to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters General Automatic reset is disabled by default Tap the Turn off accessibility features check box to enable this option and use the drop down option to assign a
242. ion on the Switchpad menu When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled for each individual application and is available to the user for all configured applications Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application information The Global settings are not cleared Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively Launch Button When the Launch button is clicked it displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administra tion panel Application Launch Opt Ki EZ Launch V Auto At Boot Retries fo Delay fio V Auto Re launch Retries fo Delay fo Manual Allow Close Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential Auto At Boot Default is Enabled Auto At Boot When enabled automatically launches subject to the specified Delay in seconds the application after the unit is rebooted If a Delay in seconds is specified AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application The Delay default value is 10 seconds valid values are between 0 no delay and a maximum of 999 seconds Retries This is the number of times the a
243. ional and language settings Set the MX9 user inter face language and the default input language Setting Default Region Locale English United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 123 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd yyyy long Language User Interface English United States Input Language English United States US Installed English United States US Regional and Language se OK Fa Region Language input User Interface Language Regional and Language se OK fe Region Lanquage Input Your locale Engish United States x Appearance samples Time 5 39 00 AM Short date 1 8 2014 Long date Wednesday January 08 2014 Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 00 The option will determine the language used for the menus dialogs and alerts English United States Regional and Language RA OK ES Region Language Input Default Input Language Select the input language to use when you start your device English United States vU Installed Input Languages Select input languages you plan to use English United States US Registry Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Registry Choose an MX9 software reload scheme
244. ireless functions draw power from the main battery in the MX9 MX9 keypad data entries can be mixed with cradle tethered scanner bar code data entries while the MX9 is in a powered cradle Bluetooth device connection and use while the MX9 is docked are managed by the MX9 Bluetooth program not the cradle The MX9 can be either On Off or in Suspend Mode while in the cradle Special purpose and power cables are available from Honeywell Never put the MX9 into a vehicle mounted assembly until the assembly is securely fastened to the vehicle Preparing the Cradle for Use Note Keep dirt and foreign objects out of the cradle Do not short circuit any of the charging terminals pins as this action could result in injury or property damage Place cradles on a stable surface out of the way of e inclement weather e extremely high concentrations of dust or wind blown debris e accidental knocks bumps or other shocks to the cradle and items in the cradle bays e Leave enough space at cable connectors to ensure cables are protected from jostling tugging or being disconnected by passing objects In addition to the above vehicle mounted cradles should be positioned in the vehicle where the cradle e is protected from rain and inclement weather e does not obstruct the driver s vision or safe vehicle operation e can be easily accessed by a user seated in the driver s seat while the vehicle is not in operation e Leave enough space at the bac
245. is dimmed the touch panel cannot be turned on or off Devices with AppLock are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the MX9 and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies applications to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the MX9 switches to end user mode The process to configure a new device is as follows Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button Connect an external power source to the device if required Adjust screen display audio volume and other parameters if desired Install accessories e g handstrap stylus Tap Start and open the Administration control panel Assign an application on the Application panel More than one application can be assigned Assign a password on the Security panel Select a view level on the Status Panel if desired Tap OK 0 Press the Switch Key sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application s The device is now in end user mode 1 2 3 4 5 Assign a Switch Key hotkey sequence for AppLock on the Security Panel 6 7 8 9 1 Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device hardware and software configuration options The administrator must enter a valid password when a password has already been assigned before access to Administration mode and
246. isplays shown below Note A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options Manual Settings Properties Manual Settings Properties orf x Network DNs Authentication Wireless Manual Settings Properties SP Network DNS Authentication Wireless IT Manage network settings Gi Use server assigned IP address Use the following IP address IP e Een Subnet Gat bd IT Manage network settings Name server addresses may be re assigned if DHCP is enabled DNS 1 DNS 2 Keo DNS 3 Ls Domain Manual Settings Properties OK ES Network DNS Authentication Wireless OK x Network DNS Authentication Wireless Manual Settings Properties IT Manage wireless settings Type ft one Inner None Select Encryption From the Wireless tab IT Manage wireless settings SSID Encryption Note The Authentication tab may not be present in all versions of the Enabler Do not enable Manage Wireless Settings for Summit Client devices Note When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters panel Until these options are enabled the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third p
247. ission Ctrl Char Mapping Define the operations the Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in bar codes Custom Identifiers Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of bar code data which acts as a Code ID After a Custom Identifier is defined Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs HHP Properties Set properties for a Hand Held Products imager including centering mode range AIM timer and light behavior Note that the HHP Properties button is only present if the MX9 is equipped with a Hand Held Products imager Symbology Settings The Symbology selected in the Symbology drop down list defines the symbology for which the data is being configured The features available on the Symbology panel include the ability to e individually enable or disable a bar code from scanning e set the minimum and maximum size bar code to accept e strip Code ID e strip data from the beginning or end of a bar code e or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a bar code The Code ID drop down box only filters the available symbologies in the Symbology drop down box by the selected Code ID This Code ID box does not enable or disable the Code ID as that function is controlled by the Enable Code ID box on the Data Options tab The Symbology drop down box contains all symbologies supported by the device selected on the Main tab An asterisk appears in fron
248. ity A Status Not Connected to Network Connect Admin Login 1 Enable the radio by tapping the Admin Login button on the Connection panel the Connect button is dimmed 2 Enter the password in the Admin Password Entry popup text box The default case sensitive password is LXEW WAN The Connect button is enabled 3 Tap the Connect button to begin a connection with a WWAN 4 Fill in the appropriate fields displayed on the remaining tab panels of the WWAN control panel Connection Tab The Connect button controls Connect Disconnect operation and the caption of the button changes based on the con nection status The Connect button is dimmed when the radio is disabled or absent wWwaN Data Control BOKE X Connection Network TCP IP Security A 4 Status Not Connected to Network Connect Admin Login Tap the Connect button to begin a connection with a WWAN The button caption changes to Disconnect Tapping the Admin Login button displays the Admin Password Entry popup text box After password entry is success ful the button caption changes to Admin Logout Entering an incorrect password causes an error message to be displayed Enter the password in the popup text box and tap the OK button Admin Password Entry Enter WWAN Configuration Password to continue mm OK Cancel Admin Login causes all dimmed buttons and configurable fields on
249. ity stop bits and data bits for COM1 port Assign collected data manipulation parameters See Data Collection Wedge page 8 1 Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Allows a Device Management client the device equipped with a Microsoft Windows CE operating system to work with a Microsoft Systems Management Server Connection setup for modem attached to COM port or Compact Flash slot Set background graphic and scheme Set touch screen and keypad backlight properties and timers Select the current key data input method Select custom key maps Set General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity Select a Key Map or font Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Configure KeyMap keys RunCmd and LaunchApp Displays license information for installed licensed applications Adjust the input and output parameters volume sidetone and record gain for headphone software and microphone Set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen Set various MX9 specific configuration options Set network driver properties and network access properties Monitor and capture network activity Set the MX9 owner details name phone etc Enter notes Enable disable Owner display parameters Enter Network ID for the device user name password domain Set OS access password properties for signon and or screen saver Control the connection between the MX9
250. k cannot cool down Do not leave the battery pack in a non operating charger The battery pack may discharge through the charger rather than hold its charge Service There are no user serviceable parts in the Rechargeable Lithium lon Battery or the Charger Contact Customer Support page 15 1 should your charger require service Battery Cleaning Storage and Service Cleaning The battery pack should not require cleaning unless it has become heavily soiled Old or damaged batteries should be dis posed of promptly and properly The best way to dispose of used batteries is to recycle them Battery recycling facilities recover the Nickel Lithium or Lead from old batteries to manufacture new batteries Use only mild detergent with a slightly damp cloth to clean the outside of the battery Do not use solvents or flammable cleaners Allow the case to dry fully before using again Do not allow cleaning agents of any kind to contact the charging contacts they may be damaged If necessary clean them with a soft bristle dry brush or compressed air Storage Battery packs should be stored charging contact side up in a cool dry place protected from weather and airborne debris whenever possible 12 7 Do not store battery packs in direct sunlight on a metal surface or anywhere the battery pack cannot cool down Do not leave the battery pack in a non operating charger The battery pack may discharge through the charger rather than hold i
251. k of the cradle for the MX9 trigger handle e There must be at least 2 clearance at the back of the vehicle cradle for power serial interface and the Input Output cables 13 1 Tethered Scanners and the MX9 Cradles An MX9 powered cradle supports tethered scanner attachment A powered cradle provides 5V power to a tethered scanner The passive vehicle cradle cannot support tethered scanner attachment There is no software in the cradles Note Tethered scanners connect to powered cradles by USB or serial connection Note Pressing the MX9 Scan button has no effect on tethered bar code scanners connected to a powered cradle Tethered scanners read bar code scans only when the trigger on the tethered scanner is pressed A tethered scanner can be connected to the 9 pin RS232 Serial Interface port on the desktop cradle or to the Serial Interface port on the back of the vehicle cradle Bluetooth scanner connection and use while the MX9 is docked in a cradle are managed by the MX9 Bluetooth client not the cradle MX9 keypad data entries can be mixed with tethered scanner bar code data entries Any tethered scanner that decodes the bar code internally and outputs an RS232 data stream may be used It sends the data to the MX9 in ASCII format Tethered scanners send scanned data to the MX9 when the MX9 is in a powered cradle and the tethered scanner is connected to the Serial Interface port on the cradle When a tethered scanner is con
252. keyboard hook Open failure Open registry failure Opened status file Out of memory for encrypted pwd pRealTaskbarWndProc already set Pwd cancelled or invalid remain in user mode Read registry error hot key Read registry failure app name Read registry failure Cmd Line Read registry failure Internet Registering Backdoor MSG Registering Hotkey MSG Registry read failure at reenter user mode Registry read failure at reenter user mode Explanation and or corrective action When AppLock first loads it loads a dll that contains the keyboard hook processing This message is logged prior to the load attempt The status information is being saved to a file and the file open has failed This could occur if the file is write protected If the file does not exist it is created If the Administration registry key does not exist the switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened successfully Level LOG_PROCESSING LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX Not enough memory to encrypt the password LOG_ERROR The taskbar control has already been installed The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an error The keyboard hook uses an embedded def
253. ksum position Planet Advanced Properties PostaL AlphaNumeric Encoding Technique Planet Advanced Properties Ki ES Transmit Check Character Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is disabled Posicode Advanced Properties Posicode Advanced Prope Ki ES Limited Labels None Oa s Limited Labels Select the type of Posicode Limited labels e None e A Posicode Limited A e B Posicode Limited B Telepen Advanced Properties Telepen Advanced Proper OK E Original Output Original Output When enabled output is Original Telepen When disabled output is AIM Default is enabled UPCA Advanced Properties UPCA Advanced Properties Ki ES M Transmit Check Character Vv Transmit Number System Digit Addenda Read 2 Digit Read 5 Digit Required Vv Insert Separator Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is enabled Transmit Number System Digit When enabled transmit the number system digit Default is enabled Addenda Read 2 Digit When enabled transmit the 2 digit addenda Default is disabled Read 5 Digit When enable transmit the 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Required When enabled only transmit bar codes with a 2 or 5 digit addenda Default is disabled Insert Separator When enabled insert a space between the c
254. kward compatibility with Bluetooth 1 1 and 1 2 WWAN Radio e Only one radio at a time can be in an MX9 e The MX9 provides an 802 11a b g WWAN radio and supports GSM EDGE e Carriers are AT amp T in the US GSM and RTTE Europe e GSM radios are shipped on deactivated SIM cards AC DC Wall Adapter for MX9 Desktop Cradle Battery Charger The AC DC Power Adapter is only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment Input Power Switch None Power ON Indicator LED Input Fusing Thermal Fuse Input Voltage 100 VAC min 240 VAC max Input Frequency 50 60 Hz Input Connector Three prong wall plug with ground Output Connector AC wall adapter has a 5 5mm barrel connector It connects to the I O cables which transition power to the D connector Output Voltage 15 VDC Output Current 4 Amps max Output Power 60 Watt max Charging low voltage cut off 3 9A nominal Operating Temperature 32 F to 100 F 0 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C Weight 250 grams GPS Receiver Technical Specifications The GPS receiver COM port is turned off by default The COM port is 5 defaults are 9600 baud 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit COM5 default baud rate is 4800 for NMEA communication GPS COM settings are stored in the registry Frequency Band Channel bandwidth is 2 MHz Frequency band is 1574 42 GHz to 1576 42 GHZ Serial Interface The GPS module supports seri
255. l gt Keyboard and then the Key map drop down list Tap the button for Help when changing Control Panel options Option About page 5 17 Accessibility page 5 18 Administration Battery page 5 19 Bluetooth EZ Pair Certificates page 5 20 Data Collection Wedge Date Time page 5 21 Device Management page 5 22 Dialing page 5 22 Display page 5 23 Input Panel page 5 26 Internet Options page 5 27 Keyboard page 5 30 KeyMap page 5 31 License Viewer page 5 36 Mixer page 5 37 Mouse page 5 38 MX9 Options page 5 39 Network and Dialup Options page 5 42 Network Capture page 5 43 Owner page 5 46 Password page 5 48 PC Connection page 5 49 Peripherals page 5 50 Power page 5 52 Function Software hardware versions and network IP No user intervention allowed Integrated scanner type is identified Customize the way the keyboard audio display or mouse function for users with hearing or viewing difficulties AppLock Administration utility See AppLock page 6 1 View voltage and status of the main and backup batteries Set the parameters for Bluetooth device connections See Bluetooth Configuration page 7 1 Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Wedge utility for data collected from bar code scans Set data collection device notifications data stripping prefix suffix and vibration if installed options Assign baud rate par
256. launch the SCU Use the tray icon to view the radio status The radio is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is less than 90 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is 71 dBm to 90 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is 51 dBm to 70 dBm B B B E 6 The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is greater than 50 dBm 10 2 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time the device is not connected to a net work The WZC icon may not be visible until control is passed to the WZC utility as described below You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network Use the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network The Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio Using the Wireless Zero Config Utility 1 Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down list as the active profile See Main Tab page 10 3 2 Open the Registry page 5 56 panel and tap Warmboot The Summit
257. le change from general desktop PC Appearance options Select a scheme from the drop down list and make changes to the parameters The default is High Contrast White for monochrome displays and Windows Standard for color displays Tap the Save button to save any changes renaming the scheme if desired Tap the Delete button to delete schemes Tap the Apply button to apply the selected scheme to the display Backlight Display Properties Ea OK D Background Appearance Backlight SE Save battery life by LG automatically turning off the backlight when not needed Turn off backlight when using MV Battery power and device is idle for more than 3 seconds sl V External power and device is idle for more than 2 minutes D Backlight Brightness Elke The backlight settings use the default timeouts and is synchronized to the User Idle setting in the Schemes tab in the Power control panel When the backlight timer expires the touch screen backlight is dimmed not turned off When both checkboxes are unchecked the backlight never turns off or dims Default values are 3 seconds for Battery 2 minutes for External and both the check boxes are enabled When the keypad backlight is set to Follow the touch screen backlight the keypad backlight turns off when the touch screen backlight dims Adjust backlight brightness by moving the slider Changes are in effect immediately Touch screen display backlight brightn
258. le the battery charger enters and exits the startup check 5 When the charge pocket LEDs are not illuminated the battery charger is ready for use Mounting The battery charger should be located in an area where it e Is well ventilated e ls notin high traffic areas e Locates or orients the AC cord so that it will not be stepped on tripped over or subjected to damage or stress e Has enough clearance to allow easy access to the power port on the back of the device e ls protected from rain dust direct sunlight or inclement weather This device is intended for indoor use only and requires an indoor AC power source The charger is not approved for use in hazardous locations Place the battery charger on a flat horizontal hard surface The battery charger can be mounted to a stable vertical surface e g wall using the keyhole openings in the bottom panel of the battery charger Care should be taken when inserting batteries in a vertical mounted battery charger that the battery is secured by the latch in the battery charging pocket Charging Batteries New batteries should be charged fully before first use The life and capacity of a Lithium lon battery pack can vary significantly depending on the discharge current and the environment in which it is used When a battery is placed in a charging pocket the battery charger begins charging the battery There is a slight delay while the charger evaluates the condition of the
259. le to the MX9 power adapter in order to use ActiveSync Do not allow the MX9 to enter Suspend while connected Insert A C lt Ip TI Adapter Cable a al Connect to host Connect to Input Output port on MX9 Serial port Wireless Connection Note You must establish a partnership with a desktop computer prior to running ActiveSync on the mobile device The initial partnership must be done using direct serial or USB cable connection Once the relationship is established using the USB or serial port the ActiveSync link in the Start Menu gives a choice of connections one of which is Network Select Start gt Settings gt Programs gt Communication gt ActiveSync From the popup list choose Network and then tap the Connect button 5 73 Synchronizing from the Mobile Device To synchronize using a wireless LAN card you must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device To initiate synchronization from your MX9 tap Start gt Programs gt Communication gt ActiveSync to begin the process Tap Sync to connect and synchronize View synchronization status Tap Tools to synchronize or change synchronization settings View connection status Tap Stop to stop synchronization Tap Start gt Help for context sensitive help Explore From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC tap the Explore button which allo
260. led unchecked with a blank text string When bar code data is processed the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the prefix The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If All is selected the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Add Suffix To enable a suffix check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When bar code data is processed the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the bar code data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the suffix The suffix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If All is selected the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Symbologies The Code ID drop down box filters the available symbologies in the Symbology drop down box by the selected Code ID When a Hand Held Products imager scan engine is installed AIM Custom and HHP symbologies are displayed HHP does not support Symbol IDs When a Symbol scan engine is installed AIM Custom and Symbol symbologies are displayed Symbol does not support HHP IDs Hand Held Products AIM Symbologies Note When the integ
261. ling a User Certificate 1 Copy the certificate and private key files to the MX9 2 Import the certificate by navigating to Start gt Control Panel gt Certificates 3 Select My Certificates from the pull down list Certificates B OK A Stores m Certificates sl Lists your personal digital certificates Remove 4 Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key OK A From a File From a Smart Card Reader v Card Absent 5 Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK 10 44 GJ My Documents 7 Shortcut to Office Templates Name LC Type Certificates 6 SCH the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap K 7 The certificate is now shown in the list Certificates El OK ES Stores my Certificates sl Lists your personal digital certificates z Remove 8 With the certificate you just imported highlighted tap View 9 From the Field pull down menu select Private Key Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Private Key x Not Present B e If the private key is present the process is complete 10 45 e If the private key is not present import the private key 10 To import the private key tap OK to return to the Certificates screen 11 Tap import Select a Cer GJ My Documents HD Shortcut to Office Templ
262. lled in the mobile device The MX9 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows XP or later At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Tapping the Start Button causes the Start menu to pop up It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run Desktop Icons At a minimum the desktop displays icons for My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin Following are a few of the other icons that may be on the MX9 Desktop Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for the latest updates and upgrades for your operating system Icon Function ay My Device Access files and programs a Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted x al Bluetooth shortcut Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices My Documents shortcut Storage for downloaded files applications Internet Explorer shortcut Connect to the Internet intranet requires radio card and Internet Service Provider ISP enrollment is not available from Honeywell SCU shortcut Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration SCU Summit Client Utility Wavelink Avalanche eXpress Scan shortcut This utility allows an administrator to scan bar codes to provide the initial network and Avalanche Mobile Device Server address configuration This eliminates the need to edit radio parameters manually on the windows device eXpress Scan uses bar codes crea
263. lose as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle When available always connect to unswitched ter minals in the vehicle fuse panel after providing proper fusing ATTENTION For uninterrupted power electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle 13 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type elec trical terminals are an accepted method of termination Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG 1mm2 conductors 14 Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket 13 20 Vehicle 12V Bare Wire Adapter Part Number 9000A079CBL12ML3 Caution For installation by trained service personnel only Caution For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle This fused circuit requires a ten Amp maximum time delay slow blow high interrupting rating fuse If the A supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery positive terminal Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Vehicle Cable Connection Fuse Not Shown o o Ek o MA D Jm pm ko To V
264. ls tap on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Summit Credentials A User Password 7 Enter the Domain User name if the Domain is required otherwise enter the User name 8 Enter the password Tap OK then tap the Commit button 9 Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network 10 23 PEAP MSCHAP Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate To use PEAP MSCHAP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to PEAP MSCHAP 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open 5 To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section STT MCC BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global i ya eit fink e Radio Jaro 1 Encryption EAP Type wea TKIP PEAP MSCHAP sl WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit 6 See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 10 17 for information on entering credentials 7 Tap the Credentials button e No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for
265. ly powered battery is inserted and the MX9 is turned on Battery Hotswapping Important When the internal battery power is Low or Very Low connect the AC adapter to the MX9 before replacing the main battery pack When the main battery power level is low the MX9 will signal the user with the low battery warning indicator the Status LED remains a steady red that continues until the main battery is replaced the battery completely depletes or external power is applied to the MX9 using an AC Adapter You can replace the main battery by first placing the MX9 in Suspend Mode then removing the discharged main battery and installing a charged main battery within a five minute time limit or before the Super cap internal battery depletes When the main battery is removed the MX9 enters Critical Suspend state the MX9 remains in Suspend mode the display is turned off and the internal battery continues to power the unit for at least five minutes Though data is retained the MX9 cannot be used until a charged main battery is installed After installing the new battery press the Power key Full operational recovery from Suspend can take several seconds while the client is reestablishing a network link If the internal battery depletes before a fully charged main battery can be inserted the MX9 will turn Off Low Battery Warning It is recommended that the main battery pack be removed and replaced when its energy depletes When the main battery Low Bat
266. m Startup Windows Startup is parsed too early in the boot pro cess so it has no effect Executables in System Startup must be the actual executable not a shortcut because shortcuts are not parsed by Launch Saving Changes to the Registry The MX9 saves the registry when you e Tap Start gt Run then type Warmboot Tap OK e Perform a Suspend Resume function by pressing the Pwr key and then pressing it again The registry save process takes 0 3 seconds If nothing has been changed nothing is saved eg 0 seconds The registry is automatically saved every 10 seconds if anything has changed It is also saved every tenth time the registry settings are changed Registry settings are changed when control panel applet e g Date Time parameters are changed by the user and a warm boot was not performed afterward Software Load The software loaded on the MX9 consists of Microsoft Windows CE 5 OS hardware specific OEM Adaptation Layer device drivers Internet Explorer 6 0 for Windows CE browser and utilities The software supported is summarized below Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Microsoft Windows CE 5 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messaging graphics keyboard and touch screen input window management and common controls Network and Device Drivers Bluetooth Optional Note Contact Technical A
267. mnifiCates EE 10 34 Generating a Root CA Certificate 10 34 Installing a Root CA Certificate 10 37 Generating a User Certttcate AAA 10 38 Installing a User Certificate 10 44 Verify Installation EE 10 47 Chapter 11 KeyMaps ett Te le TEE 11 1 62 Key Keypad KeyMap kk 11 1 62 Key 5250 Keypad Overlay KeyMa p s ssssseesseesssesssiseitsrintstrntintstrntttrnntnnntinntnntntunatnnntnenstnnnennne 11 6 38 key Keypad KeyMap AAA 11 11 Chapter 12 Battery Charger Unpacking your Battery Charger sssssseeesesesieesisteittsintstittstrtttirntttnttktnttintntnstunsetnnntnnnnnnnennnnnnn nnen 12 1 treie Tele EE 12 1 Cautions And WarningS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeeaeeecaeeeeeaeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeesseaeeeseeaeeeeaes 12 2 Battery Charger eet eieiei DE Deeg ZE 12 2 Lithium lon Battery Pack AAA 12 2 Front EE 12 3 CT te WEE 12 3 Assemble the Power Supply ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeecaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeesseaeeeseeeeseas 12 3 el DEE 12 4 MOUNTING we coi oiii ee en et EEN Ee ee ceed ane cee ers tna eave pete eer 12 4 Charging Batteries A 12 4 Inserting a Battery into the Charging Pocket 12 5 Removing the Battery from the Charging Pocket 12 5 Interpreting the Charging Pocket LEDS sssssssssesssiessresskitsitetirtttitttitnstittetnnntittetnnstnntetnnterntnenn nenn 12 5 Battery Charger Help 12 6 Charger Cleaning Storage and Service ccceccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeee
268. ms the selected start or stop command Owner Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Owner Set the MX9 owner details The Network ID is used when logging into a remote network Setting Default Identification Name Blank Company Blank Address Blank Telephones Blank Display owner ID at power on Disabled Notes Notes Blank Display notes at power on Disabled Network ID User Name Blank Password Blank Domain Blank Owner Properties ia OK ei Identification Notes Network ID Owner Properties foj Name p Company Address E Work phone Home phone At power on T Display owner identification Identification Notes Network ID Notes At power on T Display owner notes Owner Properties ka OK x Identification Notes Network ID Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Enter the user name password and domain provided by your network administrator User Name Password Domain Enter user name password and domain to be used when logging into network resources Password Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Password Use this panel to set MX9 user access to control panels and power up password properties Important This password must be entered before performing a Load Factory Defaults on the Registry control panel Contact Technical Assistance page 1
269. municate with the charger The charger s timeout period has expired Solution Check if the MX9 battery pack has Honeywell part number MX9380BATT or MX9381BATT Low Temperature on the label If not do not use Remove the object from the charging pocket Unplug charger from AC supply Remove any dirt or foreign objects from the charging pocket If the LEDs continue to remain ON the charger may be defective Return charger to an authorized Honeywell service center Push battery pack in firmly Do not slam the battery pack into the charging pocket Replace battery pack Contact Customer Support page 15 1 for replacement options There is nothing wrong with the battery pack or charger Do not top off a fully charged battery pack by repeatedly placing it in the charging pocket The battery pack may overheat and be damaged Contact Customer Support page 15 1 for battery pack replacement options Make sure that the battery pack temperature is within specification and retry charging Contact Customer Support page 15 1 if problem repeats for battery pack replacement options 12 6 Issue Cause Solution LED is flashing RED at any pocket The battery pack voltage has not Contact Customer Support page 15 1 for reached 6 0V within 30 minutes battery pack replacement options and the charger has timed out The battery pack voltage has not reached 2 5V within 60 minutes and the char
270. n Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text writ ten and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Control Code Replacement Examples Configuration Example Example g Translation Control SE Translated data data configuration Character Ignore drop The control character is Ignore drop Ox1B in the bar code is discarded from the bar code discarded data prefix and suffix Printable text Text is substituted for Control Start of Text STX 0x02 in a bar code is Character converted to the text STX Hat encoded The hat encoded text is Carriage AM Value OxOd in a bar text translated to the equivalent hex Return code is converted to the value value OxOd Escaped hat The hat encoding to pass thru to Horizontal wl Value 0x09 in a bar encoded text the application Tab code is converted to the text Al Hex encoded The hex encoded text is Carriage Ox0A Value OxOD in a bar text translated to the equivalent hex Return code is converted to a value value Ox
271. nal Strength Indication RSSI scan data before a roaming decision is made Options are 5 sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 seconds or Custom Defines the 2 4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming By specifying the channels to search roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels Options are e Full all channels e 1 6 11 the most commonly used channels e 1 7 13 for ETSI and TELEC radios only e Custom Support for 5GHZ 802 11a channels where support for DFS is required Options are On Off Optimized Note Not supported always off in some SCU releases 10 13 Parameter Ad Hoc Channel Aggressive Scan CCX or CCX Features WMM Auth Server TTLS Inner Method PMK Caching WAPI Default BG Off A Optimized Auto EAP Standard Function Use this parameter when the Radio Mode profile parameter is set to Ad Hoc Specifies the channel to be used for an Ad Hoc connection to another client device If a channel is selected that is not supported by the by the radio the default value is used Options are e 1 through 14 the 2 4GHz channels e 36 40 44 48 the UNII 1 channels When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens the radio aggressively scans for available APs Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning set through Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period Aggressive scanning should be set
272. nal scanner even if a bar code from an external scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified The MX9 will still generate a bad scan beep to indicate the bar code has been rejected Enable Code ID Options None Programs the internal scanner to disable transmission of a Code ID The only entry in the Symbology popup list is All AIM Programs the internal scanner to transmit the AIM ID with each bar code The combo box in the Symbology panel is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom code IDs Symbol Programs the internal scanner to transmit the Symbol ID with each bar code The combo box in the Symbology panel is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom Code IDs HHP Programs the internal scanner to transmit the HHP ID with each bar code The combo box in the Symbology panel is loaded with the known HHP ID symbologies for that platform plus any custom Code IDs Custom Does not change the scanner s Code ID transmission setting The combo box in the Symbology panel is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs Enable Code ID Buttons Symbology Settings Individually enable or disable a bar code from being scanned set the minimum and maximum size bar code to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a bar code or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a bar code before transm
273. nd are reset when the MX9 is rebooted Use this tab to ensure the settings are stored in the registry and persist across a warmboot or restart wwan Data Control REGER Security Jautoconnect Admin About NR V Use Extensible Auth Protocol EAP M Unencrypted password PAP M Chanllenge Handshake CHAP M Microsoft CHAP MS CHAP M Microsoft CHAP v2 MS CHAP v2 By default EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is enabled If EAP is deselected the other security options are then selectable Autoconnect Tab The Autoconnect tab contains two checkboxes wwan Data Control BOK X Security Autoconnect admin About Automatically connect to network when device is turned on Vv Automatically reconnect to network when connection lost or resuming from suspend Automatically connect to network when device is turned on When this check box is enabled checked the radio automatically connects to the network when the device is turned on power button is pressed Automatically reconnect to network when connection lost or resuming from suspend When this check box is enabled the radio automatically attempts to reconnect to the network when it is resumed after being in the suspend state Automatic reconnection applies whether Autoconnect is on or off Admin Tab The Admin tab provides the ability to change the configuration password see the Connection Ta
274. nected to the Serial Interface port on a powered cradle the MX9 must be configured as follows 1 Open the Data Collection Wedge Main tab panel on the MX9 2 Enable either Port 1 Port 2 or Port 3 3 Close the Data Collection Wedge application Cradle Cleaning Storage and Service Cleaning Do not use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the surfaces and or battery connectors Use a clean soft cloth to wipe any dirt moisture or grease from the MX9 charging contacts or the cradle Do not use any liquid to clean the cradle battery pack MX9 or charging terminals pins Spray or dampen the cleaning cloth with liquids sprays If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint particulates can be removed from the connectors charging terminals and charging docking bays with clean filtered canned air Storage When the cradle is not in service it should be stored in a cool dry place protected from weather and airborne debris Do not store a spare MX9 or spare battery in the cradle in storage Service There are no serviceable parts in MX9 cradles Do not attempt to open the units If the cradle or mounting components are broken loose or cracked the assembly must be taken out of service and replaced Periodically test a mounted cradle for stability and tighten connections as needed 13 2 Battery Cleaning Storage and Service Cleaning The battery pack should n
275. nfigured the MX9 is warmbooted Once connected to the wireless network and the Mobile Device Server any soft ware updates and additional configuration data are downloaded 10 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction The Summit client device is either an 802 11g radio capable of both 802 11b and 802 11g data rates or an 802 11a radio capable of 802 11a 802 11b and 802 11g data rates The radio can be configured for no encryption WEP encryption or WPA security Security options supported are e No Security page 10 21 e WEP page 10 22 e LEAP page 10 23 e PEAP MSCHAP page 10 24 e PEAP GTC page 10 26 e WPA LEAP page 10 28 e EAP FAST page 10 29 e EAP TLS page 10 31 e WPA PSK page 10 33 Important Notes It is important that all dates are correct on the MX9 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail It may be necessary to upgrade radio software in order to use certain Summit Client Utility SCU features Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for details When using the 802 1 1a radio the UNI 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation For regulatory domains in which the UNI 3 band is allowed the following channels are supported 149 157 and 161 The AP must be configured accordingly After making any changes to the wireless configuration perform a Warmboot Summit Client Ut
276. ng systems Inserting or Replacing the Battery Pack Warning Never remove or replace any battery in a hazardous location The MX9 will not function unless the battery pack is in place and securely latched Be sure to place the unit in Suspend Mode before removing the battery Failing to properly place the device in Suspend mode will result in a loss of all unsaved data The main battery is located in a compartment on the back of the unit The battery case serves as the back cover for the battery well of the MX9 An MX9 will retain data while the main battery is removed and replaced with a fully charged main battery for 5 minutes Important When the internal battery power is Low or Very Low connect the AC adapter to the MX9 before replacing the main battery Note The battery should not be replaced in a dirty harsh or hazardous environment When the battery is not connected to the MX9 any dust or moisture that enters the battery well or connector may transfer to the battery well terminals potentially causing damage Warning Only use Honeywell batteries as replacements MX9380BATTERY 161888 0001 or 161915 0001 Low Temperature Insert Replace Battery To insert the main battery complete the following steps 1 Detach the bottom hook of the hand strap if installed 2 Tilt the end with the terminals of the fully charged battery pack into the upper end of the battery compartment and firmly press the other end until it is fully
277. ng Critical Suspend Mode If Main Battery power is re applied the device will transition to Suspend mode If Main Battery power is not made available before the Backup Battery is depleted the unit enters Off Mode Off The MX9 enters the Off Mode when the Main Battery and the Backup Battery are depleted or when Shutdown is selected from the Start menu Batteries The MX9 is designed to work with a replaceable 2400 mAh Lithium lon Li lon battery pack from Honeywell Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge MX9 low temperature 2100 mAh Lithium lon Li lon batteries designed for freezer environments and with a blue label have an average use time of 4 hours before requiring a recharge During very heavy scanning or wireless transmitter use the operating time of the battery may be less HazLoc versions of the MX9 require a screwdriver to remove the plate covering the battery release mechanism When the MX9 is docked in a powered cradle the battery in the MX9 is recharged through the cradle connector in the docking bay An extra Li lon battery pack can be recharged in a powered desktop cradle The battery is fully recharged in a powered cradle in less than 4 hours The MX9 can be Off in use or in Suspend Mode while the battery is recharging Note New main battery packs must be charged prior to use This process takes up to four hours in an MX9 Battery Charger and six hours when the
278. ng the keywords bar code create 3 The format for the bar code label is as follows e Bar code type must be Code 128 e FNC3 character followed by string Uppercase L lowercase n lowercase k uppercase B and then the Bluetooth address 12 hex digits no colons For example LnkB0400fd002031 4 Create and print the label 5 Scan the MX9 Bluetooth address bar code label with the Bluetooth bar code reader The devices are paired The Bluetooth bar code reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Note After scanning the MX9 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the remote Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired Bluetooth Reader Beep and LED Indications Bluetooth Remote Device Beep Type Beep Type from Bluetooth Device Acknowledge label Label rejected Transmission error Link successful Link unsuccessful Behavior 1 beep 2 beeps at low frequency Beep will sound high low high low Beep will sound low medium high Beep will sound high low high low Bluetooth Remote Device LED LED on Bluetooth Device Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz Behavior Linking in progress Off Disconnected or unlinked Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz Bluetooth transmission in progress Yellow LED blinks at the same rate as the paging beep 1 Hz Paging Green LED blinks once a second Disabled indication Upon startup if the remote Bluetooth scanner sounds a long tone this means th
279. nical Assistance page 15 1 if you have questions about the antenna s installed on your MX9 10 9 Status Tab Tee MU cm BOKE X Main Profile Status Diags Global yA Profile Default Status Associated Device Name Unnamed AP Name AP2 Connection Channel 5 SDC IP 100 100 100 100 MAC 00 17 23 00 00 00 IP 100 100 100 200 MAC 00 02 2d 00 00 00 Beacon Period 100 DTIM 1 Bit Rate 11 Mbps Tx Power 80 mv Saeth 57 dem Signal Quality 63 This screen provides information on the radio The profile being used The status of the radio card down associated authenticated etc Client information including device name IP address and MAC address Information about the Access Point AP maintaining the connection to the network including AP name IP address and MAC address Channel currently being used for wireless traffic Bit rate in Mbit Current transmit power in mW Beacon period the time between AP beacons in kilomicroseconds one kilomicrosecond 1 024 microseconds DTIM interval A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message DTIM The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them For example if DTIM 3 then every third beacon contains a DTIM Signal strength RSSI displayed in dBm and graphically Signal quality a measure of the clarity of the signal display
280. nly be charged when their internal temperature is 104 F between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 100 F Battery Pack 10 C 40 C Battery packs will not begin charging when their internal temperature Charging 50 F 104 F is outside this range Storage 20 C 70 C Unit is off 4 F 160 F 14 5 Dimensions Weight Length Width Height Plug Type Mounting 3 Ib 10 oz 1 6 kg with a battery in each charging bay 2 lb O oz 0 9 kg no batteries 16 40 cm 5 75 14 6 cm 1 5 4 cm IEC320 3 prong grounded barrel connector 10 25 cm Center point distance between mounting holes 14 6 15 Customer Support Technical Assistance If you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device please contact us by using one of the methods below Knowledge Base www hsmknowledgebase com Our Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions If the Knowledge Base cannot help our Technical Support Portal see below provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question Technical Support Portal www hsmsupportportal com The Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem but it also provides immediate solutions to your technical issues by searching our Knowledge Base With the Portal you can submit and track your questions online and send and receive attachments Web form www hsmcontactsupport com You can contact our technic
281. nly one Bluetooth mouse and one Bluetooth keyboard A Registry Restart is required every time Filtered Mode is toggled on and off Printer Port COM9 This option is Disabled unchecked by default This option assigns Bluetooth printer connection to COM9 instead of COM19 To enable this option Filtered Mode must be enabled checked Logging This option is Disabled unchecked by default When logging is enabled the MX9 creates bt_log txt and stores it in the System folder Bluetooth activity logging is added to the text file as activity progresses A bt_log_bak txt file contains the data stored by bt_log txt prior to reboot During a reboot process the MX9 renames bt_log txt to bt_log_bak txt If a file already exists with that name the existing file is deleted the new bt_log_bak txt file is added and a new bt_log txt is cre ated Computer Friendly Name This option is populated with the System Name when EZ Pair is installed The System Administrator can change the name The Computer Friendly Name entered in this space is used exclusively by Bluetooth devices and during Bluetooth communication Reconnect Note These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled EZ Pairi OK Reconnect Jop Setup OPP ze Alt V Report when connection lost Report when reconnected V Report Failure to reconnect Clear Pairing Table on Boot Vv Auto Reconnect on Boot
282. not passed to the application Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with lt Shift gt lt Alt gt and lt Cirl gt text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the Soft Input Panel SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the lt Ctrl gt key is pressed followed by lt A gt Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey is pressed to switch user modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP Setting a Password in the Security Panel Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match Passwords are case sensitive When the user exits the Administrator panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a di
283. ns function normally e Hidden taskbar is not displayed e Locked taskbar is visible but most icons are hidden or for information only Scan Config For best results use express Config and express Scan for this function express Scan is included with the updated MX9 enablers Avalanche Update Settings OK A Scan Config Shortcuts Adapters 4 gt V Use Scan Wedge Run Scan Wedge Path Sa 8 _ Close Scan Wedge on Exit Enabler Scan Not Present Scan Config is Enabled Auto Display Scan Config Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche MC system but is not currently supported on the MSp Display Avalanche Update Settings Ki Dei Display Taskbar Execution Scan Alt Update Window Display t startup Har Screen sl On connect Jas is v Normal Jas is The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the MX9 connection with the Mobile Device Server At startup Default is Half Screen Options are Half screen Hidden or Full screen On connect Default is As Is Options are As is Half screen or Full screen Normal Default is As Is Options are Half screen Hidden or As Is Shortcuts For best results use AppLock page 6 1 for this function AppLock is resident on each mobile device Avalanche Update Settings OK A Shortcuts adapters Status Edit
284. nths The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 AC power supply and cables is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 DC DC Converter and cable is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 cables USB Serial Communication Power is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 fabric accessories e g belt case holster is 90 days The duration of the limited warranty for the MX9 Headset is 1 year 15 2 Back Cvr 1 Honeywell Scanning amp Mobility 9680 Old Bailes Road Fort Mill SC 29707 www honeywellaidc com MX9 CE UG Rev A 6 14
285. ntrol panel Mixer Start gt Settings gt Conirol Panel gt Mixer The MX9 has a speaker and a microphone They are active when a headset is not connected to the device The micro phone is located to the left of the oval logo at the top of the unit The speaker audio is located above the keypad Use the settings on these panels to adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input speaker and speaker output Headsets can be enabled disabled and selected using these panels Setting Default Output Speaker Volume 0 dB Headset Volume 13 5dB Headset Selection Default Input Input Selection None Record Gain 0 dB Record Boost 12 dB Sidetone 0 dB Output Panel Mixer Gei Ki A Output Input Speaker Volume 0 0 dB a Headset 13 5 dB leg Ee D Headset Test Tap and hold the Output sliders and move them either left or right or tap the left and right arrows to adjust Speaker volume decibel level Tap the drop down list arrow to select the type of headset currently attached to the unit This will load a predetermined limit value the headphone setting cannot exceed the predetermined values Input Panel Mixer ka OK ES Output Input Input None Record Gain 22 5 dB a E Boost 12 0 dB a ee Sidetone 0 0 dB E La To enable the headset select Headset in the Input Selection combo
286. ntry is added to the Match list 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 poo Add Clear All To remove an entry from the Match list highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button Tap OK to store any additions deletions or changes Barcode Data Match Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Notes e Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete and is
287. o admin mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator The keyboard hook load failed so AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered If the keyboard hook initialization fails AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered See the explanation of the Registry read failure above AppLock is switching into Admin mode If a password has been configured the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered In administration mode the taskbar is visible and enabled The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch to user mode The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from re enabling it AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar Level LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_EX LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_EX LOG_PROCESSING LOG_PROCESSING LOG_ERROR LOG_EX Message Timeout looking for app window ToUser after admin not at boot ToUser after admin
288. o pair with the MX9 The requesting Bluetooth device does not need to have been Discovered by the MX9 before the pairing request is received Tap the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen In some cases if a Bluetooth device is already paired this setting cannot be changed If this is the case an error message is displayed and the option is not changed The Bluetooth device must be disconnected before changing this setting Continuous Search This option is Disabled unchecked by default When enabled the Bluetooth connection never stops searching for a device it has paired with when the connection is broken such as the paired device entering Suspend mode going out of range or being turned off When disabled after being enabled the MX9 stops searching after 30 minutes Note Continuous Search option continually draws power from the Main Battery until timeout Filtered Mode This option is Enabled checked by default Determines whether the Bluetooth client discovers and displays all serial Blue tooth devices in the vicinity Filtered Mode is disabled unchecked or the discovery result displays Bluetooth scanners and printers only Filtered Mode is enabled checked When Filtered Mode is disabled the MX9 can pair with up to four Blue tooth devices with a limit of one Bluetooth scanner one Bluetooth printer one PAN and one DUN connected at the same time More than one HID device can be connected but o
289. oard Set keypad key map keypad key repeat delay and key repeat rate Setting Default Repeat Tab Key map Default or Default MX9 Repeat character Enable Repeat Delay Short Repeat Rate Slow Keyboard Properties fa Ki E Repeat Key map flux IT Enable character repeat Repeat delay 8 Long Short cl eet gt Repeat rate Slow Etat el bet Ve Lat st Eet GI Tap here and hold down a key to test Select a key map using the drop down list Adjust the character repeat settings and tap the OK button to save the changes When new key maps or fonts are added to the registry they are available immediately and the font name is in the Key board Properties Key map drop down list Only one font at a time can be selected The fonts affect the screen display they do not affect any virtual touch screen key taps See About gt Software gt Language tab for the name of any installed fonts Languages and Fonts Fonts are available in the following languages in separate part numbers for each language Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Tahoma font is on every unit and includes English default European French Spanish German Portuguese Scandina vian languages Arabic Cyrillic Greek Hebrew and Thai See Regional Settings for instruction for setting User Interface Language and Default Input Language KeyMap Start gt Settings gt
290. od scan sound on the MX9 is a single beep and a bad scan sound is a double beep Wi Fi Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Wi Fi or Tap the Summit Client Utility icon Use this option to set parameters and manage profiles for the wireless client pre loaded on your MX9 See Wireless Network Configuration page 10 1 for more information WWAN Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt WWAN These panels can be used to set the parameters for the Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN on the MX9 The WWAN is a form of wireless network that utilizes a cellular network instead of the spread spectrum network most used by Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Setting Connection tab Status Default Not Connected Connect button Dimmed Admin Login button Enabled Network tab Phone Username Password APN Blank TCP IP tab DHCP Enabled dimmed DNS Enabled dimmed Addresses Pre populated dimmed Security tab use Extensible Auth Protocol Enabled Autoconnect tab Automatically connect turned On Disabled dimmed Automatically reconnect Enabled dimmed Admin tab Admin Factory Default Password LXEWWAN Enable Radio button Dimmed PIN Personal Identification Number Enabled Blank PUK Personal Unblocking Key Disabled Dimmed Initial Setup wwaN Data Contrat BOKE X Connection etwork TCP IP Secur
291. ode and addenda Default is enabled Note An EAN 13 decoding algorithm will also decode UPCA labels For correct operation either disable the EAN 13 symbology when using UPCA labels or configure the EAN 13 settings to match the UPCA settings UPCEO Advanced Properties UPCEO Advanced Properties Ki ES M Transmit Check Character V Transmit Number System Digit Expand Version E Addenda Read 2 Digit Read 5 Digit Required v Insert Separator UPCE1 parameters set to match UPCEO Note The UPCEO and UPCE1 parameters are always set to match each other Therefore if a change is made to a parameter to either the EPCEO or UPCE1 Advanced Properties that same change is automatically made to the Advanced Properties for the other symbology Note UPCEO and UPCE1 are enabled as the same symbology at the scanner Therefore the only way for UPCE1 configuration to be used is if UPCEO is disabled When UPCE0 is disabled it is scanned by the imager but rejected by Data Collection Wedge Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is enabled Transmit number System Digit When enabled transmit the number system digit Default is enabled Expand Version E When enabled expand version E to 12 digit UPCA format Default is disabled Addenda Read 2 Digit When enabled transmit the 2 digit addenda Default is disabled Read 5 Digit When enable transmit the 5 digi
292. onclusion of each reboot Communication Start gt Programs gt Communication ActiveSync ActiveSync is pre loaded Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can copy files from your MX9 to a host computer and vice versa Once an ActiveSync relationship partnership has been established with Connect on a host computer ActiveSync will synchronize using the wireless link serial port or USB on the Mx9g Connect and HSM Connect or LXEConnect Upon cabling your MX9 to a host computer and ActiveSync on the host computer opens if the Connect or HSM Con nect or LXEConnect application does not open on your MX9 contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Start gt Programs gt Communication gt Start or Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu Summit Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Summit Use this option to set up radio client profiles The Summit Control Panel can also be accessed by doubletapping the Sum mit icon in the taskbar or on the desktop Certs The Certs option displays a readme file containing details on how the Summit Configuration Utility SCU handles cer tificates for WPA authentication Command Prompt Start gt Programs gt Command Prompt File Edit Help D Pocket CMD v 5 0 EZ Type help cmd at the command promp
293. ons that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users When the Menu check box is blank the EVIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable When the Status check box is enabled the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end user when they are navigating the Internet If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE or equivalent should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet check box Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode a password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured A password must be entered within 30 seconds and within three tries or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end user mode with the focus returned to the locked application Without entry of a valid password the switch into Administrator mode will not occur The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured When the valid password is entered the Administration panel is displayed When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the user is returned to the System Panel If a password
294. or which the data is being configured e Note that the Code ID if any are configured is ignored by this dialog regardless of the setting of Strip Code ID in the Symbologies dialog According to the sequence of events specified above the Code ID must not be included in the bar code data being matched because when the matching test occurs the Code ID has already been stripped If Strip Code ID is disabled then the bar code data to match must include the Code ID If Strip Code ID is enabled the data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped Add Prefix Suffix Control Note Non ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option Non ASCII equivalent keys include the function keys e g lt F1 gt arrow keys Page up Page down Home and End Add Prefix Suffix Use this option to specify a string of text hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning prefix or the end suffix of the bar code data Up to 19 characters can be included in the string The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding See Hat Encoding page 8 38 for a list of characters with their hex and hat encoded values Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values Add Prefix To enable a prefix check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox The default is disab
295. ore placing it into service again 13 24 Removing the MX9 from the Mounted Vehicle Cradle 1 Place one hand on the MX9 and press one of the release latches located on either side of the cradle docking bay 2 The MX9 disconnects from the cradle pins and springs forward 3 Grasp the MX9 and pull it up and out of the vehicle cradle disconnecting the MX9 I O port from the charge communication port at the base of the docking bay Powered Vehicle Cradle Help The following is intended as an aid in determining whether the MX9 or the vehicle mounted cradle may be malfunctioning Issue Solution MX9 docked in cradle MX9 I O port not fully connected to Reseat the MX9 fully into the docking bay but cannot work with communication charging port in accessory cables docking bay connected to cradle There are foreign objects inside Remove the foreign objects and reseat the MX9 in docking bay or cable connectors the docking bay MX9 docked in cradle MX9 not fully docked Check the docking bay is clear of foreign objects but Docked LED does and reseat the MX9 fully into the docking bay not light up Power supply not connected Check that power cable is securely connected to the Power Port at the rear of the cradle 13 25 13 26 Technical Specifications MX9 Specifications Processor Marvell PXA 320 806 MHz Memory 128MB on board RAM 128 on board Flash Expansion slots SD expansion slot for fl
296. osed loop fastener and hand strap base connection frequently If loose they must be tightened or replaced before the MX9 is placed into service again Attaching the Trigger Handle Pressing the trigger on the trigger handle activates the integrated scanner and functions the same as the Scan key on the keypad With the handle installed the Scan key on the keypad remains active The trigger duplicates the operation e The handle is built of a durable flexible plastic e The handle will not detach from the MX9 if the unit is dropped e The trigger handle is a mechanical device Battery or external A C power is not required for operation e The trigger handle does not need to be removed when replacing the main battery pack e The trigger handle might also be called a pistol grip Equipment needed Torque wrench capable of torquing to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m Either the trigger handle or the hand strap is attached not both Honeywell recommends that in the absence of a trigger handle the hand strap be used at all times Place the MX9 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface Remove the hand strap and hand strap base if installed Place the trigger base into the molded area on the back of the MX9 Ensure that the battery can be inserted into the battery compartment before securing the trigger handle in place Attach the trigger handle to the MX9 as shown above with the screws provided Torque the pan he
297. ot but are reconnected in other situations example return from out of range The pairing table is cleared on boot The status of Auto Reconnect on Boot is ignored and the option is automatically disabled unchecked and dimmed See Using OPP page 7 15 for instruction for the OPP Setup and OPP Send panels About This panel shows the Computer Friendly Name that other devices may discover during their Discovery and Query process the Bluetooth Client MAC address and software version levels The data cannot be edited by the user EZ Dar OPP Setup OPP Send About Friendly Name Bluetooth Address 00 40 FD 00 00 00 BTC version 1 0 BTDRPCESiKk Bluetooth Stack Revision 2 1 Bluetooth Radio HCI 2 12288 Bluetooth Radio LMP 2 16907 Copyright 2006 2011 LXE Inc The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc paiting label example Easy Pairing and Auto Reconnect The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the user taps the Discover button It can auto reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of range and then returned within range Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and auto reconnect events AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using the Bluetooth application nor does it stop othe
298. ot require cleaning unless it has become heavily soiled Old or damaged batteries should be disposed of promptly and properly The best way to dispose of used batteries is to recycle them Battery recycling facilities recover the Nickel Lithium or Lead from old batteries to manufacture new batteries Use only mild detergent with a slightly damp cloth to clean the outside of the battery Do not use solvents or flammable cleaners Allow the case to dry fully before using again Do not allow cleaning agents of any kind to contact the charging contacts they may be damaged If necessary clean them with a soft bristle dry brush or compressed air Storage Battery packs should be stored charging contact side up in a cool dry place protected from weather and airborne debris whenever possible Do not store battery packs in direct sunlight on a metal surface or anywhere the battery pack cannot cool down Do not leave the battery pack in a non operating charger The battery pack may discharge through the charger rather than hold its charge Battery packs may leak up to 1 mA current through the battery contacts when left in a non powered charger pocket Service There are no user serviceable parts in the Lithium lon Battery Pack Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for battery disposal and replacement options Using a Desktop Cradle Introduction Note When an external power supply is used to power this cradle the external power suppl
299. otherwise enter the User name 10 Enter the password 11 Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now 12 Tap OK then tap Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main Tab 10 26 13 See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 10 19 for more information on certificate storage 14 Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store 15 Return to the Credentials screen and enable the Validate server check box Credentials ei ES User Password Full trusted store l validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Tap the Use MS store check box The default is to use the Full Trusted Store CA cert 2 To select an individual certificate tap on the Browse button 3 Uncheck the Use full trusted store check box 4 Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box 3 Tap OK then tap Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP GTC for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associ ated after the radio connects to the network 10 27 WPA LEAP To use WPA LEAP make sure the following
300. ould allow only trusted Web sites to request a certificate for you Do you want to request a certificate now Yes No Potential Scripting iolation Saving a file into your local system could potentially violate scripting safety Do you want to create a private key user1key pyk Yes No 12 If any script notifications occur click the Yes button to continue the certificate request Create Private Key Password xj Key userl key pvk Password Confirm Password None Cancel 13 When prompted for the private key password e Click None if you do not wish to use a password or e Enter and confirm your desired password then click OK 10 42 Certificate Issued The certificate you requested was issued to you DER encoded or Base 64 encoded pss Download certificate cl Download certificate chain 14 Click the Download certificate link File Download Security Warning 15 Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process 16 Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file For example it the private key was saved as EUSER PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name for example EUSER CER 17 Install the user certificate 10 43 Instal
301. our host application is configured to listen on a specific port If not just use the default telnet port Select OK Select Session gt Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Tool Bar Upon a successful connection you should see the host application screen displayed To change options such as Display Colors Cursor Bar Code etc refer to these sections in the RFTerm Reference Guide for complete descriptions of these and other features Using the AppLock Switchpad Note The touch screen must be enabled Keyboard v RFTerm EXE v pword exe Switchpad Icon Switchpad Menu Click the switchpad icon in the taskbar A checkmark on the switchpad menu indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the MX9 user When Keyboard on the Switchpad Menu is selected the default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is activated Using the Keypad One switch key sequence or hotkey is defined by the Administrator for the end user to use when switching between locked applications This is known as the Activation key When the Activation key sequence is pressed on the keypad the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the background MX9 key presses affect the application in focus only Using the Touch Screen The fi
302. over Clear Button When the Clear button is tapped the Bluetooth client deletes all devices from the Device table that are not currently paired A dialog box is presented stating Delete all disconnected devices Tap the Yes button to remove disconnected or deleted devices from the device table The devices are removed from the Device table after any reboot sequence and when EZPair or LXEZ Pairing is re launched without rebooting Tap the No button to make no changes Discover Button When the Discover button is tapped the Bluetooth client discovers and displays all Bluetooth devices in the vicinity Blue tooth managed devices should be as close as possible in direct line of sight with the MX9 during the Discover process At the end of the Discover process and when Filtered Mode is disabled not checked serial Bluetooth devices as well as Bluetooth scanners and printers are displayed in the Device table When Filtered Mode is enabled checked only Blue tooth scanners and printers are displayed in the Device table Discovering 1 Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in the vicinity The Discovery process also que ries for the unique identifier of each device discovered EZ Pairi OKA Xx Discovering Bluetooth devices i amp amp D Clear Discover 2 Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier f
303. ower save off Maximum power saving mode and Fast power saving mode Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current regulatory domain Options are Maximum 50mW 30mW 20mW 10mW 5mW or 1mW Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the client device Options are Auto 1 Mbit 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 or 54 Mbit 802 11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point Options are Open LEAP or Shared key Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP type used for 802 1x authentication to the Access Point Options are None LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC or EAP TLS Note EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop up window Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data Available options may vary by SCU version Options are None WEP or Manual WEP WEP EAP or Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA CCKM WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM CKIP is not supported in the MX9 Note The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP Keys PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop up window 10 8 Parameter Default Radio Mode BG radio BG Rates Full Or A radio BGA Rates Full Explanation Specify 802 11a 802 11b and or 802 11g rates wh
304. pack for correct voltage and charge state During this time the LED is RED and is continuously ON After charging is complete the LED is GREEN Current could not be sourced through the battery pack due to age exhaustion or damage to the cell s Or The battery pack does not communicate with the charger The charger s timeout period has expired The battery pack is too hot or too cold to charge MX 9 not fully seated in cradle Foreign objects inside docking bay or cable connectors MX9 not fully docked Power supply not connected Solution Push battery pack in firmly Do not slam the battery pack into the battery well Replace battery pack Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for replacement options There is nothing wrong with the battery pack or charging pocket Contact Honeywell for battery pack replacement options Make sure that the battery pack temperature is within specification and retry charging If problem repeats contact Honeywell for battery pack replacement options Remove battery pack from the cradle and allow it to adjust to room temperature If the battery pack is left in the cradle it will cool down or warm to a temperature upon which the cradle will begin the charge cycle However depending on the temperature of the MX9 battery it may take 2 3 hours to adjust The battery pack can cool down faster if the battery is not in the battery well Reseat the MX9 fully into th
305. panies and are the property of their respective owners Patents For patent information please refer to www hsmpats com Table of Contents Chapter 1 MX9 Agency Compliance Laser Warnings wxsccdeevsvctesersesscueyevenedcecaesnaated beet weace e slesaci NEEE a KN a subs uadhdeue tase dedeeenecdeemeduncuees 1 1 Laser Label LOCA ss siccitessececcciued ial ceded hechcacestiacexeesaudacsceks a A 1 1 Laser Safety Statement zcesecscsiscecvvesdeeycivsiegeshcieeadegie ees raaa da aaia Edena E aAa ea anA 1 1 Chapter 2 Getting Started WU 2 1 ADOUt this e EE 2 1 OUT OT TNE Borren t seep hc Oey bake Ges edd satan ted obec ceva cit Ea E EEN e E 2 1 Initial Setup tor MX EE 2 1 HardWare Setup DE 2 1 Software SetU EE 2 2 L elle ET 2 3 OME EEN 2 3 G2 Koy Keypad DE 2 4 38 Koy Key Pa WEE 2 5 TOD E 2 5 BOUON EE 2 5 Back Battery Bayes ais desatetepcueehcesst cece aus dee sate th eee E EENS EEN eege 2 6 Tugger e le 2 6 Hand Strep DEE 2 7 End User License Agreement rececisassccvevaseecegueesnsceeetndunececvesbecucegnesvbesd dues REN d EE Eet deer d e dE 2 7 Inserting or Replacing the Battery Pack 2 7 insert Replace Battery ci ceczveestecesse cesdacavesst avodii fee ua aiaee veers see eeyeenee dark ERT eege de 2 7 Remove EE 2 8 Insert Battery in HaZLOG MX9 oseere N rR saint Aa Ea E ebe ege 2 8 Remove Battery from HaZLoc Man 2 8 Charging Recharging the Main Battery cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeceeeeesea
306. pening screen presents the MX9 user with the connection status and a navigation menu File View Help Update complete Update complete Note Some parameters and features described in this section may not be available until you are running the latest version of the Enabler File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Mobile Device Server The connection methods by default are wireless and COM connections Any updates available will be applied to the MX9 immediately upon a successful connection Scan Contig Scan Configuration feature not supported The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special bar code that can be created using the Avalanche MC Console utilities Refer to the Wave link Avalanche Mobility Center User Guide for details Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the MX9 user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings The Enabler control panel is by default password protected Input Settings Password Eal The default Settings password is system The password is not case sensitive Avalanche Update using File gt Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the MX9 Change the settings and then save the changes reboot before connecting to the network Alternatively the Mobile Device S
307. period mj Ajan Al ol gt Press these keys in this order ES sar RRE EE sr EE EE ser EIERE EE sr EE saer EIERE Bwe Im Il ES EIERE saer KAES Oranges oem 1 saer EISE EE sr EIERE Be fae o sm oeo TI Bwe fae O Bme p o Bme po o ome a o Result Notes l NI O oi By Of N 9 O0 zero Period Dash or minus sign Reverse Solidus or Backslash Solidus or Forward slash Left square bracket Left square bracket Right square bracket Right square bracket Acute sign or single quote or apostrophe Comma Semicolon Equal sign Exclamation mark Exclamation mark At sign At sign Number sign Number sign Dollar sign Dollar sign Percent sign Caret or circumflex Caret or circumflex Ampersand Asterisk Asterisk Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Double quote Curly left brace Curly right brace Vertical bar 11 14 To get this function Press these keys in this order Result Notes mw p _ UE Oene Deg aon Blue Plus sign Backspace Orange Underscore or horizontal bar 11 15 11 16 12 Battery Charger Unpacking your Battery Charger After you open the shipping carton containing the product take the following steps e Check for damage during shipment Report damage immediately to the carrier who delivered the carton e Make sure the items in the carton match your order e Sav
308. pon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the Switchpad accompanied by a check mark that indicates the application is currently active or available for Launching When an application name is tapped by the end user the application is launched if inactive and brought to the foreground Applications set up with Manual Launch enabled may or may not be launched at bootup This function is based on the application s Auto At Boot setting The applications have been listed as approved applications for end user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure The approved applications are listed on the Switchpad A check mark indi cates the applications active status When Manual Launch is disabled for an application and Allow Close is enabled for the application when the end user closes the specific application it is no longer available shown on the Switchpad When Auto At Boot and Manual Launch are both disabled for a specific application the application is 1 not placed on the list of approved applications for end user manual launch and 2 never launched and 3 not displayed on the Switchpad Match Default is blank Match is not used AppLock works by associating display windows with the launched process ID If an application uses different process IDs for windows it creates the Match field must be used Use the Match field to specify up to 32 characters of the class name for the application e DOS
309. ppercase Alpha toggle Back space Tab Backtab Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor Right Cursor Left Insert Insert Delete Home End Page up Page down F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 Press these keys in this order EE E 7 E SE Fe SEN sr E ES RER mell ege AB waww ooo E eeneg i e Des TI Bue Down Aron Be eter ome f o oms fs f Oane owr 1 one Lem Result Notes Alt mode Control mode Escape Space Enter Capslock is on or off Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Use the Keymap Control Panel to change default Shifted letter Back one space Tab Backtab Cursor up one line Cursor down one line Cursor right one space Cursor left one space Insert mode Insert mode Delete one character Home End Up 1 screen Down 1 screen F1 mode F2 mode F3 mode F4 mode F5 mode F6 mode F7 mode F8 mode F9 mode F10 mode F11 mode F12 mode F13 mode F14 mode F15 mode F16 mode F17 mode F18 mode F19 mode 11 2 To get this function F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Jjao gt oO aQa 0O o o x 29 0 53 3 10 z A Cl 7 I o TM OF Oo Di SY NI lt x se lt p Press these keys in this order e IER C E smo o fe E smo e o so o p oo SIE Al I ol Tm olol WD SP NIS lt x Ee lt c Result Notes F20 mode F21 mod
310. pplication launch will be retried if a failure occurs when the application is automati cally launched at bootup Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches The default is O retries Delay This timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected application when it is automatically launched at bootup Delay default is 10 seconds Valid values are between 0 seconds no delay and 999 seconds The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application it will be either a value specified by the Administrator or it will be the delay default value At startup when a delay has been assigned for each application AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second application to expire before launching the second application AppLock continues in this manner until all applications are launched Note A Global Delay can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application to be launched by lowest Order number and no delay 0 seconds for all other applications Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential Auto Re Launch Default is Enabled When enabled for a specific application automatically re launches
311. pplications menu bar the menu is cleared and nothing else happens the application remains active Nothing happens when the end user clicks on the Close icon on the application s title bar and the application remains active Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker Windows accelerator keys such as Alt F4 are disabled Passwords A password must be configured If the password is not configured a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password In addition to the Administrator hotkey press a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured If the configured hotkey is pressed the password prompt is displayed In this case the user has 30 seconds and within three attempts to enter a password If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end user mode All other si
312. quence box Tap OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control Note A key can only be used once in a multiple key sequence For example an F1 key added to a key sequence means an F1 key cannot be used again in the same key sequence Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values Up to 16 Unicode values may be specified for the key sequence The sequence can consist of keys and Unicode values 1 Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list ak wo ND O 8 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pulldown list Select Unicode from the Key Sequence pulldown list There are two Unicode text boxes located on the lower part of this tab Enter the Unicode value in the left textbox and the Unicode character is displayed in the right textbox Press the Add button to add the key to the multiple key sequence shown in the Key Sequence box Repeat steps 4 through 6 until all desired characters have been added to the key sequence If necessary use the Clear button to erase all entries in the Key Sequence box Tap OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap an Application oak Wn Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select Launch App1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Tap on the LaunchApp tab Make sure the EXE ra
313. r Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the MX9 while AppLock is in control Bluetooth Indicators The Bluetooth icon state and Bluetooth LED state change as Bluetooth devices are discovered paired connected and disconnected There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the Mx9 Taskbar Legend Icon O MX9 is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s MX9 is not connected to any Bluetooth device MX9 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device MX 9 is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the MX9 Bluetooth scan range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the MX9 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the Mx9 MX9 Bluetooth LED Legend Blue blinking slowly Bluetooth is active but not connected to a device Blue blinking medium Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Blue blinking fast Bluetooth is discovering other Bluetooth devices Off Bluetooth hardware has been turned off or does not exist in the MX9 AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using Bluetooth applications nor does it stop authorized Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the MX9 while AppLock is in control Bluetooth Bar Code Reader Setup Refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturer
314. r USB Client if this is the initial ActiveSync installation See Also Cold Boot and Loss of Host Reconnection Issue ActiveSync indicator on the host disc in the toolbar tray turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable before tapping the Connect icon or REPLLOG EXE in the Windows directory Solution One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port Issue ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins but connection never occurs Solution Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host Check that the correct connection is selected Serial or USB Client if this is the initial ActiveSync installation or Incorrect or broken data lines in cable Issue ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray Solutions Solution 1 ActiveSync icon on the PC does not turn green after connecting USB cable from MX9 1 Disconnect MX9 USB cable from PC 2 Suspend Resume or Restart the MX9 3 In ActiveSync gt File gt Connection Settings on PC disable Allow USB Connections and tap OK 4 Re enable Allow USB Connections on the PC and tap OK 5 Reconnect USB cable from MX9 to PC Solution 2 The host doesn t know you are trying to connect May mean a bad cable with no control lines connected or an incompatible baud rate Try the connection again with a known good cable
315. r desired key e When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys press the color key first then the rest of the key sequence e Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters Press the Shft key 62 Key Keypad page 2 4 or Shift key 38 Key Keypad page 2 5 then an alphabetic key for an uppercase letter Note In general sticky keys refer to those keys that when pressed once and released are still in effect and affect the function of the next key pressed 62 Key Keypad KeyMap The following keymap is used on an MX9 that is not running a Terminal Emulator Terminal emulators use a separate keymap A modifier key pressed after itself toggles that modifier key off Modifier keys pressed following any other modifier key clears earlier modifier keys Any key press other than the up arrow or down arrow exits the volume control and backlight control To get this function Press these keys in this order Result Notes Windows key CT ES Ir E Windows Start men On when OH Power rn Suspend toggle when On Power II Suspend or Resume mode Volume Up Volume increases Volume Up Volume increases Volume Down Volume decreases Volume Down Blue Volume decreases Display Backlight Lighter Backlight lighter Display Backlight Darker Backlight darker 11 1 To get this function Alt mode Ctl mode Escape Space Enter Capslock toggle Mapped Diamond 1 Key Mapped Diamond 2 Key U
316. r or another serial device Periodically test the connections for stability and re tighten if necessary Serial Interface 1 Align the RS232 serial cable end female carefully to the Serial Interface port male at the back of the cradle 2 Firmly press the ends together and finger tighten the screws on either side of the connector Test the connection for stability 3 Secure the cable to the cradle with the Vehicle Cradle Strain Relief Cable Clamp page 13 23 13 22 VO Port 1 Squeeze the clips next to the connector attached to the I O cable to open the catches in the connector 2 Firmly press the cable end female into the I O Port connector male at the back of the cradle Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability 3 Secure the cable to the cradle with the Vehicle Cradle Strain Relief Cable Clamp page 13 23 Vehicle Cradle Strain Relief Cable Clamp Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver not supplied by Honeywell There are two strain relief cable clamps secured to the back of the vehicle cradle They are located at the back of the cradle below the trigger handle opening 1 Remove the strain relief cable clamp from the back of the cradle by turning the screw counterclockwise Put the screw aside in a safe location 2 Slide the strain relief clamp over the cable 3 Using a Phillips screwdriver and the screw that was removed refasten the clamp holding the cable to t
317. railing e Barcode Data e Prefix Suffix Note When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Data Options tab and when All is selected in the Symbology field Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them to prevent deactivating the scanner completely When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed the settings in this dialog become the defaults used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies This is also true for Custom IDs where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user Note In Custom mode on the Data Options tab any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped because they will not be recognized as Code IDs If a specific symbology setting has been configured a star will appear next to it in the Symbology drop down box so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults If a particular symbology has been configured the entire set of parameters from that symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology In other words either the settings for the configured symbology will be used or the default settings are used not a combination of the two If a symbology has not been configured does not have an next to it the settings for All are used which is not necessarily the default 8 10 Enable Min Max Enable This checkbox enables checked or disables unchecked the sym
318. rated scan engine is a Symbol scan engine AIM IDs apply but Advanced properties do not and the Advanced button is not available Symbol Engine All Codabar Code11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 Discrete 2 of 5 EAN 128 Interleaved 2 of5 MSI Other PDF417 Plessey RSS14 UPC EAN The Data Collection Wedge does not manage mutually exclusive option selections The user is responsible for under standing the options that can co exist for the data collection device The documentation provided from the manufac turer of the scanner imager being managed describes the interaction between symbologies and their configurations HHP Symbologies Advanced properties are available when an integrated Hand Held Products imager is installed Advanced properties are applicable regardless of the ID type selected AIM or HHP HHP Hand Held Products Not all HHP symbologies have Advanced options Click the symbology link in the table below for the symbology Advanced options HHP Symbology All Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Plessey UPCA Aztec Composite ISBT 1 Posi UPCEO BPO Coupon Matrix 2 of 5 Postnet UPCE1 Codabar DataMatrix Maxicode QR CANPOST CodaBlock EAN8 Mesa RSS AUSPOST Code 11 EAN13 MicroPDF Strt25 JapanPost Code 32 EAN128 MSI Strt32 Planet Code 39 GenCode128 OCR Telepen DutchPost Code 49 IATA25 Other TLC ChinaPost Code 93 ID Tag PDF417 Trioptic39 Code16K
319. ration and operation of the MX9 Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit The examples found in this section are to be used as examples only the configuration of your specific MX9 computer may vary The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the MX9 and some of its optional features Operating System The MX9 operating system and revision level is displayed on the Desktop This is the default setting for the Windows CE Desktop Display Background Windows CE Operating System Note For general use instruction refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the MX9 This chapter assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the MX9 and its Windows CE environment General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts Use the keyboard shortcuts in the chart below to navigate with the MX9 keyboard These are standard keyboard shortcuts for Windows CE applications Press these keys To CTRL C Copy CTRL X Cut CTRL V Paste CTRL Z Undo DELETE Delete SHIFT with any of the arrow keys Select more than one item in a window or on the desktop or select text within a doc
320. ration bar code in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide For MX9 with Hand Held Products Decoding Engine Data Collection Wedge enables or disables the bar code at the imager as well as enabling or disabling the bar code processing in the Wedge software Data Collection OK ES Data Options Processing About L4 Enable Code ID None v Symbology Settings Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers HHP Properties Data Collection oki x Data Options Processing About Al Enable Code ID None sl Symbology Settings Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers Panel for a Hand Held Products scan engine Panel for Symbol scan engine The HHP Properties button is only present if the MX9 is equipped with a Hand Held products imager 1 Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop down box e None e AIM e Symbol e HHP e Custom 2 The Symbology screen is displayed Enable Code ID This parameter programs the internal scanner to transmit the specified Code ID and or determines the type of bar code identifier being processed If the scanner being configured is not an integrated scanner the scanner driver expects that the setting has been programmed into the scanner externally and that the data will be coming in with the specified Code ID attached Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all bar code symbologies not for an individual symbology
321. red when pairing connecting and disconnecting new Bluetooth bar code readers MX9 with Label If the MX9 has a Bluetooth address bar code label follow these steps 1 Scan the Bluetooth address bar code label attached to the MX9 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner 2 If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the MX9 Bluetooth label the devices are paired See Bluetooth Reader Beep and LED Indications page 7 14 If the devices do not pair successfully go to the next step 3 Open the LXEZ Pairing panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth 4 Tap Discover Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel 5 Double tap the stylus on the Bluetooth scanner The right mouse click menu appears 6 Select Pair as Scanner to pair the MX9 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner The devices are paired The Bluetooth bar code reader responds with a series of beeps and an LED flashes Note After scanning the MX9 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired MX9 without Label If the Bluetooth address bar code label does not exist follow these steps to create a unique Bluetooth address bar code for the MX9 1 First locate the MX9 Bluetooth client MAC address by opening the About tab 2 Next create a Bluetooth address bar code label for the MX9 Free bar code creation software is available for download on the World Wide Web Search usi
322. rol Panel gt Data Collection Set scanner imager keyboard wedge parameters enable or disable symbologies from being scanned scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Scanner parameters apply to the MX9 integrated scanner imager only Bar code manipulation parameters apply to bar codes scanned by the MX9 integrated scanner imager engine Scanner configuration can be changed using the Data Collection settings panels or via API functions While the changed configuration is being read the Scanner LED is solid amber The scanner is not operational during the configuration update The MX9 has one integrated bar code scanner imager port Only one scan engine is installed at a time Scan engines are not hot swappable The MX9 may have one of the following bar code scan engines e Symbol Short Range Laser Scanner 955 e Symbol Multi Range LORAX Laser 1524ER e Hand Held Products 2D Area Imager 5300 The integrated scan engine activates when the Scan button on the front of the MX9 is depressed or when the trigger on an installed trigger handle is depressed Symbol scanner Refer to the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide for instruction on configuring specific scanner imager parameters by using the MX9 to scan engine specific setup bar codes in the guide Hand Held Products HHP Imager Use the HHP Properties button on the Data Options tab
323. row keys to exit this mode At the minimum dimness level the display is still viewable The brightness setting is recalled upon a return from Suspend and also upon a warm reset boot Note The brightness of the keypad backlight is not affected by display brightness adjustments or the display brightness default setting Adjusting the Display Backlight Timer The backlight settings use the Honeywell set of default timeouts and are synchronized to the User Idle setting in the Schemes tab in the Power control panel When the backlight timer expires the display backlight is dimmed not turned off When both check boxes are unchecked the backlight never turns off or dims Default values are 3 seconds for Battery 2 minutes for External and both the check boxes are enabled When the keypad backlight is set to Follow the touch screen backlight the keypad backlight turns off when the touch screen backlight dims Applying the Touch Screen Protective Film First clean the touch screen of fingerprints lint particles dust and smudges Remove the protective film from its container Remove any protective backing from the film sheet by lifting the backing from a corner of the film Discard the backing Apply the film to the touch screen starting at one side and smoothing it across the display If air bubbles appear raise the film slightly and continue smoothing the film across the display until it covers the glass surface of the display If dust lint
324. rtificate store Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certificate store Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box 11 Some versions of the SCU require a User Cert password If this entry field is present enter the password for the user certificate in the User Cert pwd box 12 If there are no user certificates in the Windows certificate store generate and install a user certificate 13 See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 10 19 for more information on CA certificate storage 14 Tap the Validate server check box Credentials Gei A User user2 User Cert wae CA Cert Full trusted store aes Validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Tap the Use MS store check box The default is to use the Full Trusted Store 2 To select an individual certificate tap on the Browse button 3 Tap to uncheck the Use full trusted store check box 4 Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box Tap OK then tap Commit The MX9 should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP TLS for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and Wamboot The SCU Main tab s
325. ry if desired to make the CAB file auto launch at startup The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist as follows The main subkey is any text and is a description of the file Then 3 mandatory values are added FileName is the name of the CAB file with the path usually System Installed is a DWORD value of 0 which changes to 1 once auto launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed This will be the name of one of the files with path installed by the CAB file Since the CAB file installs into DRAM when memory is lost this file is lost and the CAB file must be reinstalled There are three optional fields that may be added 1 Order is used to force a sequence of events Order 0 is first and Order 99 is last Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass but not in a predictable sequence 2 Delay is used to add a delay after the item is loaded before the next is loaded The delay is given in seconds and defaults to 0 if not specified If the install fails or the file to be installed is not found the delay does not occur 3 PCMCIA is used to indicate that the file usually a CAB file being loaded is a radio driver and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded By default the PCMCIA slots are off on powerup to prevent the Unidenti fied PCMCIA Slot dialog from
326. s Scanner Pair as Scanner Pair as Printer Pair as Printer Delete Pair as Serial Device il las Pair as HID Device Pair as PAN Device PANU to NAP Pair as DUN Device Delete Properties Filtered Mode on Filtered Mode off Right Click Menu Options Pair as Scanner Receive data from the highlighted Bluetooth scanner or Bluetooth imager Pair as Printer Send data to the highlighted Bluetooth printer Pair as Serial Device Communicate with the highlighted serial Bluetooth device This option is available when Filtered Mode is disabled unchecked Pair as HID device Communicate with the highlighted HID Human Interface Device This option is available when Filtered Mode is disabled unchecked Pair as PAN Device PANU to NAP Communicate with the highlighted PAN Personal Area Networking device This option is available when Filtered Mode is disabled unchecked Pair as DUN Device Communicate with the highlighted DUN Dial Up Networking device This option is available when Filtered Mode is dis abled unchecked Disconnect Stop the connection between the MX9 and the highlighted paired Bluetooth device Delete Remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list The highlighted device name and identifier is removed from the MX9 Bluetooth Devices panel when the user taps the Clear button Properties View more information on the highlighted Bluetooth device Bluetooth Properties Bluetooth Properties ES
327. s User Guide it may be available on the manufacturer s web site Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for Bluetooth product assistance Introduction Honeywell supports several different types of bar code readers This section describes the interaction and setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the MX9 using Bluetooth functions Prerequisites e The MX9 must have the Bluetooth hardware and software installed An operating system upgrade may be required e If the MX9 has a Bluetooth address identifier bar code label affixed then Bluetooth hardware and software are installed e The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner laser imager battery is fully charged e The MX9 main battery is fully charged Alternatively the MX9 may be cabled to AC DC power e Important The bar code numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created or scanned with a Bluetooth scanner e Open the Bluetooth control panel or tap the Bluetooth icon LnkBO00440fd01020 Sa fd01020 Sample Locate the bar code label similar to the sample shown above attached to the MX9 The label is the Bluetooth address identifier for the MX9 The mobile Bluetooth scanner imager requires this information before discovering pairing connecting or disconnecting can occur The MX9 Bluetooth address identifier label should be protected from damage rips tears spills soiling erasure etc at all times It may be requi
328. s active For example if the Orange modifier state is active MX9 is currently in Orange mode pressing the Blue key cancels Orange mode and sets Blue mode active Once a modifier key is pressed the modifier map state continues until another key is pressed Modifier keys do not auto repeat Expansion Slots e Summit radio card e SIMM card es SD card The expansion slots in the MX9 are accessible via the hatch The hatch can be opened using a standard size screwdriver When the hatch is opened the MX9 automatically shuts down SD card configurations in 512MB 1GB and 4GB are available from Honeywell Note For best results save your changes then perform an orderly shutdown to preserve RAM contents before opening the hatch Power Key Functions The Power key is located at the bottom left of the keypad The Power On Off key is a momentary contact Function is as follows When the MX9 is in Pressing the Power key Off mode boots the unit and sets it to the On mode On mode sets the unit in Suspend mode Suspend mode sets the unit in On mode Critical Suspend mode has no effect Backlight off mode sets the unit in Suspend mode Status LEDs Several LEDs are located on the front of the MX9 above the integrated speaker They are e System Status SYS LED indicates power management status e Battery Charging Status BATT LED indicates main battery charging status e Alpha Mode Status ALPHA LED applies to the 38 k
329. s at the conclusion of the upgrade process Change Language during Upgrade Process When changing from one language to another during the upgrade process all files in the System folder will be deleted as the system is re partitioned and all system settings are cleared Parameters will need to be changed from factory defaults to your preferred values at the conclusion of the upgrade process Preparation e Contact Technical Assistance to get the OS upgrade files from Honeywell e Put the upgrade files on a PC with ActiveSync capability e Copy the upgrade files from the PC to a SD card e Use ActiveSync to backup MX9 user files and store them elsewhere before beginning an upgrade on the Mao e Always perform MX9 updates when it has a fully charged main battery and or a dependable external power source connected to the Mx9 e Removing or installing the SD card should be performed on a clean well lit surface Accessing the SD Card Slot Tools required standard size Phillips screwdriver not supplied by Honeywell The expansion slots in the MX9 are accessible via the hatch The hatch can be opened using a standard size screwdriver When the hatch is opened the MX9 automatically shuts down It is good practice to save any changes then perform an orderly shutdown to preserve RAM contents before opening the hatch When the hatch is open during this procedure do not remove any cables or allow them to kink 1 Summit radio card located in
330. s disabled Transmit When enabled the check character is transmitted Default is disabled Mesa Advanced Properties Mesa Advanced Properties Ki ES upca EANI3 Code39 Codei28 Interleave 2 of 5 Code93 UPCA When enabled decode UPCA Mesa Default is disabled EAN13 When enabled decode EAN 13 Mesa Default is disabled Code39 When enabled decode Code 39 Mesa Default is disabled Code128 When enabled decode Code 128 Mesa Default is disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 When enabled decode Interleaved 2 of 5 Mesa Default is disabled Code93 When enabled decode Code 93 Mesa Default is disabled When the Mesa symbology is chosen on the Symbology panel the Enable checkbox is checked the Advanced button must be clicked and the desired Mesa Advanced Properties sub symbology selected When Mesa is disabled on the Symbology panel the Enable checkbox is cleared click the Advanced button and uncheck all parameters or sub symbologies on the Mesa Advanced Properties panel Note The root symbology UPCA EAN13 Code39 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 and or Code 93 must be enabled before the matching enabled Mesa sub symbology will decode MSI Plessy Advanced Properties MSI Advanced Properties Ki EN Transmit Check Character Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is enabled OCR Properties Advance
331. s seaeeeseaeeescaeeeseeeeseaeeesenaeeee 5 13 Introductio saisai cee ec any cee sae ee EEE este eet ets ALAA DE EEA cee 5 13 Updates and Language Options eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneee eect eeeeeeeceeeeeseaaeeesaeeseaeesseaeeeseaeeeseeeesas 5 13 PO PAratiOns EEN DEER ee DEEN bases 5 13 Accessing the SD Card Glot 5 13 Pr ed re 2 02 vise sdece eee eee NEEN ee Dee EEN CERN ee cea eye ot EEN EES NeE 5 13 Upgrade Hel seuroina S T aa A R E A O e EE EES dene eevee 5 14 Battery State and OS Upgrade 5 14 Control Panel acs tre se a AAG ea eel ee fede Te iA otal ede aed Maa eget EA esau a 5 15 About e shiv O ey ae et cn lie 5 17 Version Tab and the Registry 0 cc cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeenaeeees 5 17 LANQUAGES EE 5 17 Identifying Software Versions sssesssesssitssirtesittsintsitttttnttitnttintertnstittstnnatnntetnn nenn nnenn nnna 5 17 MAG Address eg Seege Eden deed aE y a A S ideea aaa ee eee et eee eee 5 17 Lee 5 18 Battery occas ieee dies eel eerie e EES EEN SEENEN EE EE 5 19 Genificates EE 5 20 IRCH EE 5 21 Device MamagemMent cccceeessencceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaaeeeeeesaaeaeeseeaaaeseeesesaaeeeesesaaneeseeneeeneeeeesass 5 22 Dialing EE 5 22 BE HE weirs Si eee ee ee eee ee Ae A ee er 5 23 Background EE 5 23 ele ene 5 24 Backlight 2 1e5k geet DESS ank NENNEN AERSEEEE ENEE ENEE EE EEN 5 25 liegt EE 5 26 Internet Option isni esii a ania EENEG rea iiaa an t
332. s successful the mobile device is silent Keypad Control ei OK E KeyMap Launch pp RunCmd a cont IT o cma cma File Parm file parm The Run Cmd command is defined for use by system administrators These instructions call the ShellExecuteEx API which opens documents directly 1 Place the cursor in the text box next to the Cmd you wish to run e g Cmd1 Cmd2 2 Enable the file radio button and enter the name of the file 3 Enable the PARM radio button to add parameters for file exe execution in the same text box Tap the OK button when finished The changes take effect immediately License Viewer Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt License Viewer Use this option to view software license registration details and service contract length for a MX9 Information on the License Viewer tabs is unique for each MX9 Note Following image is a sample screen Your License Viewer control panel may show more tabs e g RFTerm depending on the number of software applications running on the MX9 that require a license License Viewer fra Ki A WaveLink Factory Enable Indicator Walid License TE WIB Date of Manufacture 7 14 2010 Service Contract Indicator 48 Months SIN GUID 4C320525 04F7 65C1 5E16 000000000000 Software and driver version information is located in the About control panel Copyright information is located in the System co
333. screen is tapped or the user browses away from the Diags tab The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box Diagnostics Button Also attempts to re connect to the wireless LAN However this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the Re connect option This data dump includes radio state profile settings global settings and a list of broadcast SSID APs Save To Button Use this to save the results of the diagnostics to a text file Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad 10 11 Global Tab The parameters on this panel can only be changed when an Admin is loggin in The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password Note Tap the Commit button to save changes If the panel is closed before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Setting Default Roam Trigger 65 dBm Roam Delta 5 dBm Roam Period BG 10 sec A 5 sec BG Channel Set Full DFS Channels Off Ad Hoc Channel 1 Aggressive Scan On CCX BG Off A Optimized WMM Off Auth Server Type 1 TTLS Inner Method Auto EAP PMK Caching Standard WAPI Off dimmed TX Diversity BG On A Main Only RX Diversity BG On Start on Main A Main Only Frag Threshold 2346 RTS Threshold 2347 LED Off Tray Icon On Hide Passwords On Admin Password SUMMIT or blank Auth Tim
334. seconds 15 seconds Battery Power Suspend Timeout 5 minutes AC Power User Idle Timeout AC Power System Idle Timeout AC Power Suspend Timeout 2 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes JOKE x Battery Schemes Device Status Power Properties Power Properties Dei Ki E Schemes Device Status Battery Power External D Backup battery Good Good Power Scheme R Battery Power sl Switch state to User Idle After 3 seconds sl Switch state to System Idle after 15 seconds sl Switch state to Suspend After 5 minutes sl Power Properties ka OK D Battery Schemes Device Status Power Level Device Name Windows ddi dll High D0 DSKO High D0 NDSO High D0 SDCCF10G1 High DO SMSC91181 High DO Because of the cumulative effect and using the Battery Power Scheme Defaults listed The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15 sec 3 sec And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity If the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes Regional and Language Settings Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on reg
335. sed when there are controllers The re authentication information cached on the controllers The client and the controller behind the AP use the cached information to perform the four way handshake to exchange keys If the selected PMK caching method is not supported by the network infrastructure every roam requires full 802 11X authentication including interaction with the ACS server If the active profile is using WPA2 CCKM the global PMK Caching setting is ignored and the client attempts to use CCKM Options are Standard OPMK Note e change does not take effect until after a Suspend Resume cycle Default is Off and dimmed cannot be changed 10 14 Parameter TX Diversity RX Diversity Frag Thresh RTS Thresh LED Tray Icon Hide Password Admin Password Default BG On Start on Main A Main Only 2346 2347 Off SUMMIT or Blank Function How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point Options are Main only use the main antenna only Aux only use the auxiliary antenna only or On use diversity or both antennas TX Diversity option should be set based on the antenna configuration as follows e Antenna Configuration A Main and BG Main TX Diversity Main e Antenna Configuration A Main and A Aux TX Diversity On e Antenna Configuration BG Main and BG Aux TX Diversity On How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets
336. self Note When Strip Code ID is enabled the entire custom Code ID string is stripped i e treated as a Code ID Name Add ID Code Clear All Note After adding changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list tap the OK button to save changes and return to the Barcode panel Name text box Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID Names must be unique from each other however the Name and ID Code may have the same value Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the cus tom Code ID in a user friendly manner Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list ID Code text box ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a bar code that acts as an identifier the actual Code ID Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list Custom ID Buttons Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace Whe
337. senaeeeneaeeees 8 26 UPCE1 Advanced Properties ccccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeeseaeeeneaeeee 8 27 HHP ei ele 8 28 Ctrl Char Mapping cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeceaeeeseaeeescaeeeseeeeseneeeseiaeeeeeaeeee 8 30 RH E UE 8 30 Custom IDentifiers AAA 8 31 Control Code Replacement Examples A 8 32 Bar Code Processing Examples ssssesssessrtssiresirtstknttiittttrnttinntinnetitnnntstnnstnnnatnnnennnnenn 8 33 Length Based Bar Code Stripping ccccccececeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeseaaeeseaeeesseeeseieeeeseaeeseees 8 34 Procesno leben ee dee EE de 8 36 About Tabuen EENS debater av areal ah a eaves loins 8 37 e gue eie et EE 8 38 Chapter 9 Enabler Installation and Configuration INThODUCTION sieneen ee hr ean eaae viene ite en dee eek ated eee 9 1 Installati n Ee 9 1 Installing the Enabler ccic vie eieiecs nec ite aed reve ieee De thee cede need ee NENNEN 9 1 Enabler Uninstall Process uk 9 2 Stop the Enabler Service A 9 2 Update Monitoring Overview cccccccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeceeaeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseeaeeesaaeeseaaeesesaeeseeaeeeseneeeneas 9 2 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeeteaeeess 9 2 Preparing a Device for Remote Management 9 3 User internate Ae ieee eine dened NENNEN ieee tie Ladies fie elie diene 9 4 Enabler Configuration cccc
338. splays a prompt for the PIN or passcode Maximum encryption is 128 bit Encryption is based on the length of the user passcode Bluetooth device connection supported on the MX9 includes e Bluetooth scanners imagers e Zebra printer models e Honeywell Back of Hand Scanner Bluetooth devices can be paired and managed using the Bluetooth control panel Bar code data captured by a mobile Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the MX9 Data Collection panel Multiple beeps may be heard during a bar code scan using the mobile Bluetooth scanner beeps from the mobile Bluetooth scanner as the bar code data is accepted rejected and other beeps from the MX9 during final bar code data manipulation ALPHA BATT sole E ESC ALPHA CTRL ALT 62 Key Keypad 38 Key Keypad The MX9 keypad is either a 62 key full alphanumeric keypad or 38 key numeric alpha The 62 key keypad has an ANSI or a 5250 overlay KeyMaps page 11 1 are available for all keypads Note The keypad backlight default setting is to follow the display backlight setting until it is changed by the user Modifier Keys The orange and blue modifier keys are located at the bottom of the keypad The Orange and Blue keys do not need to be held down while another key is pressed A modifier key pressed after itself toggles that modifier mode off A modifier keypress cancels the other modifiers active state Then the state of the modifier key that was pressed last become
339. ssistance for software updates and CAB files as they are released Software Applications The following applications are included e WordPad e Data Collection Wedge bar code result manipulation e ActiveSync e Transcriber e Internet Explorer Bluetooth Optional Only installed on a Bluetooth equipped MX9 The System Administrator can Discover and Pair targeted Bluetooth devices for each MX9 The System Administrator can enable disable Bluetooth settings and assign a Computer Friendly name for each MX9 The Bluetooth control panel can also be accessed by double tapping the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop RFTerm Optional RF Term is installed by Honeywell when ordered The application can also be accessed by double tapping the RFTerm desktop icon or by running the RFTerm application in the Programs folder Avalanche The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the MX9 by Honeywell however the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used Following installation the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler will be an auto launch application This behavior can be mod ified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface Software Development The CE API Programming Guide documents unique API calls for the MX9 It is intended as an addition to Microsoft Win dows CE AP
340. st CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL 4 Click the Request a certificate link 10 39 Microsoft Certificate Services Request a Certificate Select the certificate type User Certificate Or submit an advanced certificate request 5 Click on the advanced certificate request link Microsoft Certificate 5 Advanced Certificate Request The policy of the CA determines the types of certificates you can request Click one of the following options to Create and submit a request to this CA Submit a certificate request by using a base 64 encoded CMC or PKCS 10 file or submit a renewal request by using a base 64 encoded PKCS 7 file Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user by using the smart card certificate enrollment station Note You must have an enrollment agent certificate to submit a request on of another user 6 Click on the Create and submit a request to this CA link 10 40 Microsoft Certificate Services Advanced Certificate Request Certificate Template User v Key Options Create new key set O Use existing key set CSP Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 ze Key
341. still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified applications are automatically launched in the specified order and run in full screen mode when the MX9 boots up When the mobile device is reset to factory default values for example after a cold reset the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters The assumption in this chapter is that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator MX9 AppLock is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administration Note AppLock Administrator panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other System Panels Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application see Auto Re Launch which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker Setup a New Device Prerequisites e An MX9 default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is assigned e The touch panel must be enabled Refer to the MX9WM Options control panel Touch Screen Disable setting If the Touch Screen Disable option
342. strap and stylus Configured with battery scanner Bluetooth 802 11x radio trigger handle and stylus 9 94 in 25 2 cm 3 87 in 9 8 cm 2 67 in 6 8 cm 2 94 in 7 5 cm 1 78 in 4 5 cm 34 75 oz 9 85 kg 30 6 oz 87 kg 37 83 oz 1 072 kg 14 1 MX9 Environmental Specifications Standard Operating Temperature 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C non condensing Freezer Operating Temperature 22 F to 140 F 30 C to 60 C with heater or other additions as required Storage Temperature 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C non condensing Operating Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing This does not apply to cold storage areas where condensation will appear Water and Dust IEC 60529 compliant to IP67 Vibration Based on MIL Std 810D Bluetooth Range 32 8 feet 10 meters Direct line of sight only Main Battery Technical Specifications Do not store MX9 batteries above 140 F 60 C for extended periods Standard Battery Operating Temperature Range 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F non condensing Standard Battery Storage Temperature Range 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F to non condensing Low Temperature Battery Operating Temperature Range 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F non condensing Low Temperature Battery Storage Temperature Range 30 C to 70 C 22 F to 158 F non condensing Operating Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing at 40 C 104 F Ingress Protection Enclosure Rating Compliant to
343. t PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time USB synchronization will start automatically when the cable is connected not requiring you to select Connect from the Start menu Disconnect Depending on the type of connection follow the instructions below to disconnect the MX9 from the host and close ActiveSync USB Connection 1 Disconnect the cable from the MX9 2 Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar 3 Tap the Disconnect button IMPORTANT DO NOT PUT THE MX9 IN SUSPEND WHILE CONNECTED VIA USB The device will be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation Serial Connection 1 Disconnect the cable from the MX9 2 Put the mobile device into Suspend 3 Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar 4 Tap the Disconnect button Network Connection 1 Put the MX9 into Suspend 2 Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar 3 Tap the Disconnect button ActiveSync Help Issue ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect but it cannot identify it Solution One or more control lines are not connected This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port If the MX9 is connected to a PC by a cable disconnect the cable from the MX9 and reconnect it again Check that the correct connection is selected Serial o
344. t addenda Default is disabled Required When enabled only transmit bar codes with a 2 or 5 digit addenda Default is enabled Insert Separator When enabled insert a space between the code and addenda Default is disabled UPCE1 Advanced Properties UPCE1 Advanced Properties Ki ES M Transmit Check Character V Transmit Number System Digit Expand Version E Addenda Read 2 Digit Read 5 Digit Required Vv Insert Separator UPCEO parameters set to match UPCE1 Note The UPCEO and UPCE1 parameters are always set to match each other Therefore if a change is made to a parameter to either the EPCEO or UPCE1 Advanced Properties that same change is automatically made to the Advanced Properties for the other symbology Note UPCEO and UPCE1 are enabled as the same symbology at the scanner Therefore the only way for UPCE1 configuration to be used is if UPCEO is disabled When UPCE0 is disabled it is scanned by the imager but rejected by Data Collection Wedge Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is enabled Transmit number System Digit When enabled transmit the number system digit Default is enabled Expand Version E When enabled expand version E to 12 digit UPCA format Default is disabled Addenda Read 2 Digit When enabled transmit the 2 digit addenda Default is disabled Read 5 Digit When enable transmit the 5 digit addenda
345. t of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value Each time a Symbology is changed the settings are saved as soon as ok is clicked Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop down list Symbology Ki ES Code ID JAIM Symbology fall D Enable Min fi Max fall Stri E fo Code ID IT Trailing fo Barcode Data Symbology Ki E Code ID JAIM v Symbology All Suffix Suffix Clear Button This button will erase any programmed overrides returning to the default settings for the selected symbology If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology a confirmation dialog appears Tap the Yes button and all symbol ogies are reset to their factory defaults and all star indications are removed from the list of Symbologies Advanced Button If there are advanced configuration options for the selected symbology an Advanced button is displayed in the lower right corner of the panel Not all bar code symbologies have configuration parameters so the Advanced button is not present for all symbologies Because the Hand Held Products imager does not support configuration bar codes the Advanced function allows configu ration parameters to be set for many of the supported bar codes Processing Order The order in which these settings are processed are e Min Max e Code ID e Leading T
346. t the Power key e Incoming data through scanner port e Touch screen tap e Trigger pull The user is presented with a Power applet in the Control Panel One tab in the applet Schemes is designated for the power management timeouts This tab displays three transition states User Idle System Idle and Suspend Additionally the OS provides a Backlight tab on the Display control panel The Backlight tab allows the user to select the same timeout ranges provided by the User Idle scheme timers Any changes on the Display gt Backlight tab will also change the Power gt Schemes gt User Idle timer and vice versa The backlight for the keypad if enabled will always follow the display backlight User Idle When transitioning from the On power state to the User Idle power state the keypad backlight if enabled is dimmed and the display backlight is dimmed User Activity Events listed below will transition the system back to the On state User Idle timers are set using Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power gt Schemes tab Only interrupts classified as System Activity events will keep the MX9 awake in this state until a deliberate user action to put the unit into Suspend or power Off occurs An event must be specifically coded to wake up from this state The following User Activity events DO transition the unit from the User Idle state to On state Note These items are not configurable selections e Any key on the keypad except t
347. t the same as the panels presented in this section Setting Discovered Devices Settings Computer is connectable Computer is discoverable Continuous search Filtered Mode Printer Port on COM9 Logging Computer Friendly Name Reconnect Report lost connection Report when reconnected Report failure to reconnect Clear Pairing Table on boot Auto Reconnect on Boot Auto Reconnect OPP Setup Inbox Outbox Write Capable Enable Notifications Disable EZPair OPP Bluetooth button Toggle client On Off Prompt if devices request to pair Default None Bluetooth client is On Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled unchecked by default in both Filtered and Non Filtered Modes The option is dimmed in Non Filtered Mode Disabled System Device Name Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled My Device My Documents DefaultInbox My Device My Documents DefaultOutbox Enabled Enabled Unchecked OPP is enabled Bluetooth icon at the bottom of the Today or desktop panel state and Bluetooth device icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered paired connected and disconnected There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the MX9 The MX9 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is discoverable option is disabled unchecked on the Settings panel Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up
348. t to view valid Pocket PC Console commands Exit the command prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or tap File gt Close eXpress Scan The eXpress Scan utility allows an administrator to scan bar codes to provide the initial network and Avalanche Mobile Device Server address configuration This eliminates the need to edit radio parameters manually on the MX9 eXpress Scan uses bar codes created with eXpress Config Internet Explorer Start gt Programs gt Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help Microsoft WordPad Start gt Programs gt Microsoft WordPad Create and edit documents and templates in WordPad using buttons and menu commands that are similar to those used in the desktop PC version of Microsoft WordPad By default WordPad files are saved as PWD files Documents can be saved in other formats e g RTF or DOC Tap the button to access WordPad Help Remote Desktop Connection Start gt Programs gt Remote Desktop There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop options If installed Remote Desktop on the MX9 can be accessed by Start gt Programs gt Remote Desktop Select a
349. tached handle is pressed scan in progress or when the scanner imager engine parameters have been changed and the changes are being saved writing to scan engine While the changes are being saved the scanner imager is inoperable e The MX9 Scan Status LED does not illuminate when the Scan button is pressed on a scanner cabled to the MX9 or cabled to an MX9 cradle communication port The Scan LED on the cabled scanner imager illuminates e The MX9 Scan Status LED does not illuminate when the Scan button is pressed on a wireless Bluetooth mobile scanner paired with the MX9 The Scan LED on the wireless Bluetooth mobile scanner imager illuminates Note A scanned bar code can be accepted as a good scan or a bad scan by the MX9 bar code decoder as configured The appropriate audible or tactile indicator is activated Note The result of the host processing as configured of the good scan bar code data can indicate either accept or reject If rejected a bad scan indicator is activated if the host process has been configured to indicate audible or tactile accept or reject Cold Storage When the MX9 has been configured as a cold storage or low temperature device it has a snowflake decal between the touch screen and the keypad The MX9 with its special low temperature battery and condensation controlling heaters is designed specifically for use in freezers and refrigerator environments including transitioning between the two Heating Elements
350. takes precedence over Leading and Trailing Barcode Data stripping is performed last Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added so does not affect them Stri Leading f V Code ID Trailing f Barcode Data If the total number of characters being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the collected data it becomes a zero byte data string If in addition Strip Code ID is enabled and no prefix or suffix is configured the processing will return a zero byte data packet which will be rejected The operation of each type of stripping is defined below Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the collected data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This action is disabled by default Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the collected data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This action is disabled by default Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code ID specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Data Options tab By default Code ID stripping is enabled for every symbology meaning code IDs will be stripped unless specifically configured other wise Barcode Data Match List The Barcode Data panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the bar code Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button The e
351. tch between applications the default Activation key is Ctrl Spc The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications End User Internet Explorer EUIE AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorers address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode End user Internet Explorer EVIE EXE The EVIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet check box in the Application tab of the Administrator applet The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box When the Internet check box is enabled the Menu and Status check boxes are available Enabling the Menu check box displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like Back Forward Home Refresh etc functi
352. ted to 5 VDC Only approved cables are to be used for communication between the cradle and external devices 14 4 Desktop Cradle Technical Specifications Weight Dimensions Temperature Operating Charging Storage Humidity IEC 60529 Ports 18 oz 500 grams H 4 in x W 5 25 in x L 7 5 in 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C charger On no charging in progress 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C charger On no charging in progress 50 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C spare battery charger is charging 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 90 non condensing at 104 F 40 C Compliant to IP40 Power Serial Headset Audio USB A and USB B Ethernet Battery Charger Technical Specifications Note Battery packs may leak up to 1mA current through the battery contacts when left in an unpowered battery charger charging pocket Do not store MX9 batteries above 140 F 60 C for extended periods Standard Battery Li lon 3 9A 2400mAh battery with a 500 charge discharge life cycle LowTemp Battery Li lon 3 9A 2200mAh battery with a 500 charge discharge life cycle Electrical Parameter Power Supply Input Voltage V AC IN 100 VAC 240VAC Auto switching Power Supply Input Frequency eq Power Supply Output Voltage 15 VDC Ps 3 3A Minimum Maximum Note Rated Output Power 50 watts Temperature Function Minimum Maximum Note Operating 0 C 32 F 40 C Battery packs will o
353. ted with eXpress Config RFTerm shortcut RFTerm is an optional terminal emulation program for Honeywell devices with a Windows operating System When RF Term is installed this icon is displayed on the desktop d evuelslel A shortcut to the Remote Desktop Connection utility SH el Avalanche shortcut Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center Avalanche MC is a remote client management system that is designed to distribute software and configuration updates to monitored devices including computers with Microsoft Windows CE The enabler for Wavelink Avalanche is loaded on the device but not installed When the enabler is installed this icon is displayed on the desktop Shortcut to the demo version of Wavelink Telnet CE Contact Technical Assistance for licensing information When installed license details are maintained in the Wavelink tab in the License Viewer control panel gt gt k H Start button Access programs select from the Favorites listing documents last worked on change view settings for the control panel or taskbar on line help or run programs E Taskbar Sal am pu 2 The number and type of icons displayed are based on the device type installed options and MX9 configuration My Device Folders Folder Description Preserved upon Reboot Soe Yes Storage Card or SD Card Yes Terp Re Windows Operating System in Secure Storage No Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional Note Ifthe us
354. tener by using the keypad or by changing parameters in a control panel Using the Keypad Note Speaker sounds must be enabled before the following key sequences can adjust the volume The volume is increased or decreased one step each time the volume key sequence is pressed To adjust speaker volume e Blue V Up Arrow and Blue V Down Arrow keys on the 62 key keypad e Orange Scan Up Arrow and Orange Scan Down Arrow keys on either keypad e Press any key except the keys you used to adjust the volume to exit Volume control using a keypad key press has six volume settings that match those supported by the control panel Volume does not roll over from minimum to maximum or from maximum to minimum Continuously holding down the up or down arrow keys does not cause an automatic repeat of the up or down arrow key Using a Control Panel Tap Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Volume amp Sounds gt Volume tab Change the volume setting and tap OK to save the change You can also select deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft the MX9 emits a tone each time the volume increases or decreases Body Worn Accessories Protect the Touch Screen when using a Holster Carrycase Holster without Handle The MX9 is inserted upside down in the holster with the touch screen facing the belt connecting the holster to the body
355. ter Required When enabled the check character is required Default is disabled Transmit When enabled the check character is transmitted Default is disabled Start Stop Character Transmit When enabled the start stop characters are transmitted Default is disabled Code 11 Advanced Properties Code11 Advanced Proper Ki Gei Check Digits Required Check Digits Required When enabled only bar codes with two check digits are decoded The default is disabled Code 39 Advanced Properties Code39 Advanced Proper Ki ES Check Character Required IT Transmit Transmit Start f Stop Character Full ASCII IT Append Check Character Required When enabled the check character is required Default is disabled Transmit When enabled the check character is transmitted Default is disabled Transmit Start Stop Character When enabled the start stop characters are transmitted Default is disabled Full ASCII When enabled full ASCII interpretation is used Default is disabled Append When enabled append and buffer codes that start with a space Default is disabled EAN 8 Advanced Properties EANS Advanced Properties Ki ES M Transmit Check Character Addenda Read 2 Digit Read 5 Digit Required M Insert Separator Transmit Check Character When enabled transmit the check character Default is enabled
356. tery Warning appears the Status LED remains a steady red perform an orderly shut down minimizing the opera tion of any installed devices and insuring any information is saved that should be saved Super cap Internal Battery The MX9 has an internal battery that is designed to provide limited duration electrical power in the event of main battery failure The energy needed to maintain the internal battery near full charge at all times is drawn from the MX9 main battery It takes 5 minutes or less to fully charge the internal battery The duration of internal battery life is dependent upon opera tion of the MX9 its features and any operating applications The internal battery has a minimum service life of two years The Super cap internal battery is replaced by Honeywell Handling Batteries Safely e Never dispose of a battery in a fire This may cause an explosion e Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack e Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell e Becareful when handling any battery If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not attempt to charge it Dispose of it using proper procedures Caution Nickel based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin eyes etc Leakage from cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur In this event rinse the affected area thoroughly with water If the solution contacts the eyes get immediate medical attention NiMH and Li lon batteries are c
357. the MX9 Note An uninterrupted external power source wall AC adapters transfers power to the computer s internal charging circuitry which in turn recharges the main battery and internal battery Frequent connection to an external power source if feasible is recommended to maintain internal battery charge status as the internal battery cannot be recharged by a dead or missing main battery LEDs Backlights and Indicators Status LEDs Several LEDs are located on the front of the MX9 above the speaker They are e System Status SYS LED indicates power management status far left LED e Battery Charging Status BATT LED indicates main battery charging status far right LED e Alpha Mode Status LED applies to the 38 key keypad only LED is next to SYS LED e Bluetooth Status LED applies to Bluetooth client functions LED is next to BATT LED System Status LED Blinking Red Battery power fail critical suspend Solid Red Yellow Amber Initial few seconds when Power key is pressed Main battery low Battery Charging Status LED Off No battery no AC power battery pack not plugged in or no AC power applied Flashing Red Fault battery pack fault or failure Yellow Amber Standby battery pack temperature out of range Red Charging battery pack charging icon on touch screen Green Charged battery pack fully charged Connected to external power Alpha mode Status LED e Green when in alpha mode 38 key ke
358. the Mobile Device Server occurs a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can wakeup and process updates Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile Device Server Require external power Only connect when the mobile device has external power Use relative offset Dimmed Data Avalanche Update Settings oK Gi Data Preferences Display Taskb 4 D Real time Statistics Network LAN Wifi Report fi hour s v After Server Retransmit Contact Restrict Bandwidth to User Idle Time Idle Timeout F minute ES The Data tab controls when data is transferred between the MX9 and the Mobile Device Server Transfer Data When Device is Idle When enabled periodic updates from the Mobile Device Server are postponed until the MX9 has been idle for the specified period of time The default is disabled Idle timeout Specify the length of time the device must be idle before a periodic update can run used when the parameter above is enabled Real time Statistics When checked the statistics are transmitted over the network by the Enabler Report Specifies the Report Interval how frequently the Enabler reports statistics to the Mobile Device Server Retransmit After Server Contact Specifies if the device sends statistics to the Mobile Device Server immediately following a connection to the server Preferences For best results use AppLock page 6 1 to manage the task
359. the back half of the MX9 assembly 2 SIMM card located in the front half of the MX9 assembly 3 SD card located in the front half of the MX9 assembly Procedure While the hatch is open slide the installed SD card out of the slot The MX9 may not have a SD card in the slot because the OS is in flash 1 Place the card with the new image files on it into the SD slot The label on the SD card should be facing up 2 Close the hatch When the hatch is being closed carefully move cables and wires back into the cavity before securing the hatch Before securing the hatch completely examine the seam between the front and back half of the MX9 If the gasket is off center loosen the screws a little adjust the gasket and re tighten the screws 3 Press the Power button to turn the MX9 on 4 The update run file in My Device gt Storage Card automatically launches 5 Important If a failure occurs during the update DO NOT RESTART or coldboot Follow the instructions on the screen to Exit the update utility then restart the update utility 6 Do not touch the device until the install update is complete 7 When the process is finished remove the SD card following the instructions in Accessing the SD Card Slot 8 When finished press the Power button Check the OS update version by viewing the About or About Info or About LXE panels Note Ifthe application displays Update OS Image Failed or Update Boot Loader Image
360. thod used 11 The sign on screen is displayed after a reboot Note See Configuring Profiles page 10 21 for more details If a user enters invalid credentials and taps OK the device associates but does not authenticate The user is again prompted to enter credentials If the user taps the Cancel button the device does not associate The user is not prompted again for credentials until e the device is rebooted e the radio is disabled then enabled e the Reconnect button on the Diags Tab is tapped or e the profile is modified and the Commit button is tapped 10 18 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path Note It is important that all dates are correct on the MX9 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail User Certificates EAP TLS authentication requires a user certificate The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store e To generate the user certificate see Generating a User Certificate page 10 38 e To import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store see Installing a User Certificate page 10 44 es A Root CA certificate is also needed Refer to the section below Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for EAP TLS PEAP GTC and PEAP MSCHAP Two options are offered for storing these certificates e Imported into the Windows certificate store e Copi
361. through AD Hat Desired Ex E e EN ep E BEL oxn e PS xos H IF Lou y WE oxo o O Dagorn oxu Q s o o BCEE Esc Lem LGS om 5 LS xe n us oxiF Underscore Gre RE EC BECH ooo EC ee OE Encoded Olau ulol ho eo T sl COlvdlcclclenle J mm i 5 p 1 el LAA bid elle e PM APC y TT T7 Jast y AD Hat Encoded Characters Hex AE through FF Desired Gil mijm Kill H CH mimo D Enabler Installation and Configuration Introduction This section discusses Honeywell supported features with Wavelink Avalanche Mobile Device Servers This section is split into three basic areas e Installation e User Interface e Enabler Configuration Installation To use the Wavelink Avalanche MC System the following items are required e A desktop or laptop PC on which to install the Avalanche MC Console e Adesktop or laptop PC on which to install the Avalanche Mobile Device Server this can be the same PC where the Avalanche MC Console is installed e Wavelink Avalanche MC Console 4 2 or later e A Wavelink Device License for each client device To use Avalanche Remote Control the follow additional items are required e Wavelink Remote Control plug in 2 0 or later e A Wavelink Remote Control License for each client device Installing the Enabler Supported devices have the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on th
362. to access COM1 COM2 and COMB Agent not found will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a serial port is not present or available COM port settings can be verified using bar code wedge panels on the MX9 The wireless connection is made using the default wireless radio interface on the mobile device therefore the MX9 must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed If a Mobile Device Server is found the Enabler automatically attempts to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile The Enabler also automatically downloads and processes all available packages If the Enabler does not automatically detect the Mobile Device Server the IP address of the Mobile Device Server can be entered on the Connect tab of the Enabler setup See Enabler Configuration page 9 4 for details Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established the MX9 Enabler attempts to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche MC Console The default Enabler adapter control settings are e Manage network settings enabled e Use Avalanche network profile enabled e Manage wireless settings disabled for Windows CE devices
363. to the OS image The languages built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab e English only No additional languages are built into the OS e Japanese e Simplified Chinese e Traditional Chinese e Korean The above listed Asian languages are ordered separately and built in to the OS image Built in languages are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup Thai Hebrew Arabic and Cyrillic Russian languages are available in the English only default extended fonts Identifying Software Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed Not all installed software is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the MX9 The Image line displays the revision of the system software installed Refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the network card Accessibility Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Accessibility Customize the way the MX9 keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sounds function There are a few changes from general Windows desktop Accessibility options Note The keypad StickyKeys and StickyKeys Settings on the Keyboard panel are disabled as this setting when enabled interferes with Honeywell s assigned sticky key implementation The following exceptions are due to a limitat
364. trical system as directed below Caution For battery powered vehicles VIN is connected to battery positive A ViN must be connected to battery negative is must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles VIN is connected to battery positive ViN is connected to battery negative 777 is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative 13 While observing the fuse requirements specified above connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle When available always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel after providing proper fusing ATTENTION For uninterrupted power electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle 14 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG 1mm conductors 15 Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket 13 17 DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Top of Lid For use with Honeywell power supplies e 9000301PWRSPLY Power Supply 18 60VDC with cabl
365. ts charge Note Battery packs may leak up to 1 mA current through the battery contacts when left in a non powered charger pocket Service There are no user serviceable parts in the Lithium lon Battery Pack Contact Customer Support page 15 1 for battery dis posal and replacement options 12 8 13 Cradles Unpacking your Cradles After you open the shipping carton containing the product take the following steps e Check for damage during shipment Report damage immediately to the carrier who delivered the carton e Make sure the items in the carton match your order e Save the shipping container for later storage or shipping Communication cables and power cables are ordered separately Overview This chapter provides instruction for the end user installer or system administrator to follow when setting up or using MX9 cradles Two cradles are available e A desktop cradle that secures the MX9 recharges batteries and enables communications between the MX9 and another device See Using a Desktop Cradle page 13 3 e A powered vehicle mount cradle that secures the MX9 isolates it from shock and vibration and recharges the battery See Using a Powered Vehicle Cradle page 13 11 MX9 cradles are not certified for use in hazardous locations The MX9 must have a main battery installed when it is docked in a cradle Wireless host client communications can occur whether the cradle is receiving external power or not as w
366. tuations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt this is because the other situations result in invalid end user operation These situations include e f inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator i e an application is specified that does not exist e Ifthe application name which is mandatory for end user mode is missing in the configuration e Invalid installation of AppLock eg missing DLLs e Corrupted registry settings To summarize if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered AppLock Password Help Contact Technical Assistance page 15 1 for help when troubleshooting passwords End User Switching Technique Keyboard v RFTerm EXE v pword exe A checkmark in the switchpad menu see image above indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user When Keyboard is selected the MX9 default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is activated The check to the left of the application name indicates that the application is active If the application is listed but does not have a checkmark to the left of the application name this means the application is configured in AppLock and can be manually launched by tapping on the application name in the list Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end user
367. tween the MX9 and a nearby desktop laptop computer Setting Default Enable direct connection Enabled Connect using USB Client PC Connection Proper Gei OK E PC Connection V Enable direct connections to the desktop computer When enabled connect to the desktop computer using USB Client Change Connection Warning Changing the connection may disable communications with your desktop computer Unchecking the Enable direct connections check box disables ActiveSync on the MX9 Tap the Change Connection button to change the direct connect setting Tap the drop down box to view a list of pre configured connection settings Peripherals Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Peripherals These panels are used to enable and disable the touch screen and scanner window heaters and they are also used to set the time limit for the flashlight Using the GPS tab power to the GPS can be toggled on or off Setting Default Heaters Touch screen heater Enabled Scanner window heater Enabled Flashlight GPS GPS Power ON when installed OFF when not installed Heaters Tab Note Setting has no effect if the heater is not installed Peripherals EX OK D Heaters Flashlight GPS Touch Screen Heater Enabled Disabled Scanner Window Heater Enabled Disabled Settings have no effect if devices are not installed Heater trip point fo sl
368. twork and wireless settings Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings Status View the current adapter signal strength and quality IP address MAC address SSID BSSID and Link speed The user cannot edit this information Connection Avalanche Update Settings Ki Dei Connection Server Contact Pre Avalanche Server Address Ke MV Check serial connection V Disable ActiveSync Restrict Adapter Link Speed Min Link Speed 1000 kbs Avalanche Server Address Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to the MX9 Check Serial Connection Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to the Mobile Device Server Disable ActiveSync Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server Restrict Adapter Link Speed Default is disabled Minimum Link Speed dimmed Execution Note the dimmed options on this MX9 panel This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup Avalanche Update Settings OK A Execution Scan Config Shortcuts Al C Auto Execute selection Select Auto Execution App Delay before execution seconds Auto Execute Selection An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Management system can be run automatically follow
369. ument CTRL A Select all ALT ESC Cycle through items in the order they were opened CTRL ESC Display the Start menu ALT Underlined letter in a menu name Display the corresponding menu Underlined letter in a command name on Carry out the corresponding command an open menu ESC Cancel the current task Shift and Ctrl keys can be used with the touch screen for multiple selection of items as well To select disconnected items press the Ctrl key and then touch the screen for the items to be selected Press the Ctrl key again to terminate this mode To select a contiguous set of items press the Shift key then touch the first item in the series and the last item in the series Press the Shift key again to terminate the selection mode The touch screen provides equivalent functionality to a mouse e A touch on the touch screen is equivalent to a left mouse click A touch and hold is equivalent to a right mouse click e Many items can be moved by the drag and drop method touching the desired item moving the stylus across the screen and releasing the stylus in the desired location e A double stylus tap is equivalent to a double click Warmboot A warmboot reboots the MX9 without erasing any registry data Configuration settings and data in RAM are preserved during a warmboot Network sessions are lost and any data in running applications that has not been previously saved may be lost CAB files already installed remain
370. unctions Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the MX9 Bluetooth scanning range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the MX9 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the MX9 Stop Button Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions Devices not paired are not shown after any reboot sequence Bluetooth Device List EZ Pairi PrinterO1 EJ Printeroz AA BB D ScannerOl 4B CD ScannerO2 14 26 Clear Discover The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon Discovered devices without an icon can be paired as a Serial device Scanner or a Printer The Bluetooth panel assigns an icon to the device name An icon with a red background indicates the device s Bluetooth connection is inactive An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the MX9 and the device s Bluetooth connection is active Double tap a device in the list to open the device properties menu The opened device does not need to be active Bluetooth Device Menu 1 After the Discover button has been tapped and there are devices listed tap on a device in the list to highlight it 2 Double tap the highlighted device to display the Bluetooth Device right click menu The Bluetooth device does not need to be active Pair a
371. use the OPP service at a time external applications that wish to use OPP should disable EZPair OPP before using the OPP service and restore EZPair OPP upon completion using available API calls see the CE API Programming Guide for details These API calls are the equivalent of checking or unchecking the Disable EZPair OPP checkbox e If Disable EZPair OPP is not checked checking it causes EZPair OPP to be disabled and the send and receive functionality is disabled e If Disable EZPair OPP is checked and no application has registered a callback un checking EZPair OPP enables OPP functionality in EZPair and the send and receive functionality is enabled e If Disable EZPair OPP is checked and another application has registered a callback un checking Disable EZPair OPP issues a dialog box which says Another application is using OPP Do you wish to force their disconnection Doing so will force the other application to be unregistered The application that has been forcibly unregistered receives a FORCED_UNREGISTER_RECEIVED event OPP Setup Tab Use this screen to setup the MX9 for Object Push Protocol OPP EZ Pairi OKA x OPP Setup OPP Send About L4 Inbox My Documents DefaultInbox Outbox My Documents DefaultOutbox V Write Capable V Enable Notifications Disable LXEZ Pairing OPP Inbox This is an alphanumeric field displaying the currently selected Inbox e The Inbox is th
372. uter Processor PXA320 Monahans Memory 94652 KB RAM Expansion cards SummitDc 802 sl Registered to System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system For example a system with 128 MB may only report 99 MB memory since 29 MB is used by the operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash used for storage Memory Tab System Properties ki OK B Memory Device Name Copyrights lr Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move it to the right for more storage space Only unused RAM black portion of the slider bar can be adjusted Storage Program memory memory 47324KB total 47328KB total 7312KB in use 13112KBin use Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the mobile device is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Device Name Tab System Properties E OK ES Device Name Copyrights no Your device uses this information to identify itself to other computers Device name without spaces
373. veti ele wees canvas ieee ENEE 7 8 FRECOMMOCE enee ches tert este tate cts senda EE leed EE 7 10 ll TEE 7 10 PD OU EE 7 11 Easy Pairing and Auto Heconnect AAA 7 12 Bluetooth ul Te e TC 7 12 Bluetooth Bar Code Reader Setup cccccceeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeceeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeecaaeeseaeeesenaeessaeesenaeeeneaees 7 12 WAthO DU CHO Mens EE 7 12 MX9 with kapelaren aekin aee a a Ea EENS dite nue iE see ieee eens 7 13 MX9 without Label 7 13 Bluetooth Reader Beep and LED Indications AAA 7 14 Bluetooth Printer Setup AA 7 14 ue Bee EE 7 15 Pairing with an OPP Device sssssssesesiessirtssittskitttknttttnttitttttnttk tnt EnAtE AEAEE nntEn Annn nannan nnnnnEn anena 7 15 Remote Device Pushes File to MN 7 15 MX9 Pushes File to Remote Device sussssssssserressrrnserirrnnenrrrnnnnstrantenennnnennntnnenennnnentnaanantnnnnnena 7 16 EZPair or LXEZ Pairing and External Applications 0 cc cceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeee 7 16 OPP Setup TaD EE 7 16 OPP Send Tab EE 7 18 TE Tu el ET 7 18 Chapter 8 Data Collection Wedge tele Tei el SE 8 1 Return to Factory Default Settings 0 eccccesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeseaaeeeseaeeseaaeeeesaeeeseeeesseeesaas 8 1 Data Processing Overview ccccccceeeteeeseteeeeeneeeteeeeeseaeeeteeaeeseaaeeseaaeeegaaeeseaaeeesaeeseaaeeseeaeeseeaeeeseneeeseas 8 2 Main Tab WEE 8 3 Continuous Scan Mode 8 4 COMI Tab EE 8 5 Nottication Re ON 8 6 Data Options EL E
374. vice or e is discovering other Bluetooth devices e The LED blinks slowly Bluetooth LED is on for one second off for five seconds when it is idle e The LED blinks quickly Bluetooth LED is on for 1 4 second off for 2 seconds when the MX9 is discovering other Bluetooth devices e The LED blinks normally Bluetooth LED is on for 1 2 second off for 1 2 second when it is connected There may be audible or visual signals from paired devices as they move back into range and re connect with the Bluetooth hardware in the MX9 Setting Terminal Emulation Parameters Before you make a host connection you will at a minimum need to know 1 the alias name or IP address Host Address and the port number Telnet Port of the host system to properly set up your host session Make sure the MX9 network settings are configured and functional If you are connecting over wireless LAN 802 11 make sure your MX9is communicating with the Access Point From Start gt Programs run RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop Select Session gt Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to i e 3270 mainframe AS 400 5250 server or VT host Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system Update the telnet port number if y
375. ws Taskbar options When the taskbar is auto hidden press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear Tapping the Taskbar option on the Settings menu displays the Taskbar General tab and the Taskbar Advanced tab See Taskbar Icons page 5 12 General Tab Setting Default Always on Top Enabled Disabled Show Clock Enabled Taskbar and Start Menu Ki x General Advanced V Always on top IT Auto hide M Show Clack Advanced Tab Taskbar and Start Menu Ki A General Advanced Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Documents Menu Clear IT Expand Control Panel Expand Control Panel Tap the check box to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings gt Control Panel menu option Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder Taskbar Icons As MX9 devices and applications open and change state icons are placed in the Taskbar In most cases tapping the icon in the Taskbar opens the related application Refer to Start gt Help for an explanation of standard Windows CE taskbar icons Following are a few of the MX9 and Honeywell unique taskbar icons that may appear in the Taskbar These icons are in addition to the Windows CE taskbar icons Icon Function x A e Wireless Zero Config Inactive Connected Not Connected Tapping the icon opens t
376. ws you to explore the mobile device from the PC side with some limitations You can copy files to or from the mobile device by drag and drop You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the Windows folder on the mobile device Technically the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows image This however includes most of the files in the Windows folder Backup Data Files using ActiveSync Use the following information to backup data files from the mobile device to a host PC using the appropriate cables and Microsoft s ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center Prerequisite A partnership between the MX9 and ActiveSync has been established Serial Port Transfer e A host PC with an available serial port and a MX9 with a serial port The host PC must be running Windows e Null modem cable with all control lines connected Use the specific serial cable shown in Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection USB Transfer e A host PC with an available USB port and a MX9 with a USB port The host PC must be running Windows e Use the specific USB cable as show in Cable for USB ActiveSync Connection Connect 1 Connect the modem cable to the PC the host and the MX9 the client 2 Select Connect from the Start Menu on the mobile device Start gt Programs gt Communications gt Connect 3 Run Connect when the Get Connected wizard on the hos
377. y should be UL Listed with LPS or Class 2 outputs rated 12V minimum 2 amps The desktop cradle is available in three configurations 1 Without a power supply A power supply must be ordered separately 2 With a power supply and a US power cord 3 With a power supply but without a power cord A country specific power cord must be provided Communications cables for the MX9 are available separately Quick Start Desktop Cradle The following list outlines in a general way the process to follow when preparing the MX9 desktop cradle for use Refer to the following sections in this document for more details 1 Connect the cradle end of the power adapter cable to the Power port on the back of the cradle 2 Attach the AC power connector to a dependable power source 3 Attach any desired external cabled devices to the ports on the cradle 4 The desktop cradle is ready for use Battery Charging in a Desktop Cradle Main battery recharging in a docked MX9 is managed by the Power Management settings in the MX9 Refer to the Power control panel on the MX9 The spare battery in the spare battery well re charges with or without an MX9 in the dock The spare battery is fully charged in approximately four hours The cradle must be receiving power from an external power source before the main battery in the docked MX9 or spare bat tery pack charging can take place 13 3 Front View S Co MM A NO OP Go M
378. ynchronize with a Local Time Server By default GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection To synchronize with a local time server 1 Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime ini from the My Device gt Windows folder on the MX9 to the host PC 2 Edit the copy of GrabTime ini on the host PC Add the local time server s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers You can optionally delete the remainder of the list 3 Copy the modified GrabTime ini file to the My Device gt System folder on the MX9 The System GrabTime ini file takes precedence over the Windows GrabTime ini file System Grabtime ini also persists after a coldboot Windows Grabtime ini does not persist Setting Power Scheme Timers Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power gt Schemes Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes User Idle An amount of time has passed set by the User Idle timer and the device shuts down a minimum number of services e g backlights The System Idle timer and the Suspend timer have not expired yet System Idle An amount of time has passed set by the System Idle timer and the device shuts down a few more services e g display The User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer has not expired yet Suspend Suspend mode is entered when 1 the unit is inactive for a predetermined period of time 2 the user taps the Power key or 3 Start gt Suspend is chosen Inactivity means that internal dev
379. ypad only Bluetooth Status LED e Blue when Bluetooth activated e Off when Bluetooth not activated Keypad Backlight Setting The keypad backlight is white and can be set to be on or off The default value is on When set to off the keypad backlight does not turn on during Suspend Restart or reboots When set to on the keypad backlight follows the display backlight settings The keypad backlight turns off when the display backlight dims Toggle Vibrate Indicator The MX9 vibration motor is activated when a scan is completed successfully good scan vibration or with a failure scan key released before good scan timeout or rejected because of Data Options configuration The vibrations can be detected under the hand strap or through the trigger handle Toggle the vibrate indicator on or off by tapping the desired radio button for Good Scan Vibration and Bad Scan Vibration Options are Off Short Medium or Long Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touch screen Never use an actual pen pencil or sharp abrasive object to write on the touch screen Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use Using a stylus is similar to moving the mouse pointer then left clicking icons on a d
380. ze arm knob rotating the cradle and then re tightening the squeeze arm knob Periodically test the mounting device and re tighten bolts RAM balls and or squeeze arm adjustment knob as needed RAM Circular Base Footprint Not To Scale Bolts washers and nuts for mounting the RAM ball to the vehicle are supplied by Honeywell e Qty 4 Hex Cap 1 4 20 x 3 4 bolts e Qty 4 1 4 flat washer e Qty 4 1 4 20 nylon insert lock nuts Note Mount to the most rigid surface available 13 14 DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Side of Lid For use with e 9000311PWRSPLY Power Supply 9 60VDC 60W e 9000313PWRSPLY Power Supply 50 150VDC 60W Shown With Lid Attached Shown With Lid Removed e Lid is secured with screws on the side of lid e Input and output connector blocks under lid e One positive Vin negative Vin and ground 77 connection in input block e One positive Vo and negative Vo connection in output block If your DC DC power supply does not look like the image above see DC DC Power Supply Installation Screws on Top of Lid page 13 18 for installation instruction Connecting Electrical Cables to Power Sources The DC DC power supply is used to provide vehicle power to the MX9 when it is placed in a DC powered vehicle cradle Specifications for Electrical Supply Input Voltage Always observe input voltage range specified for the DC DC power supply Output Voltage 13 5 VDC

MX9 User`s Guide - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents